>!"*■ 
 
 ic' 
 
 
 0, J-^- ^•i'' > 
 
 S^qu^alli^b bg lytm to 
 tly? Sltbrarg of \ 
 
 Prinretott alljeolngtral S^^mtttarQ 
 
 :bsii4i 
 .Leq 
 
 1897 
 
 >*^f^ 
 
 ifilf 
 
 
.4 
 
 ^■■■r^' 
 
 
 ¥• 
 
 
 
 
 , v^-i^.-*- i'. ***i^ Jfevl-it" ^,^«.»"*'* -■ ■ 2*' •■ 
 
 
OUTLINES 
 
 <^/f/ 
 
 Special Introduction 
 
 TO THE 
 
 Books of the Old Testament 
 
 With an Introductory Statement upon 
 Old Testament Philology 
 
 BY 
 
 Rev. J. G. LANSING, D. D. 
 
 Gardner A. Sage Professor of Old Testament Languages and 
 
 Exegesis in the Theological Sem-'-^^iry at New Briins- 
 
 ivicJc, N. J., and Author of An Arabic Manual, 
 
 Outlines of Old Testament Archceology, 
 
 Etc., Etc. 
 
 Neav Brunswick, N. J. 
 J. HEIDIXGSFELD. PUBLISHER 
 
COPYRIGHT BY J. G. LANSING 
 
 1897 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 These Introduction Outlines were first printed a few 
 months ago in accordance with an action of the Gen- 
 eral Synod of the Reformed Church in America, for 
 the benefit of its students in the Theological Seminary 
 at New Brunswick, N. J. Something of a demand has 
 led to the publication of these Special Introduction 
 Outlines with a slight enlargement at a few points. 
 Still they are onlj^ Outlines, summarizing for and sug- 
 gesting to the Old Testament student and reader what 
 may be found more fully treated in the larger works 
 referred to by the author at the close of the volume.- 
 All have not these larger works, or time to study them ; 
 while others desire something in a condensed text or 
 reference-book form. Hence this little volume is mod- 
 estly offered, with the deepest sense of gratitude to the 
 authorities consulted by 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
Introductory Statement 
 
 UPON 
 
 OLD TESTAMENT PHILOLOGY, 
 
 I.— The Original Languages of the Old Testament. 
 
 The Old Testament was originally written in the 
 Hebrew language, with the exception of a few por- 
 tions, which were written in Chaldee. The Chaldee 
 portions are Dan. 2:4-7: 28 ; Ezra 4 : 8 -G : 18 ; 7 : 12-26 ; 
 Jer. 10:11. 
 
 The Hebrew language is a member of the large 
 family of languages called Shemitic. 
 
 II,— The Shemitic Languages. 
 
 The Shemitic languages belong to Palestine, Syria, 
 Phoenicia, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Arabia and Ethi- 
 opia. 
 
 These languages may be divided into three groups, 
 viz. North Shemitic, Central Shemitic and South 
 Shemitic. 
 
 North Shemitic. 
 
 1. Eastern, a. Babylonian, b. Assyrian. 
 
INTRODUCTION TOUTLINES. 
 
 2. Western. Aramaic. 
 
 East Aramaic 
 
 fa. Syriac. (Dialect 
 •^J ofEdessa.) 
 
 it" " 
 
 b. Mandean. 
 Nabathean. 
 
 ^ West Aramaic ^ 
 
 a. Samaritan. 
 
 b. Jewish Aramaic 
 
 (Daniel, Ezra, 
 Targums, Tal- 
 ( mud.) 
 
 c. Palmyrene. 
 
 I d. Egyptian Ara- 
 t maic. 
 
 Central Shemitic. 
 
 1. Phoenician, a. Old Phoenician, h. Late Phoeni- 
 cian or Punic. 
 
 2. Hebrew. 
 
 3. Moabitish and other Canaanitish dialects. 
 
 South Shemitic. 
 
 1. Northern. Arabic. 
 
 pabaean or Himyaritic. ] «; Mahri.^^^^.^^.^ 
 
 2. Southern. 
 
 I 
 
 I^Geez, or Ethiopic 
 
 (a. OldGeez. 
 I b. Tigre. 
 { c. Tigrina. 
 I d. Ambaric. 
 Le. Harari. 
 
 The Shemitic languages were developed from one 
 original mother-tongue, which has become lost, except 
 as it is preserved in these Shemitic forms of speech. 
 
 The Shemitic languages in all probability emigrated 
 from a common centre in the desert on the south of 
 Babylonia, the Arabic group separating first, next the 
 Aramaic, then the Hebrew, while the Babylonian gained 
 ultimately the mastery of the original Akkadian of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 7 
 
 Babylonia, and the Assyrian founded the great empir 
 on the Tigris. 
 
 The principal linguistic features common to the 
 Shemitic languages are as follows : 
 
 1. Roots consist of three consonants, generally ac- 
 companied by a vowel. 
 
 2. Inflections are obtained mainly by internal modi- 
 fications. 
 
 3. The fundamental signification is contained in the 
 consonantal root. 
 
 4. Modifications of this signification are obtained 
 mainly by changing the vowels of the root, doubling 
 root letters, and shortening or lengthening the root. 
 
 5. Moods and cases so far as they exist are expressed 
 by the three primary pure short vowels. 
 
 6. Instead of tenses there are two states^ Perfect and 
 Imperfect^ relating not to time, but to the complete- 
 ness or incompleteness of the act expressed by the verb. 
 
 7. Particles are few, and therefore the clauses of a 
 sentence are simple. 
 
 8. There is a wondrous wealth of so-called synonyms. 
 
 9. An intense realism is another marked feature. 
 
 10. There is a striking correspondence between and 
 indeed a subservience of the language to the thought : — 
 the idea, thought, emotion being the principal thing, 
 and bursting forth freely and boldly without any exter- 
 nal restraint in speech. 
 
 III.— The Alphabet and Alphabetical Writing. 
 
 The discovery of the Alphabet and of Alphabetical 
 Writing belongs to the ancient Egyptians. The art of 
 writing was practiced before the times of the patriarchs 
 
8 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 and probably by the patriarchs themselves. For while 
 Moses is the first one spoken of in the Bible as a writer, 
 the art is not represented as anything new ; as, besides, 
 we read of the seal-ring of Jiidah, implying a knowl- 
 edge of the art. That Moses and the Israelites at the 
 time of the Exodus understood the art of Alphabetical 
 Writing is unquestionable. The special calling of the 
 Shoterim of Moses's day was to write. In Deuteronomy 
 is an injunction to write an abstract of the law, imply- 
 ing an ability to write. In the Book of Joshua we 
 learn that a copy of the law of Moses was written on 
 stones prepared for the purpose. In Judges we are 
 told of a young man who is able to write down a long 
 list of names comprising the eldership and the princes 
 of Succoth. After the time of David the practice of 
 writing in all its forms was common with every class 
 of the people. 
 
 From the time of Isaiah it would appear that besides 
 the customary written character there was another rep- 
 resenting a more running hand, and possibly letters of 
 a smaller size. (Isa. 8: 1.) Others find in Isaiah's "a 
 man's pen," an indication that already the larger Ara- 
 maic character had been introduced, and that he was 
 directed to use the old, rather than the new^ style. This, 
 however, is questionable; although the Aramaic was 
 doubtless understood by some persons in Israel at this 
 date. This Aramaic character, which is the one now 
 solely in use in our Hebrew Bible, supplanted the origi- 
 nal Hebrew alphabet after the Babylonian Exile. The 
 latter however still exists, in its general features, in the 
 Samaritan alphabet, the inscriptions of the Moabite 
 Stone, belonging to the ninth century B. C. and on 
 extant coins of the Maccabiiean period. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 9 
 
 IV.— The Hebrew Language. 
 
 The name Hebrew is deriv^ed by some from Eher the 
 ancestor of Abraham (Gen. 10:24, 25; 11:14; 14:13), 
 and by others from tlie Hebrew word eber — beyond^ and 
 three — the one from beyond^ referring to Abraham's mi- 
 gration, and translated "the Hebrew" in Gen. 14:13. 
 
 The Hebrew^ language was already considerably de- 
 veloped when Abraham entered Canaan. This lan- 
 guage, akin to his own, Abraham in all probability 
 learned from the Cauaanites; that is, he adopted the 
 language of the Canaanites. The expression "Hebrew 
 Language" is not found in the Old Testament. It is 
 there called the " language of Canaan," a strong inci- 
 dental proof of the origin of the language itself. Most 
 scholars are agreed that some dialect of the Hebrew was 
 spoken in Canaan at the time of Abraham's migration 
 thither. This theory is confirmed by the circumstance 
 that the Phoenician language, still preserved in numer- 
 ous inscriptions, is strikingly analogous to the Hebrew, 
 in vocabulary, and in many characteristic formations of 
 nouns and verbs. The language spoken by Abraham 
 previous to his migration was also, like the Hebrew, 
 Shemitic; but it was probably that which is now being 
 brought to light in connection with the Babylonian and 
 Assyrian monuments of the East. This ancient Assy- 
 rian and Babylonian are nearer to the Hebrew and 
 Phoenician than they are to other Shemitic languages. 
 The original dialect of Canaan was undoubtedly largely 
 developed and adapted to its higher use in connection 
 with the immigration of Abraham and tiie peculiar 
 history of the Israelitish people. By Jacob and his 
 descendants the Hebrew language was cairied into 
 
10 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Egypt, preserved there during their sojourn, and then 
 brought back again to its original home in Canaan. 
 
 In relation to the rest of the Shemitic languages, the 
 Hebrew is remarkable for its antiquitj^ purity and sim- 
 plicity. In richness both of diction and grammatical 
 forms it occupies a place midway between the poverty 
 of the Aramaic and the wealth of the Arabic. For the 
 most part it has admitted foreign words only in the 
 case of foreign objects. Especially has it developed a 
 rich store of ideas in the sphere of religion. Alongside 
 of its prose composition, and the language of common 
 life, it early developed a peculiar poetical style con- 
 structed for the most part on the simple principle of the 
 parallelism of members. Like all the Shemitic lan- 
 guages, the Hebrew language has suffered no amazing 
 changes, but has remained substantially unmodified, 
 either by accretion from other languages, or by any 
 great growth of development within itself, during its 
 entire literary period. And finally the Hebrew language 
 is above all, in its essential spirit and genius, a re-, 
 ligious language, the holy tongue of God's holy people. 
 
 But while, like the rest of the Shemitic languages, 
 the Hebrew language has undergone no amazing change, 
 still three stages or periods of linguistic and literary 
 development are noticeable in it, viz. the Mosaic, the 
 Davidic and Solomonic and the Exilian and Post- 
 Exilian. 
 
 v.— Hebrew Language and Literature in the Mosaic Period. 
 
 The language of the age of Moses bears the stamp of 
 greater antiquity as compared with subsequent periods. 
 It contains archaic and poetic words and forms seldom 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 11 
 
 found elsewhere. The number of words, forms of 
 words and phrases are greater. Theie is a poetical 
 coloring to the prose, and a primitive originality to the 
 poetry. Some words are afterwards found to have 
 slightly changed or developed their signification or 
 form. A slight diffeience is also found between the 
 Book of Genesis and the remaining Books of the Pen- 
 tateuch, not so much in grammatical respects, but in 
 that Genesis contains a considerable number of words 
 and phrases which in the time of Moses had already 
 gone out of use, and had been replaced by others. 
 
 In respect to literature, Moses the founder of the 
 Hebrew State, was also the creator of the Hebrew Lit- 
 erature. To him is attributed not only the reduction 
 to writing of the whole legislation that takes its name 
 from him, but also the composition in willing of the 
 entire Pentateuch. How much of the historical ac- 
 counts from primitive times came down to Moses orally, 
 and how much had been written down earlier than the 
 time of Moses, we cannot determine. Moses gave Israel 
 commandments, statutes, and judgments which he 
 wrote in "the Book of the Covenant." He also col- 
 lected and arranged the traditions of primitive and 
 earlier times. He entered in the Book of the Law all 
 the weighty events of his own time, both for his- 
 torical and didactic purposes. And in addition, the 
 Books of Moses contain prophetic utterances, poetical 
 productions and songs, either composed and written bj^ 
 Moses, as, e. g. his parting song and blessing (Dent. 
 Chs. 32, 33), or transcribed and incorporated by him, 
 as e. (j. Balaam's prophecies (Nu. Chs. 22-24), and 
 single fragments of songs out of "The Book of the 
 Wars of the Lord " (Nu. 21 : 14, 17, 27-30). 
 
12 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. ' 
 
 y I. -Hebrew Lang-iiage and Literature in the Davidic and 
 Solomonic Period. 
 
 The second or intermediate period of the Hebrew 
 language and literature reaches from Samuel to Heze- 
 kiah (B. C. 1100-700). It is the Golden Age of the 
 Hebrew language and literature, attaining its zenith 
 under David and Solomon, whose rich mental endow- 
 ments in the department of literature contributed 
 greatly to the cultivation and development of the 
 language. 
 
 Already in the Book of Joshua, the last Book of the 
 Hexateuch, linguistic development begins to be observ- 
 arble, in the disappearance of archaisms, in new con- 
 ceptions and expressions, and in peculiar formations of 
 words. This linguistic development becomes of greater 
 importance under Samuel, in the Books of Judges, Ruth 
 and Samuel, where we find new conceptions and words, 
 formed in the course of the progressive development of 
 the domestic, civil, political, and religious life of the 
 nation; besides, a large number of words in the Books 
 of Samuel, that do not previously occur in prose, but 
 belong mainly to poetical and prophetical language. 
 The language attained its highest degree of culti- 
 vated use in connection with the poetry that flourished 
 under David and Solomon, and in which is seen a 
 decided enlargement and enrichment of the vocabulary, 
 the grammatical forms and the intellectual force of the 
 language. It develoi^s new roots and words, new forms 
 and formations of words, and new words in derivative 
 significations. And not only poetry, but prophecy also 
 contributed largely to tlie cultivation of the language 
 by means of its enlarged vocabulary, its oratorical style, 
 and its powerful imagery in the announcement of divine 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 13 
 
 truth. This high degree of cultivation attained by the 
 language during this period, and as displayed in its 
 poetic and prophetic literature, is owing, in part, to the 
 increase of its roots and its formations of words, ac- 
 cording to its own laws for making these; and, in part, 
 to the adoption of words and forms from tlie kindred 
 Arabic and Aramaic dialects. This latter class of 
 words, of course, belonged to the common Shemitic 
 language, but the words had been retained only by one 
 or other of the branches into which the race became 
 divided, and especially by the Arabic branch, until 
 the ' again became appropriated by the Hebrews. 
 
 The Hebrew literature of this period embraces the 
 historical and poetic writings falling between the time 
 of Moses, and that of David, the Davidic Psalms, and 
 the older prophetic and poetic writings, including the 
 lives and writings of David, Solomon, Isaiah, Amos, 
 Hosea, Joel, Jonah, Micah and Nahum. From the death 
 of Moses till the time of Samuel the literature is chiefly 
 historical, with occasional bursts of exalted poetiy as, 
 e. g. the songs of Deborah and Hannah. Under 
 Samuel and his "schools of tlie prophets" a theocratic 
 literature becomes revived and greatly promoted. 
 Under David and Solomon, who were endowed with 
 such rich and profound mental attainments, lyric and 
 didactic poetr}' nourishes. As affairs became dis- 
 ordered towards the end of Solomon's reign, and a 
 growing decadence in religious life became more 
 observable, prophetic literature rose continually into 
 increasing importance. Prophecies became more ex- 
 tended and more impressive in subject matter. This 
 prophetic literature revolves about the two great themes 
 of prophecy; on the one hand prevailing sin, and the 
 
14 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 divine purifications and punishments therefor; and on 
 the other hand the gracious and glorious designs of the 
 theocracy, when, after purification by these judgments, 
 days of blessedness and glory should dawn by the 
 mission of Messiah to redeem Israel, and to bring the 
 saving knowledge of the Lord to all nations. This 
 prophetic literature beginning with the ninth century, 
 attains its climax in Isaiah, during the Assyrian period. 
 This prophetic literature designed not only for the times 
 in which it was produced, but chiefly for the future, 
 contained also much of historical matter written in a 
 theocratic spirit. Prophetic writings appeared in refer- 
 ence to the reigns of most of the kings, in which his- 
 torical narratives of the weightiest events were united 
 with the prophetic utterances which they called forth, 
 as e. g. "The words of Samuel, Gad, Nathan, Shem- 
 aiah, Iddo, Jehu," etc. Individual prophets also com- 
 posed separate historical works, from a prophetic point 
 of view, upon individual reigns, as e. g. Isaiah's his- 
 tory of XJzziah (2 Chron. 26 : 22) and the prophet Iddo's 
 Midrash (commentary R. V.) upon the reign of Abijah 
 (2 Chron. 13:22). Besides there were court annalists 
 who recorded the principal undertakings and events of 
 different reigns for the state archives, and from which 
 records were subsequently elaborated the general 
 " Chronicles of the Kingdoms." 
 
 VII.— Hebrew Language and Literature in the Exilian and 
 Post-Exilian Period. 
 
 The third period of the Hebrew language and litera- 
 ture extends from the time of the Babylonian Exile to 
 the times of the Maccabees, and is marked by the 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 15 
 
 approximation of the Hebrew to the kindred Aramaic 
 and Chaldee. 
 
 With the Assyrian invasions the Aramaic dialect 
 began to spread, and to act as a restraint upon the 
 continued independent development of the Hebrew 
 language. Hebrew words and grammatical formations 
 became supplanted by newer ones for the most part 
 Aramaic; the understanding of the old language 
 became obscured; its force and operations became 
 weakened, while grammatical niceties, and the dis- 
 tinction of prose and poetical diction became lost. 
 During the exile the Aramaic or Chaldee gained such 
 au ascendancy over the Hebrew, that on their return 
 only the more educated of the people still understood 
 the mother-tongue, while the nation that had grown 
 up in exile spoke Aramaic or Chaldee, and Hebrew 
 ceased to be the living language of the people. 
 
 In the literature of this period may be seen to a 
 greater or less extent the approximation of the Hebrew 
 to the kindred Aramaic and Chaldee, thus in Ezra, 
 Nehemiah, Chronicles, Esther, Haggai, Zechariah, 
 Malachi, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, Daniel, and the later 
 Psalms. The literature of this period was first of all 
 I)rophetic, the prophets rebuking the people for ingrati- 
 tude; pledging them the certain fulfillment of the 
 divine promises; and foretelling the purifying judg- 
 ments that awaited the old theocracy, the close of the 
 mission of the prophets of Israel, and the announce- 
 ment of Messiah's forerunner with his own appearing 
 for the judgment of the ungodly. For a short time 
 poetry gave utterance to the praises of God in a num- 
 ber of temple-songs and then became extinct. Finally, 
 the prophetic spirit soon entirely disappeared from 
 
16 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 history. With Malachi the spirit of the ancient 
 prophets passed away from Israel, and about 400 B. C. 
 Hebrew canonical literature came to an end. 
 
 VIII.— Moabitish, Old and Late Phoenician. 
 
 To the Central Shemitic group belong also the Moab- 
 itish, the Old Ph(jenician, and the Late Phcpnician or 
 Punic languages. 
 
 The alphabet was of Egyptian origin. It was com- 
 municated by the Egyptians to the Phcjenicians. From 
 the Phcpnicians it was received by the nations round 
 about them. 
 
 What were the forms of the Phoenician letters used 
 on the eastern side of the Jordan in the time of Ahab, 
 we learn from the celebrated Moabite Stone. The 
 forms employed in Israel and Judah on the western 
 side could not have differed much ; so that in these 
 forms or characters we see in general the mode of 
 writing employed by the earlier prophets of the Old 
 Testament. The Moabite Stone was discovered in 1869 
 among the ruins of Dhiban, the ancient Dibon. The 
 Stone is of black basalt, and contains an inscription of 
 thirtj^-four lines in the letters of the Phoenician alpha- 
 bet. The inscription is a record of Mesna, king of 
 Moab, of whom we read in 2 Ki. Ch. 3, that after 
 Ahab's death he " rebelled against the king of Israel," 
 and was vainly besieged in his capital, Kirharaseth, by 
 the combined armies of Israel, Judah and Edom. 
 Mesha describes the successful issue of his revolt, and 
 the revenge he took upon the Israelites for their former 
 oppression of his country. In man}^ respects the in- 
 scription reads much like a chapter from one of the 
 historical Books of the Old Testament. Not only are 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 17 
 
 the phrases the same, but the words and grammatical 
 forms are, with one or two exceptions, all found in 
 Scriptural Hebrew. From which we learn that the 
 language of Moab differed less from that of the Israel- 
 ites than does one English dialect from another. The 
 story told by the Stone, and the account of the war 
 against Moab given in the Bible, supplement one 
 another. 
 
 But as the writing of two persons will differ, so the 
 writing of the Moabites on the east side of the Jordan 
 and the writing of the Jews on the west side must have 
 differed to some extent. Besides there must have been 
 some difference between the cursive writing of a papy- 
 rus roll and the carefully carved letters of a monument 
 like Mesha's. This seems to be implied by Isa. 8:1. 
 But until the discovery of the Siloam inscription we 
 were not in possession of any Hebrew inscription of 
 authentic pre-exilic date. The inscription is as old as 
 the time of Isaiah, and may be older. It was discov- 
 ered in 1880. The Pool of Siloam is supplied with water 
 through a tunnel excavated in the rock. This tunnel 
 communicated with the so-called Spring of the Virgin, 
 the only natural spring of water in or near Jerusalem. 
 It rises below the walls of the city, on the western bank 
 of the Kidron Valley ; and the tunnel through which its 
 waters are conveyed is consequently cut through the 
 ridge that forms the southern part of the Temple Hill. 
 The Pool of Siloam lies on the opposite side of the 
 ridge, at the mouth of the valley called that of the 
 Cheesemakers (Tyropoeon) in the time of Josephus. The 
 inscription occupies the under part of an artificial tab- 
 let in the wall of rock, about nineteen feet from where 
 the conduit opens out upon the Pool of Siloam, and on 
 [2 J 
 
18 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the right hand side of one who enters it, i. e. the 
 southern side. The inscription consists of eight lines 
 and relates to the excavation of the tunnel. It was 
 executed either in the reign of Hezekiah, 2 Ki. 20 : 20 ; 
 2 Chron. 32 : 30, or Ahaz, Isa. 8 : 6, or possibly Solomon. 
 With the exception of one word the language of the 
 inscription is the purest Biblical Hebrew, and the 
 writing and characters those used by the early prophets. 
 The Old Phoenician and the Late Phoenician or Punic 
 languages differ but little from the Hebrew^ but, on 
 the whole, represent a later stage of grammatical struc- 
 ture than the language of the Old Testament. The 
 Phoenician literary remains are for the most part con- 
 fined to coins, topographical names preserved by class- 
 ical writers, proper names of persons, and monumental 
 inscriptions. The longest, oldest and most important 
 monumental inscription is on the sarcophagus of 
 Eshmunazar, king of Sidon, and the date of which 
 falls between 1000 and 700 B. C. 
 
 IX.— The Aramaic or North Shemitic. 
 
 Taking the Hebrew language as occupying geogra- 
 phically the Middle Territory, the Arabic prevailed to 
 the South, and the Aramaic to the Nortli or Northeast, 
 
 The two dialects constituting the Aramaic language 
 with which we are most familiar are the Syriac and the 
 Chaldee. The Chaldee is again classified into the 
 Biblical Chaldee, those portions in Ezra, Daniel, etc. 
 cited, and the non-Biblical Chaldee, i. e., the lan- 
 guages of the Targums or Chaldee paraphrases. 
 
 The Aramaic language, taking the place of the Phoe- 
 nician, became the language of intercourse and com- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 19 
 
 merce between the people of the North. The language 
 became adopted by the Jews when they were carried 
 away into their captivity in the North. It continued 
 to be the language of the Jews during the Persian, 
 Greek and Roman periods, and was the common speech 
 of Palestine in the time of Christ. 
 
 Harsh in its consonants, poor in its vowels, weak in 
 its system of conjugations, marked by a general pov- 
 erty of forms and vocalization, and not infrequentlj^ 
 weakened and corrupted by pleonasm and the intro- 
 duction of foreign words, — the Aramaic is the least 
 opulent and least cultivated of all the Shemitic lan- 
 guages. Still, on the other hand, it is a language ad- 
 mirably adapted by its simplicit}^, perspicuity, pre- 
 cision, and definiteness, with all its awkwardness, for 
 the associations of every day life.- 
 
 The Chaldee or Eastern Aramaic, known to us from 
 its Jewish monuments (Daniel, Ezra, theTargums, etc.), 
 differs frequentlj^ from the Syriac in the province both 
 of the grammar and of the lexicon. The Syriac or 
 Western Aramaic, possessed a considerable literature 
 from the middle of the second century and onwards to 
 the thirteenth, being especially rich in works on 
 theology and ecclesiastical history. Its most flourishing 
 center was Edessa. 
 
 The Assyrian or Assyro-Babylonian language, belong- 
 ing also to the North Shemitic group dates back to a 
 remote antiquity, and strongly resembles the Hebrew. 
 It continued in use until, like the Hebrew and Phoeni- 
 cian, it was supplanted by the Aramaic, and became 
 lost. Its rediscovery or decipherment was made possi- 
 ble by the help of trilingual inscriptions, just as the 
 decipherment of the Egyptian hieroglyphics was made 
 
20 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 by the help of the trilingual Rosetta stone discovered 
 in 1799. The system of Assyrian writing was originally 
 like the Egyptian, hieroglyphic and pictorial. The 
 Assyrian characters are composed of wedges ; hence the 
 name cuneiform (from c?/7iei^s= wedge). These wedges 
 are both single and double, and as to position are hori- 
 zontal, perpendicular and sloping. The characters 
 contain from one to twenty wedges each, and represent 
 either syllables or words. These are ideograms, i. e. 
 signs of objects or ideas, and phonograms, i. e. >igns 
 for sounds. The Assyrian literature is considerable 
 and is inscribed on bricks, prisms, slabs, statues, 
 obelisks, walls of temples and palaces, etc. The oldest 
 known writing belongs to the time of Sargon I. about 
 B. C. 3800. 
 
 To the Aramaic or North Shemitic group belong also 
 the Samaritan and the Pa^myrene. 
 
 The Samaritans were a mixed people, arising from 
 the fusion of the Iraelites who remained in the land 
 after the breaking up of the kingdom of Israel and the 
 deportation of its inhabitants by the Assyrians, with 
 the foreign Aramaean colonists who were planted there 
 by the conquerors. Not only the people, but also the 
 language is mixed. That is, the Samaritan occupies 
 an intermediate position in respect to Hebrew and 
 Aramaic, and is marked especially by changes in the 
 gutturals, and by the large number of non-Shemitic 
 words it contains. The Samaritan literature is conf ned 
 to the Samaritan Pentateuch, the Samaritan Targum, 
 and certain Chronicles, Liturgies, and Hymns. 
 
 The Palmyrene is known to us in the Palmyrene 
 inscriptions of the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor. The 
 inscriptions are chiefly bilingual, in an Aramaic much 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 21 
 
 like the common dialect, the date of the earliest being 
 A. D. 49. 
 
 The Mandeans dwelt in the vicinit}^ of the Tigris and 
 Euphrates, while the Nabatheans extended from the 
 North Arabian or Syrian desert south to Petra and the 
 Gulf of Akaba. The language is closely allied to the 
 Sja-iac. 
 
 The Egyptian Aramaic approximates the Chaldee. 
 
 X,— The Arabic or South Shemitic. 
 
 Of all the Shemitic tongues the Arabic is the most 
 opulent, the most logical, the most widely diffused, and 
 the most important in the study of the other Shemitic 
 languages. It is so on account of its antiquity, its 
 purity, its affinity, its living character, its immense lit- 
 erature, its fertility in all directions, and its logical 
 structure and development. Arabic writings antedat- 
 ing the Muhammad an and Christian eras exhibit a lan- 
 guage alread}^ perfect in form and application. The 
 Arabic retains more that is common to all the Shemitic 
 languages than does any other Shemitic language. Not 
 only separate nouns, but the radical mateiials of lan- 
 guage, such as numerals, prepositions, pronouns, etc. ; 
 and not only separate verbs, but grammatical inflec- 
 tions, show the great antiquity of the Arabic in which 
 thej^ have been preserved, while becoming lost in other 
 Shemitic branches. The Hebrew of the Pentateuch, 
 and the Assyrian as it appears to us even in the oldest 
 inscriptions, show greater signs of linguistic impair- 
 ment and disintegration than does the post-classical 
 Arabic. In the rejection of the short vowels at the end 
 of a word ; in the disappearance of many varieties of 
 inflection; in the loss of an earlier wealth of forms and 
 
22 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 significations, by assimilation, substitutions and omis- 
 sions, the Hebrew and other Shemitie tongues have 
 suffered loss, while the Arabic has remained pure and 
 rich in all these respects. The remarkable affinity 
 between the Arabic and Hebrew is well known. No 
 two Shemitie tongues are so closely related. More than 
 two-thirds of the Hebrew roots are to be found in the 
 Arabic under corresponding letters. The proportion is 
 much greater if we allow for the changes of the weak 
 and cognate letters. In fact over ninety per cent, of 
 Hebrew and Arabic words have a common origin. The 
 Arabic contains by far the larger proportion of the 
 roots that are common to all the Shemitie languages. 
 In the copiousness of its vocabulary, in the fertility of 
 its literature of all kinds the Arabic surpasses almost 
 all tongues. Especially in its grammatical and lexical 
 laws for linguistic construction and development is the 
 Arabic of greatest richness and importance. No She- 
 mitie tongue is so important, and in some cases ab- 
 solutely esssential to the student of the Old Testament 
 Scriptures, not only in respect to grammar and lexicon, 
 but also in respect to exegesis and interpretation. 
 
 To the Arabic or South Shemitie group belongs also 
 the Himyaritic, or Himyaritic Arabic of the south which 
 dates back many centuries B. C, and still exists archa- 
 ically in the monumental inscriptions of Yemen and 
 Hadramaut. 
 
 To the Arabic belongs also the Ethiopic (called 
 Geez) in Abyssinia, a branch of the Himyaritic, simpler 
 in its structure than the Arabic, and in general use in 
 Abyssinia as a written language until the end of the 
 sixteenth century, when it was supplanted by the 
 Tigre and Amharic dialects. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 23 
 
 Introduction Outlines 
 
 OF 
 
 OLD TESTAMENT BOOKS, 
 
 GENESIS. 
 
 I. Name.— In Hebrew the name of the Book is taken 
 from the first word of the first verse, viz., Braysheeth 
 == In a heginiiing. The name Genesis comes from the 
 LXX (Septnag'int) Version, and is derived from the 
 Greek rendering of Gen. 2:4, the particnlar word being 
 Geneseos = Genesis = Generations. 
 
 II. Position.— The first of the sacred canonical Books, 
 called the Bible; the first of the five Books of Moses, 
 called the Pentatench; and the first of th6 six Books 
 composed of the Pentateuch and the Book of Joshua, 
 called the Hexateuch. Standing at the head of the 
 Canon, of the Hexateuch, and of the Pentateuch, Genesis 
 is introductory to all these, not only according to posi- 
 tion but also according to its general theme or subject 
 matter. 
 
 III. Theme. — As its name implies the Book of 
 Genesis is the Book of Beginnings. It treats of the 
 beginnings of the human race, and the beginnings of 
 
24 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the Hebrew Theocracy. In the main it treats of the 
 beginnings of the Hebrew Theocracy. In doing so it 
 traces the ancestry of Israel back to the first apj)ear- 
 ance of man upon the earth, while it also defines the 
 position and relation of the nationality of Israel to the 
 other nations of the earth. 
 
 IV. Authorship, Unity, etc.— Two principal views 
 obtain — 
 
 1. That Moses is the author of Genesis and the Pen- 
 tateuch. 
 
 2. That the Pentateuch proceeds from a number of 
 sources, authors, editors, redactors, etc. 
 
 This second, the divisive or partition theory, in 
 respect to the Pentateuch has been held in various 
 forms at different times. Certain ancient heretics, 
 e. y. Clementine, denied the Mosaic authorship of cer- 
 tain parts of the Pentateuch, on purely personal 
 grounds. But the Mosaic authorship of the Penta- 
 teuch was unquestioned until in the eleventh century 
 when Isaac ben Jasos maintained that Gen. Ch. 36 
 belonged to a date much later than the time of Moses. 
 Aben Ezra in the following century found certain 
 expressions in certain passages that he regarded as 
 post-Mosaic interpolations. Peyrei'ius (1G55) discovers 
 suspicious references, obscurities, omissions, transposi- 
 tions, repetitions, improbabilities arguing against the 
 Mosaic authorship. Spinoza (16?0) regards a number 
 of passages as non-Mosaic, his idea being that Moses 
 wrote his laws from time to time, which laws were sub- 
 sequently collected and tlie history inserted by another, 
 the whole being finally remodelled by Ezra, and called 
 the Books of Moses because he was the principal sub- 
 ject. Hobbes (1651) discovers anachronisms, and 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 25 
 
 regards as Mosaic only Deut. Chs. 11-27. Richard 
 Simon (1685) held that Moses wrote the laws, but that 
 the historical portions w^ere the work of various scribes 
 or prophets. These and others of the earlier objectors 
 were ably answered by Carpoz (1731) and Witsius 
 (1736). The later objections to the Mosaic authorship 
 of the Pentateuch affect its form rather than its con- 
 tents. It is asserted that the constitution of the Pen- 
 tateuch shows that it does not proceed from any one 
 writer, but that it is composed of parts of diverse 
 origin, the productions of different writers, these 
 writers belonging to a time long posterior to the age of 
 Moses. These later objections are directed first against 
 the unity of the Pentateuch, and then against its 
 authenticity. By the unity of the Pentateuch it is 
 understood that in its present form the Pentateuch is 
 one continuous work, the product of a single writer, 
 i. e. Moses. This writer, Moses, may have had before 
 him various written sources from which to draw his 
 materials, or credible tradition, or personal knowledge, 
 or divine revelation, but was the composition of the 
 Pentateuch, as we now have it, his own ? That is, in 
 regard to the unit}^ of the Pentateuch, is it a continu- 
 ous production from a single pen, whatever may have 
 been the sources from which the materials were taken, 
 or is it a comfjosite production, constituted of various 
 writings brought together, the several portions of 
 which may still be distinguished, separated and as- 
 signed to their respective originals ? As against the 
 single, continuous, Mosaic composition of the Penta- 
 teuch, various partition hypotheses have been main- 
 tained, as follows: 
 
 1. llie Document Hypothesis. In support of the 
 
26 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 credibility^ of Genesis, Vatringa (1707) expressed the 
 opinion that Moses collected, digested, embellished, 
 and supplemented the records left by the fathers and 
 preserved among the Israelites. But Astruc (1753) 
 could not agree with this, and declared that Genesis 
 was not merely based on preexisting writings, but that 
 it was framed out of those writings, which were incor- 
 porated in it, pieced together, each retaining its own 
 style and texture, so that they can be taken apart and 
 the original sources produced. This hypothesis was 
 adopted and elaborated by Eichhorn (1782-1823). 
 This Document Hypothesis was based: a. Upon the 
 dilfeience in the usage of the divine names Eloheem 
 (= God), and Jehovah, h. The assertion that the 
 Eloheem and Jehovah sections, tai^en alone, form 
 a regularly constructed and continuous narrative. 
 c. Modifications in alleged parallel passages in the two 
 documents, d. Diversity in style, diction, ideas, in 
 the two documents. 
 
 2. Tlie Fragment Hypothesis. While the Document 
 Hypothesis was still being agitated a more extreme 
 measure of a divisive Pentateuch was advocated by 
 Vater (1805), Hartmann (1831), and others, who advo- 
 cated what is known as the Fragment Hypothesis. 
 This Hj'pothesis has been fitly described as the Docu- 
 ment Hypothesis run mad. Instead of two continuous 
 documents j)ieced together to constitute the Penta- 
 teuch, we have now, according to the Fragment H}-- 
 pothesis, the paragraphs and sections of these two 
 documents assigned to separate and independent 
 sources. The arguments adduced in favor of the 
 Fragment Hypothesis are in the main the same as 
 those urged in favor of the Document Hypothesis. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 27 
 
 This Hypothesis was refuted by Ewald in his earliest 
 publication (1823), and still more thoroughly by F. H. 
 Ranke (1834-1840). 
 
 3. The Supplement Hypothesis. The Supplement 
 H3^pothesis advocated by Bleek, Tuch, Stahelin De 
 Wette, Knobel, and others, was a reaction in the right 
 direction against the inconsistencies and incongruities 
 of the Fragment Hypothesis. It was a modification of 
 the Document Hypothesis, retaining the Elohist and 
 Jehovist of that older theory. But instead of assign- 
 ing to them the authorship of independent documents, 
 it is supposed that the Ehjhist first prepared his work, 
 and that this work constitutes the basis of the Penta- 
 teuch. Then later came the Jehovist who prepaied an 
 enlarged edition of this older history, preserving its 
 form and language, but mailing vai ions incorporations 
 and amplifications according to the materials he had 
 on hand or deemed important. Against the Supple- 
 ment Hypothesis and in support of the unity and 
 Mosaic authorship of the Pentateuch were Drechsler, 
 Havernick, Keil, and Hengstenberg. 
 
 4. Crystallization Hypothesis. The partition critics 
 were not satisfied with the simplicity of the Supi)lement 
 Hypothesis. Ewald and Hupfeld attempted to remedy 
 the inconveniences. Ewald in 1843 proposed what 
 has been designated as the Crystallization Hj^pothesis. 
 This is a modification of the SuiDplement Hypothesis 
 by increasing the number engaged in supplementing 
 from one to a series, operating at distinct periods. 
 Thus first there were four primitive fragments, or 
 treatises existing only in fragments. Then second 
 came the Book of Origins, which in turn was followed 
 by the third, fourth, and fifth prophetic narrators. 
 
28 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 each adding to what had previously been recorded, 
 while the last with his additions constituted the whole 
 into one continuous work. Then the Deuteronomist 
 wrote Deuteronomy, subsequently incorporated with 
 the work of his predecessors. So the Pentateuch, or 
 rather the Hexateuch, for the Pentateuch and Joshua 
 were regarded by Ewald, as by the majority of modern 
 partition critics, as one work, so the Hexateuch grew 
 into its present vast and divisive dimensions. 
 
 5. Modified Document Hypothesis. In order to 
 remove the difficulties connected with the Supplement 
 Hypothesis, Hupfeld in 1853 proposed a modification 
 of the Document Hypothesis. According to Hupfeld 
 there are three independent documents, viz. the 
 Jehovist, the first Elohist, and the second Elohist. 
 The second Elohist used the name Eloheem, but he 
 had peculiarities belonging to the Jehovist. These 
 three documents were then put together in their pres- 
 ent form by a Redactor who had unlimited liberty in 
 his treatment of the materials. 
 
 ^^arious symbols are used to denote these Penta- 
 teuchal. Documents. In the nomenclature now gener- 
 ally used J = Jehovist, E = Elohist (formerly the 
 second Elohist). J and E are said to have proceeded 
 from prophetic circles, the former in the southern 
 kingdom of Judah, the latter in the northern kingdom 
 of Israel. The second Elohist having been separated 
 from what was formerly known as the Elohist Docu- 
 ment, the remnant has been designated as P = the 
 priestly writing, in distinction from the prophetic his- 
 tories of J and E. The critics further distinguish J^ 
 and J^ El and E^, pi, ps and P^ D^ and D^, which 
 rei3resent different strata in these documents. Differ- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 29 
 
 ent Redactors are in general represented bj^ R, thus 
 Rj who combined J and E, Rd who added D to J E, 
 and Rh who completed the Hexatench by combining P 
 with JED. 
 
 The arguments adduced in support of these various 
 partition hypotheses are in the main as follows : 
 
 1. The alternate employment of the divine names 
 Eloheem and Jehovah. 
 
 2. The alleged fact that when the several sections, 
 respectively assigned to the supposed writers sepa- 
 rately, are put together they form a continuous and 
 connected whole. 
 
 3. Differences in the accounts given of what is sup- 
 posed one and the same event or series of events. 
 
 4. Differences in respect to diction, style, etc. 
 
 5. Differences in point of view relating to theological 
 and other matter. 
 
 As against these various partition hypotheses, the 
 unity, and the Mosaic authorship of the Pentateuch 
 are claimed upon the following grounds : 
 
 1. The argument from Scripture. We have 
 
 a. In the New Testament Christ and his apostles 
 furnish abundant and explicit testimony to the Mosaic 
 authorship of the Pentateuch. Thus Mat. 8:4; 19:7, 
 8. Mark 1:4; 10:3,5; 12:19, 26. Luke 5:14; 16: 
 29; 24:27, 44. John 1:17; 5:46, 47; 7:19; 8:5. 
 The Acts 15 : 21 ; 28 : 23. 2 Cor. 3 : 15, etc. 
 
 h. The Old Testament outside the Pentateuch testi- 
 fies that the Pentateuch was the production of Moses. 
 Thus Mai. 4:4. Ezra 3:2; 6:18; 7:6. Neh. 1:7, 8; 
 8:1, 14, 18; 9:14; 10:29; 13:1. Dan. 9:11, 13. 
 1 Chron. 6:49; 15:15; 22:13. 2 Chron. 8:13; 
 23:18; 25:4; 30:16; 33:8; 34:18, 1 Kin. 2:3. 
 
30 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 2 Kin. 18:6, 12; 14:6; 21:7, 8; 22: 8; 23:25. 2 Sam. 
 6 : 13. Judg. 3 : 4. Josh. 1:7, 8, etc. 
 
 c. The Pentateuch itself bears testimony to its 
 Mosaic authorship. The Pentateuch has been roughly 
 divided into two principal sections, viz.: 1. Genesis 
 and Exodus to and including Ch. 19, historical. 2. Ex- 
 odus Ch. 20 to and including Deuteronomy, mainly 
 legal. 
 
 This second or legal portion consists of three distinct 
 bodies of law, viz.: 1. The Book of the Covenant, 
 embracing Ex. Chs. 20-23. This Moses is expressly 
 said in Ex. 24 : 4 to have written. 2. The so-called 
 Priest Code, relating to sanctuary and ritual. This 
 embraces Ex. Chs. 25-40 (excepting Chs. 32-34), and 
 the whole of Leviticus and Numbers. But in all its 
 parts this Priest Code is expressly declared to have 
 been communicated by Jehovah to Moses at Sinai and 
 in the subsequent wanderings. 3. The Deuteronomic 
 Code, embracing the legal portign of Deuteronomy, 
 delivered by Moses to the Israelites in the plains of 
 Moab. This also Moses is distinctly declared to have 
 written and to have committed to the custody of the 
 Levites, who bore the ark of the covenant (Deut. 31:9, 
 24-26). 
 
 2. The argument from language, style, literary form. 
 The language is archaic in respect to many words, 
 forms and expressions. The style in which the Penta- 
 teuchal laws are framed, and the terms in which they 
 are couched, attest their Mosaic origin. Their lan- 
 guage points back to the land of Egypt, then to the 
 sojourn in the wilderness, and then forward to the 
 land of Canaan whither God was bringing them. 
 Among others the following passages are to be noted 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 31 
 
 in this connection, viz. Lev. 18:3; Dent. 12:9; 15:4, 
 7; 17:14; Lev. 14:34; Dent. 12:1, 5, 8, 9; 19:1; 
 Num. 5:2-4; Lev. 14:8; 16:21, 22; 4:12, 21; 6:11; 
 13:46; 14:3, 8; 17:3; 8:2 sq. Ch. 10; 16:1, 3, 21, 
 22, 26, 27; Num. 4:5 sq.; Ch. 7; Ch. 2; 10:2 sg.; 
 19:3; 4, 7, 14, 16. Besides the laws of Deuteronomy 
 are prefaced b}^ two farewell addresses delivered by 
 Moses to Israel (Dent. 1: 5 sg., 5: 1 sg.) and terminate 
 with a prophetic song (Dent. Ch. 32), and a series of 
 blessings upon the several tribes, ascribed alike to 
 Moses (Dent. 31 : 22; 33: 1). There is then in the lit- 
 erary form of the Pentateuch a demonstrable unity of 
 structure, and such an interdependence of parts as 
 requires a single rather than a divisive source to 
 account for it. 
 
 3. The argument from history: — that is, relating to 
 chronological order and data; the nature and coterapo- 
 raneousness or proximity of events; events in the age 
 immediately succeeding the age of Moses and presup- 
 posing the Mosaic legislation and history. Thus the 
 relationship between Joshua and the Pentateuch is so 
 close and sequential that if the genuineness and 
 authenticity of the latter are denied so also must be 
 the former. The Books of Chronicles, at every period 
 of the history, furnish explict and repeated testimony 
 as to the existence of the Pentateuch. The same is 
 true in respect to the Books of the prophets and Psalms 
 where we find allusions to Pentateuchal facts, institu- 
 tions, and at times the precise language of the Pen- 
 tateuch is employed. Moreover it is abundantly 
 attested that the Pentateuch was known, and its au- 
 thority admitted in the northern kingdom of Israel 
 from the time of the schism of Jeroboam. 
 
32 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 4. The argument from doctrinal development. The 
 doctrinal teaching of the Pentateuch is elementary, 
 fundamental, and is expanded in the Scriptures follow- 
 ing. Hence it follows that the Pentateuch antedates 
 the rest of the Old Testament, and lies at the basis of 
 the divine doctrine more fully unfolded in the Books 
 that follow. Thus e. g. the doctrines respecting the 
 future state, providential retribution, the Messiah, the 
 angels, etc. Perhaps the single exception to the above 
 is the Book of Job which we assign to the Mosaic 
 period. 
 
 5. The argument from Egyptology. The Pentateuch 
 displays a large and accurate knowledge in respect to 
 Egyptian subjects and affairs. Egyptian words, and 
 allusions, direct and incidental, to Egyptian habits and 
 usages, particularly in the life of Joseph, the narra- 
 tive of the residence of Israel in Egypt, and their 
 journeyings through the wilderness, as also in the en- 
 actments, institutions, and symbols of the Pentateuch 
 indicate great familiarty on the part of the author and 
 his readers with Egyptian matters. All this agrees 
 precisely with the Mosaic period, and the Mosaic 
 authorship of the Pentateuch. 
 
 [Note. — For a fuller discussion of this subject see 
 Dr. Green's Higher Criticism of the Pentateuch, and 
 Unity of Genesis.] 
 
 V. Divisions.— According to its subject matter the 
 Book of Genesis may be regarded as having two gen- 
 eral divisions as follows : — 
 
 1. Chs. 1-11. The beginnings of the human race. 
 
 2. Chs. 12-50. The beginnings of the Hebrew 
 Theocracy. 
 
 The Book of Genesis may be further subdivided 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 33 
 
 upon the basis of the priucipal characters that appear 
 in this history of beginnings, as follows: — 
 
 1. Chs. 1-3. Adam, the first ancestor of the human 
 race. 
 
 2. Chs. 4-9. Noah, the second ancestor of the human 
 race. 
 
 3. Chs. 10: 1-25:18. Abraham, the first ancestor of 
 the Hebrew Theocracy. 
 
 4. Chs. 25: 19-35: 29. Isaac, the second ancestor of 
 the Hebrew Theocracy. 
 
 5. Chs. 36-50. Jacob, the third ancestor of the 
 Hebrew Theocrac3^ 
 
 VI. Contents.- Ch. 1. Creation of heaven and earth ; 
 creation of vegetable, animal and human life; man, 
 male and female, and his dominion. 
 
 Ch. 2. Review of the act of creation; location of 
 man in Eden ; man and woman. 
 
 Ch. 3. Man's temptation, fall, curse and expulsion, 
 but includiug a promise of redemption. 
 
 Ch. 4. Descendants of primitive man; Cain and 
 Abel and Abel's murder by Cain; the line of righteous 
 Abel perpetuated in Seth, third son of Adam and Eve. 
 
 Ch. 5. Descendants of Seth traced in genealogical 
 succession, to Noah and his three sons, Shem, Ham and 
 Japheth. 
 
 Ch. 6. The multiplication and corruption of human- 
 ity. The divine judgment and the preparation for its 
 execution. Noah, the one righteous man instructed to 
 build the ark. 
 
 Chs. 7, 8. The Deluge; its coming, duration and 
 cessation. Deliverance of the inmates of the ark, and 
 Noah's sacrifice. 
 
 [3J 
 
34 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Ch. 0. God's blessing of, and covenant with Noah. 
 Noah's sons; the eurse of Canaan, the son of Ham, 
 and the blessing of Shem and Japheth. Noah's age. 
 
 Chs. 10:1-11:9. Sons of Noah and the nations 
 sprung from them. The dispersion of mankind over 
 the earth. 
 
 Ch. 11:10-32. Line of Shem to Terah, the father 
 of Abraham. Generations of Terah and his death in 
 Haran. 
 
 Ch. 12. God's call of and covenant with Abraham. 
 The famine in Canaan, and the migration of Abraham, 
 with Sarah his wife to Egypt. Abraham summoned 
 before Pharaoh. 
 
 Ch. 18. Abraham's return to Canaan. Separation 
 of Abraham and Lot, son of his brother Haran. God's 
 renewal of the covenant with Abraham. 
 
 Ch. 14. Abraham's war with the heathen kings for 
 the deliverance of Lot. Melchizedek greets and blesses 
 Abraham. Abraham and the king of Sodom. 
 
 Ch. 15. God, the defender of Abraham, the cham- 
 pion of the faith. Abraham's desire for an heir, fol- 
 lowed by God's promise that his seed shall be as the 
 stars of heaven ; a divine pjroof given and the divine 
 promise repeated. 
 
 Ch. 16. God's promise renewed to Abraham. Change 
 of the name Abram to Abraham. The covenant of 
 faith and the sign of the covenant, circumcision. Name 
 of Sarai changed to Sarah. Ishmael blessed, but Isaac 
 the seed of promise. 
 
 Chs. 18, 19. Abraham at Mamre. Theophany. The 
 promise of a son to Abraham and Sarah's doubt. 
 Judgment pronounced upon Sodom and Gomorrah. 
 Abraham's intercession. Fall of the cities of the plain. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 35 
 
 Lot's deliverance. Lot and his daughters. Moab and 
 Animon. 
 
 Chs. 20, 2L Abraham and Abimelech, king of 
 Gerar. Sarah's exposure and preservation. Abraham 
 intercedes for Abimelech. Birth of Isaac. Expulsion 
 of Ishmael. Treaty of peace at Beersheba, with Abim- 
 elech. 
 
 Ch. 22:1-19. The trial of Abraham's faith. Tlie 
 sealing both of Abraham's faith and the divine promise. 
 
 Chs. 22 : 20-23 : 20. Descendants of Nahor, Abra- 
 ham's brother. Death and burial of Sarah. 
 
 Chs. 24-25:10. Abraham's instructions as to the 
 marriage of Isaac. Isaac's marriage to Rebekah. 
 Abraham's second marriage. Keturah and hei' sons. 
 Death and burial of Abraham. 
 
 Ch. 25 : 11-34. Isaac and Ishmael. Jacob and Esau. 
 
 Ch. 2G. Isaac in Gerar. The Abrahamic promise 
 renewed to him. J^xposure of Rebekah. Isaac jields 
 to the Philistines; migrates to Beer-Sheba. Treaty of 
 peace with Abimelech. Esau's marriage. 
 
 Chs. 27-28:9. Isaac favors his firstborn, Esau. 
 Rebekah and Jacob deprive him of the theocratic bless- 
 ing. Esau's blessing. His hospitality to Jacob. 
 Preparation for Jacob's flight and his journey with a 
 view to effecting a theocratic marriage. 
 
 Ch. 28:10-22. Jacob's journey to Mesopotamia. 
 The vision of the heavenly ladder. 
 
 Chs. 29-30: 24. Jacob and Laban's younger daugh- 
 ter Rachel. Contracts between Laban and Jacob. 
 Jacob's involuntary marriage with Leah. The double 
 marriage. Leah's sons. Rachel's dissatisfaction. The 
 concubines. Children of Jacob until the birth of 
 Joseph, Rachel's firstborn. 
 
36 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Chs. 30:25-31:55. New treaty between Jacob and 
 Laban. Jacob commanded of God to return home. 
 Jacob's flight. Laban's persecution. An alliance 
 concluded. Departure. 
 
 Chs. 32-33:16. Jacob's journey liorae. Met by 
 God's host of angels. His fear of Esau. His wrestling 
 with God. His name changed to Israel. His reconcil- 
 iation with Esau. 
 
 Chs. 33:17-35:21. Jacob in Canaan, first in Suc- 
 coth, then in Shechem. Dinah. Simeon and Levi. 
 Fanaticism. Jacob leaves for Bethel. Journey from 
 Bethel to beyond Bethlehem. Benjamin's birth. 
 Death of Rachel. 
 
 Ch. 35: 22-29. Reuben's sin. Jacob's sons. He 
 returns to Isaac at Hebron. Death and burial of Isaac. 
 Ch. 36. The generations of Esau. 
 Ch. 37. Jacob and Joseph. Joseph's dream. Joseph 
 sold into Egypt. 
 
 Ch. 38. Judah's temporary separation fi'om his 
 brothers. Judah's sons. Tamar. 
 
 Chs. 39-41:52. Joseph in the house of Potiphar. 
 In prison. Interprets the dreams of his fellow prison- 
 ers. Interprets the dreams of Pharaoh. Is promoted 
 to the premiership of Egypt. Marries Asenath, daugh- 
 ter of the piiest of On. Manasseh and Ephraim born. 
 Chs. 41:53-45:28. The seven years of famine. 
 First journey of Jacob's sons to Egypt. Second jour- 
 ney with Benjamin. Joseph makes himself known. 
 The return to Jacob, and his joy. 
 
 Chs. 46, 47. Israel goes to Egypt with his sons, and 
 settles in Goshen. Jacob before Pharaoh. Joseph's 
 political economy. Jacob arranges for his burial. 
 Chs. 48, 49. Jacob's illness. He blesses the sons 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 37 
 
 of Joseph. His blessing on his own sons. Judah and 
 his brethren. Jacob's last charge, and his death. 
 
 Ch. 50. Days of mourning. Jacob's funeral. Jos- 
 eph's generous treatment of his brothers. Joseph's last 
 charge and death. 
 
 VII. Doctrine.— The doctrines made prominent in 
 the Book of Genesis are 
 
 a. The creation of man by God. 
 
 h. The introduction of sin and its consequences into 
 the world by the fall of man. 
 
 c. The divine ground-plans and promises for the 
 redemption of man. 
 
 VIII. Messianic. —The Messianic prophecies in the 
 Book of Genesis are as follows : 
 
 1. Gen. 3:13-15. The Protevangelium. The seed 
 of the woman. 
 
 2. Gen. 5:28-32. Lamech-Noah. Line of Seth. 
 The Comforter. 
 
 3. Gen. 9:18-27. Salvation through the race of 
 Shem. 
 
 4. Gen. 12: 1-3. The call and blessing of Abraham 
 out of Shem. 
 
 5. Gen. 26: 1-5. The covenant with Isaac of Abra- 
 ham's sons. 
 
 6. Gen. 28:10-17. The covenant with Jacob of 
 Isaac's sons. 
 
 7. Gen. 49:8-12. The Blessing of Judah out of 
 Jacob's twelve sons. 
 
 See Messianic under Exodus. 
 
38 
 
 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 GENEALOGICAL TABLES TO GENESIS. 
 
 1. The Antediluvian Patriarchs. 
 
 Table to Gen. Ch. 5, Comp. 9: 39. According to the Hebrew Text. 
 
 Names of 
 
 Age at birth 
 
 Remainder 
 
 Whole dur- 
 
 Year of 
 
 Year of 
 
 the 
 
 of 
 
 of 
 
 ation of 
 
 birth 
 
 death 
 
 Ten Patriarchs 
 
 Firstborn. 
 
 Life. 
 
 Life. 
 
 A. M. 
 
 A. M. 
 
 Adam, 
 
 130 
 
 800 
 
 930 
 
 1 
 
 930 
 
 Seth, 
 
 105 
 
 807 
 
 912 
 
 130 
 
 1042 
 
 Enosh, 
 
 90 
 
 815 
 
 905 
 
 235 
 
 1140 
 
 Kenan, 
 
 70 
 
 840 
 
 910 
 
 325 
 
 1235 
 
 Mahalalel. 
 
 65 
 
 830 
 
 895 
 
 395 
 
 1290 
 
 Jared, 
 
 162 
 
 800 
 
 962 
 
 460 
 
 1422 
 
 Enoch, 
 
 65 
 
 300 
 
 365 
 
 622 
 
 987 
 
 Methuselah, 
 
 187 
 
 782 
 
 969 
 
 687 
 
 1656 
 
 Lamech, 
 
 182 
 
 595 
 
 777 
 
 874 
 
 1651 
 
 Noah, 
 
 500 
 
 450 
 
 950 
 
 • 1056 
 
 2006 
 
 To the Flood = UlO years. 
 
 From Adam to the Flood == 1656 years. 
 
 1656 A. M. = Shem's 98th year. 
 
 ,11. The Postdiluvian Patriarchs. 
 
 Table to Gen. Ch. 11. Comp. Chs. 21, 25, 29, 31, 35, 47. 
 According to the Hebrew Text. 
 
 Names of 
 
 Age at birth 
 
 Remainder 
 
 Whole dur- 
 
 Year of 
 
 Year of 
 
 the 
 
 of 
 
 of 
 
 ation of 
 
 birth 
 
 death 
 
 Patriarchs. 
 
 Firstborn. 
 
 Life. 
 
 Life. 
 
 A< M. 
 
 A. M. 
 
 Shem, 
 
 100 
 
 500 
 
 600 
 
 1558 
 
 2158 
 
 Arpachshad 
 
 35 
 
 403 
 
 438 
 
 1658 
 
 2097 
 
 Shelah, 
 
 30 
 
 403 
 
 433 
 
 1693 
 
 2126 
 
 Eber, 
 
 34 
 
 430 
 
 464 
 
 1723 
 
 2187 
 
 Peleg, 
 
 30 
 
 209 
 
 239 
 
 1757 
 
 •1996 
 
 Reu, 
 
 32 
 
 207 
 
 239 
 
 1787 
 
 2026 
 
 Seriig, 
 
 30 
 
 200 
 
 230 
 
 1819 
 
 2045 
 
 Nahor, 
 
 29 
 
 119 
 
 148 
 
 1849 
 
 1997 
 
 Terah, 
 
 70 
 
 135 
 
 205 
 
 1878 
 
 2083 
 
 Abrani, 
 
 100 
 
 75 
 
 175 
 
 1948 
 
 2123 
 
 Isaac, 
 
 60 
 
 120 
 
 180 
 
 2048 
 
 2228 
 
 Jacob, 
 
 65 
 
 82 
 
 147 
 
 2108 
 
 2255 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 39 
 
 EXODUS. 
 
 I. Name.— We-elleli she moth = A)id these the names. 
 According to the Jews this name is given to the Book 
 from its opening words. Fiom the Vulgate we have 
 the name Exodus, so called from the chief event related 
 in it, i. e. the departure of the Israelites from Egypt. 
 
 II. Position.— The connection between the Book of 
 Exodus and that of Genesis is close. Exodus contin- 
 ues the historical account with which Genesis closes. 
 In Genesis God enters into covenant with Abraham, 
 promising him that his posterity shall inherit the land 
 of Canaan, and that in his seed all the families of the 
 earth should be blessed. In the same Book, however, 
 this promise is followed by the statement to Abraham 
 that befoie his descendants shall possess that land, 
 they shall be strangers in another, in which they shall 
 serve and be afflicted, that this nation whom they 
 served God would judge, after which they should come 
 forth with great substance in the fourth generation. 
 To this corresponds the first chapter of Exodus, and 
 thus the connection. 
 
 III. Tlieme.— The Book treats of the history of the 
 Israelites as a nation from the death of Joseph to the 
 erection of the Tabernacle by Moses in the second year 
 of the Exodus. It opens with a reference to Jacob's 
 descent into Egypt, after which follows the historical 
 account of the oppression of the Israelites, their deliv- 
 eiance from the Egyptians through the divinely com- 
 missioned Moses, the wanderings in the desert, the 
 giving of the law from Sinai, the instructions for build- 
 
40 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 ing the altars of sacrifice and the tabernacle, and vari- 
 ous precepts. 
 
 IV. Authorship.— See Authorship under Genesis. 
 
 V. Divisions.— The Book divides itself into three 
 principal parts which m^y be respectively titled — 
 Bondage, Redemption, Establishment; — as follows: 
 
 1. Chs. 1-11. Bondage. Events preliminary to the 
 deliverance of the Israelites from Egypt. 
 
 2. Chs. 12-19:2. Redemption. The last plague, 
 the departure of the Israelites from Egypt, and their 
 journey to Sinai. 
 
 3. Chs. 19:3-40:38. Establishment. Israel at 
 Sinai. The establishment of the Theocracy. 
 
 VI. Contents.-l. Chs. 1, 2. Increase of Jacob's 
 posterity in Egypt. Measures instituted by a new 
 king to check this increase. Birth, education and 
 flight of Moses. 
 
 2. Chs. 3, 4. The divine call of Moses to be the 
 deliverer of Israel, and his return to Egypt in obe- 
 dience to this call. 
 
 3. Ch. 5:1-21. The first attempt on the part Of 
 Moses and Aaron to prevail upon Pharoah to let the 
 Israelites go results only in increasing the Israelites' 
 burdens. 
 
 4. Chs. 5 : 22-7 : 7. Additional pieparation of Moses 
 and Aaron for their mission, together with a table of 
 their genealogies. 
 
 5. Chs. 7:8-11:10. Narrative of the successive 
 signs and plagues by which the deliverance of Israel 
 from Egypt was effected. 
 
 6. Chs. 12, 13. I'he last phigue; the departure 
 from Egypt. The institution of the Passover, and the 
 feast of Unleavened Bread. The death of the first- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 41 
 
 born. The journey from Ramses to Succoth. The 
 law respecting the dedication of the firslborn. The 
 march from. Succoth to Etham. 
 
 7. Chs. 14, 15. The passage of the Red Sea. Moses's 
 song of triumph. The journey to Marah and Elim. 
 
 8. Chs. 16-18. The journey from Elim to Sinai. 
 The quails and manna; the miraculous supply of 
 water at Rephidim. The conflict with Amalek. The 
 arrival of Jethro and the council given by him to 
 Moses respecting the civil government of the people. 
 
 9. Chs. 19-24: 11.. The establishment of the Theoc- 
 racy at Sinai on the basis of the Ten Commandments, 
 and of a code of laws regulating the social life and 
 religious observances of the people called the Book of 
 the Covenant; followed by the promise of an angel to 
 guide the people, and the people's ratiflcation of the 
 Covenant. 
 
 10. Chs. 24:12-31:18. Instructions to Moses on 
 Sinai respecting the tabernacle, the ark, the mercy 
 seat, the altar of burnt offering, the consecration of 
 Aaron and his sons as priests, the altar of incense, the 
 laver, the holy oil, the selection of Bezaleel and Oho- 
 liab to execute the skilled work that was necessary and 
 the deliverance to Moses of the two Tables of the Law. 
 
 11. Chs. 32-34. The incident of the golden calf; 
 the intercession of Moses on behalf of the people, and 
 the renewal of the covenant. 
 
 12. Chs. 35, 40. The construction of the Taber- 
 nacle and its appurtenances in accordance with the 
 •directions given, and its erection on the first day of 
 the second year of the Exodus. 
 
 VII. Doctrine.— The doctrines more prominently 
 l^rought out in the Book of Exodus are 
 
42 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 1. Redemption through the shedding of blood. 
 
 2. The theocratic organization of the redeemed. 
 
 0. Divine law requiring man's obedience. 
 
 4. Divine ordinances regulating man's worship. 
 
 VIII. Messianic— The book of Exodus contains no 
 direct Messianic Proj)hecy. There is unquestionably, 
 however, a strong Messianic element of a typological 
 character. The types of Scripture may be classihed as 
 
 1. Personal; that is, Scripture characters whose 
 lives illustrate some truth or principle of redemption; 
 and in so far point forward to the peisonal Redeemer, 
 who is the antitype. Such, e. y. are Adam, Melchize- 
 dek, Abraham in the Book of Genesis, and Moses,. 
 Aaron, the Priest in the Book of Exodus. 
 
 2. Historical; that is, where great historical events 
 are made to foreshadow the greater things that are to 
 come; as, e. g. the deliverance from Egj^pt, the 
 wilderness journey, the conquest of Canaan, etc. 
 
 3. Institutional; such, e. g. as the passover, the 
 priesthood, the altar, the sacrifices, etc. 
 
 Tlie types of Genesis are for the most part personal 
 and historical; while those of Exodus are found under 
 all three heads of the classification. Thus we have 
 personal types, as, e. g. Moses and Aaron ; historical 
 types, as, e. g. the deliverance from Egypt, and the 
 wilderness journey; institutional types; as, e. g. the 
 priesthood, and the sacrifices. The great truth, doc- 
 trine taught b}^ the types of Exodus is — redemption ta 
 God by blood and through a personal Redeemer. The 
 blood of the paschal lamb is at the basis of Israel's 
 relation with God, while it also prefigured the redemp- 
 tion that Christ was to accomplish. Ex. 15: 13, 16, 17; 
 1 Cor. 5:7. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 43 
 
 TABLE OF SACRED SEASONS, FEASTS, SACRIFICES. 
 
 See Ex. Chs. 12, 13, 23, 34. Lev. Chs. 2, 4, 5, 6, 13, 14, 15, 
 17, 19, 23. Num. Chs. 9, 15, 19, 28, 29. Deut. Ch. 16. 
 
 I. Sacred Seasons and Feasts. 
 
 - 1. The Sabbath. Gen. 2:2. 3. Ex. 20:8-11. 
 
 a. The Sabbatical Month, i. e. 7th month. 
 
 b. The Sabbatical Year, i. e. 7th year. 
 
 c. The Year of Jubilee, /. e. the 50th year, following 7X7. 
 
 2. The Passover. Ex. Ch. 12. 
 
 3. The Feast of Unleavened Bread. Ex. Chs. 12, 13. Lev. 23. 
 Num. 28. Deut. 16. 
 
 4. The Feast of Weeks or Pen teeost. Lev. Chs. 15, 23. Num. 
 Ch. 28. 
 
 ~ 5. The Feast of Tabernacles. Lev. Ch. 23. Num. Ch. 29. 
 
 — 6. The Neiv Moon, or Trumpets. Num. 10: 10. 
 
 7. The Day of Atonement. Ex. Ch. 30. Lev. Chs. 16, 23. 
 Num. Ch. 29. 
 
 8. The Feast of Purim. One of the later feasts. Esth. 3:7, 
 13; 9:24, 27. 
 
 9. The Feast of Dedication. A late feast. Dates from the 
 reconsecration of the altar and temple at Jerusalem after their 
 defilement by Antiochus Epiphanes. 
 
 II. Sacrifices, Offerings, etc. 
 
 A. Classified : Animal and vegetable, or bloody and unbloody 
 offerings. 
 
 1. The Vegetable Offerings: included 
 
 a. The regular meal and drink offering. See below. 
 
 b. The first sheaf at the Passover. 
 
 c. The shew bread, and the pentecostal loaves. 
 
 B. Animal Sacrifices. The ceremony of offering required 
 
 a. The presentation of the victim. 
 
 b. The laying on of hands by the offerer. 
 
 c. The slaying of the victim. 
 
 d. The sprinkling of the blood of the victim. 
 
 e. The burning of some part of the animal on the altar. 
 These Animal sacrifices included. 
 
 1. The Burnt Offering. Lev. Chs. 8, 9, 14, etc. 
 
44 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 2. The Peace or Thank Offering. Two kinds, required and 
 voluntary. 
 
 3. The Sin Offering. Lev. Chs. 4, 5. Ideas; — atonement, 
 satisfaction, restitution. 
 
 4. The Trespass or Guilt Offering. Idea; — atonement, expia- 
 tion. Offered for 
 
 a. Unwitting sin as to " holy things." Lev, 5: 15, 16. 
 h. Unintentional transgression of a divine command. Lev. 
 5:17-19. 
 
 c. Unjust treatment of a neighbor. Lev. 6: 2-7. 
 
 d. Criminal intercourse indicated in Lev. 19: 20-22. 
 
 e. In the ceremony for purifying a leper. Lev. Ch. 14. 
 /. In case of defilement of a Nazarite. Num. 6 : 6-12. 
 
 g. In case of men who had married foreign wives. Ezra 10:19. 
 
 C. "Holy" and "Most Holy" Offerings. 
 
 1. Most Holy; e. g. burnt, sin and trespass offering, and the 
 lambs at pentecost for a public peace offering. 
 
 2. Holy; e. g. the remaining public peace offerings. 
 
 D. The Meal Offerings. Two kinds, viz. : 
 
 1. Those constituting offerings of themselves, viz.: 
 a. The offering mentioned in Lev. 2:1-3. Voluntary. 
 h. The oblation mentioned in Lev. 2 : 4. Voluntary. 
 
 c. Similar offering mentioned in Lev. 2: 5. 6. Voluntary. 
 
 d. The meal offering mentioned in Lev. 2: 7. Voluntary. 
 
 e. The meal offering of first fruits. Lev. 2:14—16. Voluntary. 
 /. The meal offering of jealousy. Num. Ch. 5. Voluntary. 
 g. The sin offering of poverty. Lev. 5:11-13. Required. 
 
 h. The consecration, and daily offering of the high priest. 
 Lev. 6:19-23. Required. 
 
 i. The meal offering in purification of a leper. Lev. 14: 10, 20. 
 Required. 
 
 2. Those brought with and as accompaniments of other offer- 
 ings, i. e. with 
 
 a. The daily morning and evening sacrifices. 
 h. The additional daily festival sacrifices including the Sab - 
 bath. 
 
 c. The burnt offering on presenting the first fruits at passover 
 and pentecost. 
 
 d. The burnt and sin offerings for the unwitting sin of the 
 congregation. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 45 
 
 e. The Nazarite's offering upon completing his vow. 
 
 E. The Daily Sacrifices. They were 
 
 a. A burnt offering of a lamb with its meal offering. 
 h. The meal offering of the high priest. 
 
 c. The offering of incense at the altar of incense. 
 
 d. The drink offering for the preceding meal offering. 
 
 e. On the Sabbath two lambs, burnt offerings, with meal and 
 drink offerings, 
 
 F. Ceremonial Purifications. Three kinds of ceremonial im- 
 purities required animal sacrifices, viz. : 
 
 a. Contact with the dead of men or animals. Num. 19: 1-22. 
 h. Leprosy in men. houses or clothing. Lev. Chs. 13, 14. 
 c. Morbid fluxes of the human body. Lev. Ch. 15. 
 
 G. Vows. Not required but regulated by Scripture. Two 
 kinds, viz.: 
 
 a. Positive vows:— the dedication of something to Jehovah. 
 Gen. 28 : 20-22. 
 
 h. Negative Vows: — abstaining from something to honor 
 Jehovah, e. g. Nazaiite vow. 
 H. Circumcision. 
 
 LEVITICUS. 
 
 I. Name.— Wa- Yikrah = And he called. The Book 
 is so called by the Jews from its opening word. The 
 name Leviticus comes from the Vulgate, and is so 
 called because the Book treats mainly of the Levitical 
 service. 
 
 II. Position.— The Sinaitic legislation, begun in Ex- 
 odus, is further developed in Leviticus. The taberna- 
 cle being built, and Aaron and his sons being ready for 
 the consecration to the divine service, Moses issues in- 
 structions relative to the offerings to be made to Jeho- 
 vah, and sets forth the duties of the priests. 
 
46 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 III. Theme.— Priestly legislation as to divine service. 
 
 IV. Authorship.— See Authorshiji under Genesis. 
 
 V. Divisions.— The main divisions of the Book are: 
 
 1. Chs. 1-7. The law of sacrifice. 
 
 2. Chs. 8-10. The law of priestly consecration. 
 
 3. Chs. 11-16. The law of purification. 
 
 4. Chs. 17-20. ^J^he law of holiness. 
 
 5. Chs. 21-25. The law of priestly purity. 
 
 6. Ch. 26. The law of obedience. 
 
 7. Ch. 27. The law of vows and tithes. 
 
 VI. Contents.-l. Ch. 1. The burnt offering. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. The meal offering. 
 
 3. Ch. 3. The peace offering. 
 
 4. Ch. 4. The (unintentional) sin offering: includ- 
 ing — a. The sin of the chief priest, b. The sin of the 
 whole people, c. The sin of a ruler, d. The sin of 
 an ordinary Israelite. 
 
 5. Ch. 5. Examples: including — a. Regulations as 
 to the sin offering, h. Regulations as to the guilt offer- 
 ing. 
 
 6. Chs. 6, 7. Priestly directions: including — a. Di- 
 rections in sacrificing the burnt offering, b. Directions 
 in sacrificing the meal offering, c. The High Priest's 
 daily meal offering, d. Directions to be observed in 
 the sin offering, e. Rites as to the guilt offering. 
 /. The peace offering, g. Things not to be eaten. 
 h. Historical subscription to these commands. 
 
 7. Chs. 8-10. The consecration and inauguration of 
 the priests: including — a. Ch. 8. Aaron and his sons 
 consecrated according to Ex. 29 : 1-37. b. Ch. 9. Aa- 
 ron and his sons enter upon their office, c. Ch. 10 : 1-7. 
 Punishment of Nadab and Abihu. d. Ch. 10:8-11. 
 Priestly prohibition as to wine while officiating, e. Ch. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 47 
 
 10:12-15. Tlie priest's i)ort ion in the meal offerings 
 and peace offerings. /. Ch. 10:1(1-20. The flesh of 
 the people's sin offei'ing to be eaten by the priests. 
 
 8. Chs. 11-1(3. Laws of purification and atonement : 
 Including — a. Ch. 11. Clean and unclean animals. 
 b. Ch. 12. Purification after childbirth, c. Chs. 13, 
 14. Diagnosis, kinds and purification of leprosy. 
 d. Ch. 15. Purification after certain natural secre- 
 tions, e. Ch. 16. Rules as to the observance of the 
 Day of Atonement. 
 
 9. Chs. 17-20. Israel's law of holiness distinguish- 
 ing it from heathen nations : including — a. Ch. 17 : 1-^9. 
 Animal sacrifices to be offered at the central sanctuary. 
 h. Ch. 17:10-16. Blood and the flesh of animals 
 dying naturally, or torn by beasts, not to be eaten, 
 c. Ch. 18. Unlawful marriages, unchastity and Mo- 
 lech worship, d. Ch. 19. Laws regulating religious 
 aud moral conduct, e. Ch. 20. Penalties for trans- 
 gressions of the law of holiness. 
 
 10. Ch. 21, 22. Rules concerning priests and offer- 
 ings: including — a. Ch. 21:1-15. Rules relative to 
 domestic life. 5. Ch. 21 : 16-24. Priestly rules as to 
 bodily perfection, c. Ch. 22: 1-16. Conditions of par- 
 taking of sacrificial food. d. Ch. 22:17-25. Perfec- 
 tion of sacrificial animals, e. Ch. 22 : 26-30. Special 
 injunctions touching sacrifices. /. Ch. 22:31-33. 
 Closing appeal. 
 
 11. Ch. 23. The calendar offcasts; including — a. 
 Ch. 23: 1-8. The Sabbath and unleavened bread, h. 
 Ch. 23 : 9-14. The sheaf of first fruits, c. Ch. 23 : 15- 
 22. Feast of Weeks, d. Ch. 23: 23-25. New Year's 
 Day. e. Ch. 23 : 26-32. Day of Atonement. /. Ch. 
 23:33-36. Feast of Booths or Tabernacles, g. Ch. 
 
48 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 23:H7, 38. Subscription, h. Ch. 28:39-43. Addi- 
 tional instructions as to the Feast of Booths. 
 
 12. Ch. 24. Treats of —a. Ch. 24:1-4. The lamps^ 
 in tlie Tabernacle, h. Ch. 24:5-9. The Shewbread. 
 c. Ch. 24:10-23. Laws relative to blasphemy, and 
 certain cases of injury. 
 
 13. Ch. 25. Treats of— a. Ch. 25:1-7. The Sab- 
 batical years, h. Ch. 25:8-55. The year of Jubilee, 
 followed by instructions relative to the right of re- 
 demption and usury. 
 
 14. Ch. 26. Treats of— a. Ch. 26:1, 2. The pro- 
 hibition of idolatry and the observance of the Sab- 
 bath, b. Ch. 26:3-45. Exhortation following the 
 deliverance of the foregoing code. c. Ch. 26:46. 
 Subscription. 
 
 15. Ch. 27. Regulations relative to vows and tithes. 
 
 VII. Doctrine.— The doctrines more especially em- 
 phasized in the Book of Leviticus are 
 
 1. Access to God through mediatorial agencies. 
 
 2. Sin, before and after justification, and its deserts. 
 
 3. The holiness of God, and the holiness that God 
 requires through the sanctification of the people. 
 
 VIII. Messianic. —As in the Book of Exodus, so in 
 the Book of Leviticus there is no direct Messianic 
 prophecy ; but there is a pervading and complex Messi- 
 anic element of a typological character. Tlie priest, 
 the altar, the victim, the blood, the fire, the water, 
 the incense, etc., all, declaring by their very nature 
 and multiplicity their own insufficiency, point for- 
 ward to Him who was Priest, and Offerer, and Vic- 
 tim in one, and who in his person, and by his work, 
 became the one efficient Mediator between God and 
 man, the man Jesus Christ. He was the substitution, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 49 
 
 as the life of the Levitical victim was substituted for 
 that of the offender. He received the imputation of 
 the punishment due the sinner, as the head of the 
 Levitical victim received the imputed penalty of the 
 guilty party by the symbolic laying on of the liands of 
 the offerer. And as the Levitical victim was slain in 
 the execution of the penalty incurred by the offender, 
 so He suffered death for the sinner. John 10: 11, 17, 
 18; Heb. 10:10; 11:14; Gal. 2:20. 
 See Messianic under Exodus. 
 
 NUMBERS. 
 
 I. 'Saine.—Bemidbar^=In the desert. The Book is 
 so called by the Jews from the fifth word of the first 
 verse; sometimes called JVayedaber == And he said, 
 from the first word of ver. 1. Called in the LXX 
 Arithmoi, and in the Vulgate Numeri, hence the 
 name Numbers. So cnlled from the double enumera- 
 tion of the Israelites in Chs. 1-4 and 26. 
 
 II. Position.— The Book of Numbers continues the 
 historical narrative of the Israelites to the fortieth year 
 of the Exodus. The Book opens on the first day of 
 the second month in the second year. There follows 
 an account of the departure from Sinai; the arrival in 
 the wilderness of Paran (or Kadesh) ; the mission of 
 the spies; the defeat at Hormah; the arrival in the 
 desert of Zin (or Kadesh) ; and Aaron's death. 
 
 III. Theme.— The history of Israel from the time of 
 
 [4J 
 
50 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the departure from Sinai to the arrival at the frontiers 
 of the Promised Land. 
 
 IV. Authorship.— See Aidhorship under Genesis. 
 
 V. Divisions.— The main divisions of the Book are 
 
 1. Chs. 1 : 1-10: 10. Preparations for leaving Sinai. 
 
 2. Chs. 10:11-14:45. The journe}' from Sinai to 
 the borders of the Promised Land. 
 
 3. Chs. 15-19. Legal enactments, and historical 
 events. 
 
 4. Chs. 20-36. The history of the last year. 
 
 VI. Contents.— 1. Ch. 1. Census of the twelve 
 tribes exclusive of the Levites. Result of this census, 
 number of males above twenty years old, 603,550. 
 The Levites, not included in this census, are appointed 
 guardians of the Tabernacle, and located in the center 
 of the camp. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. Position of the tribes in the camp, and 
 their order on the march. 
 
 3. Chs. 3, 4. Separate census of the Levites, who 
 are delegated to assist the priests, in lieu of the first- 
 born, in doing the service of the Tabernacle. Their 
 number, position and duties. 
 
 4. Chs. 5, 6. Laws relative to — a. Exclusion of the 
 unclean from the camp. h. Restitutions to be made 
 to the priest. c. Wifely unfaithfulness. d. The 
 Nazarites. e. Form of priestly benediction. 
 
 5. Ch. 7. Offerings of the twelve princes of the 
 tribes at the dedication of the Tabernacle, viz. a. 
 Six litters for the transport of the materials of the 
 Tabernacle by the Gershomites and Merarites. h. 
 Vessels for use at the altar, and animals for sacrifice. 
 
 6. Ch. 8. Instructions relative to — a. The superin- 
 tendence of the golden candlestick, b. The consecra- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 51 
 
 tion of the Levites to their service, c. The term of 
 service for the Levites, i. e. from twenty-five to Mty 
 years of age. 
 
 7. Ch. 9. Treats of — a. A second observance of 
 the Passover a month after the general observance of 
 the Passover at the regular time, and for the benefit of 
 those who were prevented, by defilement, from ob- 
 serving it at the regular time. h. The regulations of 
 the march and halt by the cloud and fire. 
 
 8. Ch. lU. Treats of— a. The use of the silver 
 trumpets in giving signals for marches, halts, assem- 
 blies, wars and festivals, h. Departure from Sinai, 
 and the order of the march, c. Services of Hobab, 
 father-in-law of Moses, secured as guide through the 
 wilderness, d. The chant accompanying the moving 
 and resting of the ark. 
 
 9. Chs. 11, 12. Treat of — a. The murmurings of 
 the people at Taberah and Kibroth-hattaavali. h. The 
 appointment of seventy elders to assist Moses, c. 
 Quails sent to satisfy the people, d. The Leprosy of 
 Miriam. 
 
 10. Chs. 13, 11. The spies and the people: em- 
 bracing the sending of the spies; their report; the peo- 
 ple's refusal to enter Canaan ; their consequent rejec- 
 tion; their rash attack upon the Amalekites; their 
 defeat. 
 
 11. Ch. 15. Treats of — a. Enactments relative to 
 the Meal and Drink offerings and other sacrifices. 
 h. An example of punishment for Sabbath-breaking, 
 c. Instructions as to " fringes " or " tassels." 
 
 12. Chs. IG, 17. Narrative of the rebellion of Korah, 
 Dathan and Abiram, followed by a confirmation of the 
 priestly prerogatives enjoyed by the tribe of Levi. 
 
52 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 13. Ch. 18. Treats of — a. Duties and relative posi- 
 tions of priests and Levites. h. Revenues of the 
 priests defined, c. Tithes. 
 
 14. Ch. 19. Instructions as to purification after de- 
 filement. 
 
 15. Chs. 20: 1-22: 1. Death of Miriam ; murmurings 
 of the people for water; sin of Moses and Aaron at 
 Meribah ; Edom's refusal to pass the Israelites ; death 
 of Aaron, and investiture of Eleazar as his successor; 
 defeat of the king Arad; impatience of the people; the 
 brazen serpent ; Sihou's refusal to pass Israel ; defeat 
 of Sihon and Og; arrival at the plains of Moab. 
 
 16. Chs. 22 : 2-24 : 25. History of Balaam. 
 
 17. Ch. 25. The fall of Israel into idolatry and im- 
 morality. The zeal of Phinehas rewarded. 
 
 18. Ch. 26. Second census of Israel. Number of 
 males above twenty years old, and exclusive of the 
 Levites, 601,730. Number of Levites, niales, from one 
 month old, 23,000. 
 
 19. Ch. 27. Treats of — a. Legislation respecting 
 the inheritance of daughters, h. Moses warned of his 
 death, and Joshua appointed his successor. 
 
 20. Chs. 28, 29. Calendar of sacrifices. 
 
 21. Ch. 30. The law of vows. 
 
 22. Ch. 31. The conquest of Midian. 
 
 23. Ch. 32. Apj)ortionment of the transjordanic ter- 
 ritory to the tribes of Gad, Reuben, and the half tribe 
 of Manasseh. 
 
 24. Ch. 33. Review of the journey from Ramses to 
 the plains of Moab followed by instructions as to the 
 occupation of Canaan. 
 
 24. Ch. 34. Boundaries of Canaan and the names 
 of those appointed to allot its territory. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 53 
 
 26. Ch. 35. Appointmeut of forty-eight cities for 
 the Levites, and of six among them, three on each side 
 of the Jordan, as Cities of Refuge with regulations per- 
 taining thereto. 
 
 27. Ch. 36. Regulations respecting heiresses. 
 VII. Doctrine.— The doctrines more especially em- 
 phasized are 
 
 1. Divine Providence; — as witnessed in the main- 
 tenance of the host of Israel, for forty years, in the 
 wilderness of the wanderings. 
 
 2. Divine Law; — its transgression, penalty, remedy, 
 so abundantly illustrated in this Book. 
 
 3. The pilgrim life of the people of God; defining at 
 once the character of this world, and implying the exist- 
 ence of another. 
 
 VII E. Messianic— The direct Messianic prophecy in 
 the Book of Numbers is that uttered by Balaam in 
 24: 15-19 concerning the people of God as constituting 
 a theocratic kingdom, whose Messianic Ruler is yet to 
 appear, and to whose scepter all nations will be sub- 
 dued. 
 
 DEUTERONOMY. 
 
 I. 'Name,— Elleh Hadharim = These tJie ivords. This 
 title of the Book is taken from its initial words. The 
 English title Deuteronomy like the LXX and Vulgate 
 is derived from the inexact rendering of the words in 
 17: 18 Mishna liaftorah Jta.zoth = a repetition or dupli- 
 cate of this Icno. 
 
 II. Position.— The Book records the events of the 
 
54 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 last month of the fort^^-years wanderings of the Israel- 
 ites, and so directly connects itself with what precedes 
 in the history of the nation. The Book closes with the 
 termination of Moses's mission as the hero of that his- 
 tory. 
 
 III. Theme.— The discourses of Moses to the Israel- 
 ites on the boi'dersof the Promised Land, and just pre- 
 vious to his death. These discourses set before the 
 people the laws which they are to obey, and the spirit 
 in which they are to obey them, when they are settled 
 in the Promised Land. 
 
 IV. Authorship.— See Aidhorshlp under Genesis. 
 
 V. Divisions.— The general divisions of the Book are 
 
 1. Chs. 1: 1-4:43. Historical introduction, first dis- 
 course, and historical appendix. 
 
 2. Chs. 4 : 44-20 : 19. Historical introduction, second 
 discourse, and hortatory appendix. 
 
 3. Chs. 27:1-34:12. Historical introduction, third 
 discourse, and historical appendix. 
 
 VI. Contents.— 1. Ch. 1:1-5. Historical introduc- 
 tion setting forth as to the discourses following, — the 
 speaker, persons addressed, place where, and time when 
 the\^ were delivered. Speaker, Moses; persons ad- 
 dressed, all Israel; place, the land of Moab; time, the 
 eleventh month of the last year of their wanderings, 
 i. e. the fortieth year after their Exodus from Egypt. 
 
 2. Chs. 1 : G-4: 40. First discourse of Moses consist- 
 ing of — a. A review of the events of the forty-years 
 wanderings, particularl}' those events that had a more 
 especial bearing upon their occupancy of the Promised 
 Land. h. An enumeration of the campaigns in which 
 they had been engaged, and in which their victories 
 had always depended upon their obedience ; the under- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 55 
 
 lying pi'ineiple of which oMoses illustrates by reminding 
 them of the exclusion of the former generation from the 
 Promised Land on account of disobedience, and also 
 the like exclusion of himself, not so much however be- 
 cause he was disobedient, but because " the Lord was 
 wroth with meforyour sakes." c. Upon the basis of this 
 past history, experience, Moses concludes with a prac- 
 tical and powerful appeal to remember and obey the 
 divine commandment impressed upon them at Horeb. 
 
 3. Cli. 4:41-43. Historical appendix recording the 
 appointment by Moses of three Cities of Refuge east of 
 the Jordan. 
 
 4. Ch. 4:44-49. Historical introduction to the sec- 
 ond discourse of Moses as that which is to treat of the 
 legislation proper, and in view of the occupation of 
 Canaan. 
 
 5. Chs. 5-2G. Second discourse of Moses embracing 
 the legislation proper, and consisting of two principal 
 parts: — a. Chs. 5-11. The decalogue, as the basis of 
 the whole Mosaic Code, and especially an exposition of 
 the first commandment, its spirit and the spirit in 
 which it was to be observed by the nation, h. Chs. 
 12: 1-26 : 15. Code of special laws treating of — Relig- 
 ious Statutes, Official Functions, and Social Usages, 
 c. Ch. 26: 16-19. To these two parts of the chief dis- 
 course, an appeal is added, urging obedience and 
 promising reward. 
 
 6. Chs. 27-30. Third discourse of Moses, closely 
 connected with the preceding discourse, while in it the 
 elders of Israel are associated with Moses. It comprises 
 a. Ch. 27. Description, in anticipation, of the accept- 
 ance by the nation of the preceding code, after taking 
 possession of Canaan, h. Chs. 28 : 1-29 : 1. In view of 
 
56 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the preceding code, a setting forth of the consequences 
 to follow its observance or neglect, c. Chs. 29 : 2-30 : 20. 
 The body of the final discoiise treating of the establish- 
 ment of a fresh covenant between God and the people, 
 the promise of pardon upon penitence, and the choice 
 set before Israel. 
 
 7. Ch. 31:1-29. The farewell of Moses including 
 the commission of Joshua, and the delivery of the Deu- 
 teronomic law to the Levitical priests. 
 
 8. Chs. 31:30-32:52. The song of Moses closing 
 with historical notices. 
 
 9. Ch. 33. The Blessing of Moses. 
 
 10. Ch. 34. The Death of Moses. 
 
 VII. Doctrine.— The two principal doctrinal teach- 
 ings emphasized are 
 
 1. Obedience; — its spirit, imperativeness and bless- 
 edness. 
 
 2. Disobedience; — its origin, heinousness and entail- 
 ment of misery. 
 
 VIII. Messianic. -In Deut. 18:15-19 occurs the di- 
 rect personal Messianic promise of the Prophet like 
 unto Moses, wherein the Messiah, as the future Media- 
 tor of salvation, is set forth in his prophetical character 
 as afterwards he is in his kingly. 
 
 JOSHUA. 
 
 I. Historico-Prophetical Books.— The Pentateuch, 
 according to the Jews, constitutes the first great divis- 
 ion of the Old Testament, and it is called the Torah, 
 or The Law. The second great division of the Old 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 57 
 
 Testament, according to tiie Jews, embraces the Books 
 of Joshua, Judges, 1st and 2nd Samuel, and 1st and 
 2nd Kings. The collective name given to tlie Books 
 of this second division Nebeim Rishonim, that is the 
 Earlier or Former Prophets. The Pentateuch con- 
 tains an account of the founding of the Old Testament 
 kingdom of God, and the laws of that kingdom given 
 of God to and through Moses. These Books of the 
 "Former Prophets" trace the historical development 
 of this kingdom of God from the death of Moses, the 
 mediator of the old covenant, to the dissolution of the 
 kingdom of Judah, and the Babjdonian captivity; — 
 a period of nearly nine hundred years. These Books 
 are called the prophetical Books of History, because, 
 in the main, they describe the history of the Old Tes- 
 tament covenant nation and kingdom of God in the 
 light of the divine plan of salvation, setting forth the 
 divine revelation, as it was accomplished in the his- 
 torical development of Israel. Hence these Books do 
 not contain a general history, a complete and detailed 
 account of the natural development of the Israelii ish 
 nation from a political point of view, but trace the 
 history of the people of God, or Israel, in its theocratic 
 development as a covenant nation, and as the channel 
 of that salvation which was to be manifested to all 
 nations in the fulness of time. Whatever has no 
 direct, vital connection with this loftier purpose and 
 peculiar vocation of Israel, is omitted, or briefly re- 
 ferred to, and only that recorded which affected bene- 
 ficently or otheiwise the development of the divine 
 kingdom in Israel. 
 
 II. Name.— Yehosh uu= Josli ua=Jehovah-Sa viour. 
 The Book of Joshua derives its name from Joshua, the 
 
58 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 successor of Moses, and the leader of the Israelites in 
 the conquest of Canaan. 
 
 III. Position.— While on the one hand the Book of 
 Joshua bears an independent character, still it is also 
 intimately lelated to the Pentateuch in the nature of 
 its contents, in its literary structure, and in its fur- 
 nishing the account of the final stage in the historj- of 
 the Origines of the Hebrew nation. It is thus closely 
 connected with the Book of Deuteronomy inasmuch as 
 it is a continuation of the history of Israel from the 
 death of Moses to the deatli of Joshua. 
 
 IV. Theme. — Being ])hophetico-liistorical the Book 
 of Joshua is not simply a continuation of the history 
 of Israel under the leadership of Joshua. The chief 
 design of the Book is to set forth Jehovah's covenant 
 faithfulness in the fulfillment of his promises, so that^ 
 by his almighty help, the people of Israel make con- 
 quest and take possession of the land of Canaan as 
 their promised inheritance. 
 
 V. Date.— As to the date of its composition, Joshua 
 was evidently written before the time of Ahab (915- 
 89G B. C.) by a comparison of Josh. 6:26 with 1 Ki. 
 16:34. It was evidently written before the time of 
 Solomon, as at the time of the writing the Canaanites 
 were still dwelling in Gezer (Josh. 16:10), whereas 
 during Solomon's reign (1013-973 B. C), Pharaoh 
 drove the Canaanites from thence and destroyed them 
 (1 Ki. 9 : 16). As at the time of the writing of Joshua 
 the Jebusites were still inhabiting Jerusalem (Josh. 
 15:63), whereas David drove the Jebusites out of 
 Jerusalem (2 Sam. 5:6-9), therefore the composition 
 of Joshua antedates David's reign (1053-1013 B. C). 
 Joshua was evidently written before Judges, inasmuch 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 59 
 
 as Judges begins where Joshua leaves off, and inas- 
 much as Judges seems to nuike quotations fi-om Joshua, 
 and to give abridged statements of liistorieal incidents 
 more circumstantially related in Joshua. Moreover 
 the date of the composition cannot have been many 
 years after the death of Josliua, inasmuch as the 
 writer in 6: 25 speaks of Rahab in such a manner as 
 to iinpl}' that she was still living; while in 5:1 he 
 refers to himself as if he were among those who crossed 
 the Jordan. 
 
 VI. Authorship. -The authorship of Joshua cannot 
 be determined with certainty. According to Higher 
 Criticism it proceeded fioni the same complex source 
 as the Pentateucli, in the main from the hands of the 
 Deuteronomist. (See Authorship under Genesis.) 
 Aside from other considerations, the differences in lan- 
 guage decidedly antagonize this view. Certain por- 
 tions of Joshua were doubtless written by Joshua 
 himself; and what he wrote probably sei-ved as the 
 basis for the Book as we now have it, the authorship 
 of which might possibly be assigned to Eleazar or 
 Phi n eh as. 
 
 VII. Biogrraphy and the Monuments.— Joshua, the 
 assistant and successor of Moses, was the son of Xun, 
 of the tribe of Ephraim, and was born in Egypt. He 
 is first mentioned as being the victorious commander 
 of the Israelites in their battle against the Amalekites 
 at Rephidim. Ex. 17:8-16. He accompanied Moses 
 part of the way when the latter ascended Sinai to re- 
 ceive for the first time the two Tables of the Law. 
 Was one of the twelve sent to explore the land of 
 Canaan and one of the two who brought back a favor- 
 able report. Nu. 13:17; 14:6. Shortly before his 
 
60 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 death, Moses, being so directed {Nu. 27:18), invests 
 Joshua with definite authority, in connection with 
 Eleazar the priest, over the people. Deut. 3:28. 
 After this God directly charges Joshua by the mouth 
 of Moses (Deut. 31: 14, 23), which charge is renewed 
 under the direction of God (Josh. 1:1), whereupon 
 Joshua assumes command of the people at Shittim, 
 sends spies into Jericho, crosses the Jordan, fortifies a 
 camp at Gilgal, circumcises the people, keeps the 
 Passover, and is visited by the Captain of the Lord's 
 Host. The Book that bears his name continues and 
 completes the biograph}^ of Joshua as the hero of the 
 wars of conquest for the possession of Canaan. 
 
 One of the most important of recent discoveries is 
 that of the Tell Amarna Tablets unearthed in 1887 
 from the ruins of the palace of Amenophis IV., mid- 
 way between Thebes and Memphis, about 180 miles 
 by river south of Cairo, Egypt. The tablets are brick, 
 dating about 1480 B. C, inscribed in Aramaic, resem- 
 bling Assyrian. The inscriptions consist of a large 
 mass of political correspondence, letters written by 
 Phoenicians, Amorites and Philistines to Amenophis 
 III. of Egypt. The events recorded in these letters 
 include the conquest of Damascus by the Hittites, of 
 Phoenicia by the Amorites, and of Judea by the 
 Hebrews. They refer to the conquest of the country 
 between Mt. Seir on the east, Ajalon, Lachish, Asca- 
 lon and Gezer on the west, and Shiloh and Rimmon on 
 the north. They also contain the name of one of the 
 kings killed by Joshua, viz. Japhia (Josh. 10:3), and 
 also the name of Jabin, king of Hazor, whom Joshua 
 attacked (Josh. 11:1). In these letters the Hebrews 
 are called Ahiri, and are said to have come from the 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. (U 
 
 desert, and from Mt. Seir. The date of these letters 
 is exactly that which is to be derived from the Bible, 
 1 Ki. 6: 1, for the Hebrew invasion of Canaan. 
 
 VIII. Divisions.— The principal divisions are two: — 
 
 1. Chs. 1-12. Account of the passage of the Jordan, 
 and the series of victories by which the conquest of 
 Canaan was effected. 
 
 2. Chs. 13-24. Account of the distribution of the 
 land among the tribes, and of the closing events in 
 Joshua's life. 
 
 IX. Contents.— 1. Chs. 1, 2. Preparations to cross 
 Jordan and make conquest of Canaan. Joshua divinely 
 encouraged. Promised help from the 2i east-Jordanic 
 tribes. Mission of the spies to Jericho and compact 
 with Rahab. 
 
 2. Chs. 3, 4. Passage of the Jordan. Two monu- 
 ments erected commemorating the event. Gilgal head- 
 quarters of the Israelites. 
 
 3. Chs. 5-8. Joshua circumcises the people and ob- 
 serves the Passover at Gilgal. He receives instruc- 
 tions as to the conquest of Jericho. The city taken 
 and " devoted," Rahab and her household being 
 spared. Joshua's advances against Ai, and is repulsed 
 on account of Achan's offense. Achan having been 
 punished, Ai is possessed. Joshua erects an altar on 
 Ebal, and carries out the instructions of Deut. 
 27 : 2-8. 
 
 4. Ch. 9. The Gibeonites, by craft, secure immunity 
 for their lives, and are retained in the community as 
 slaves. 
 
 5. Ch. 10. The conquest of Southern Canaan. 
 Joshua defeats at Beth-horon the five kings of Jerusa- 
 lem, Heshbon, Jarmuth, Lachish, Eglon. Afterwards 
 
62 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 he gets possession of Makedclah, Libiiah, Lachish, 
 Gezer, Eglon, Hebron, Debir. 
 
 6. Ch. 11. The conquest of Northern Canaan. 
 Joshua defeats Jabin, king- of Hazor, at the waters of 
 Merom, and takes the towns belonging to him. Re- 
 view of Joshua's victories. 
 
 7. Ch. 12. Supplementary list of kings defeated by 
 the Israelites, east and west of Jordan. 
 
 8. Ch. 13. Being insti'ucted Joshua proceeds to dis- 
 tribute the conquered territory. Limits and cities of 
 the transjordanic tribes. 
 
 9. Ch. 14. Joshua and Eleazar prepare to distribute 
 the land by lot. Caleb receives liis portion at Hebron 
 according to Deut. 1 : 36. 
 
 10. Ch. 15. Borders of Judah. Caleb's conquest of 
 Hebron. Othniel's conquest of Kirjath-sepher (Debir). 
 Cities of Judah arranged by districts. 
 
 11. Chs. 16, 17. The children of Joseph, i. e. west 
 half of Manasseh and Ephraim. South border of the 
 two tribes treated as one. Borders of Ephraim with 
 cities belonging to it but located in Manasseh. Bor- 
 ders of Manasseh with cities belonging to it but located 
 in Issachar and Asher. Permission to the joint tribes 
 to extend their territory. 
 
 12. Ch. 18. Assembling of Israelites at Shiloh. Tent 
 of meeting erected. Joshua directs a survey of the 
 land still undistributed. Its distribution by lot to the 
 seven remaining tribes. Borders of Benjamin. 
 
 13. Ch. 19. Lots of Simeon, Zebulon, Issachar, 
 Asher, Naphtali and Dan. Assignment of Timnath- 
 serah in Ephraim to Joshua. 
 
 14. Ch. 20. The appointment of cities of refuge. 
 
 15. Ch. 21. The forty-eight cities assigned by the 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 63 
 
 Israelites to the tribe of Levi according to Num. 
 35:1-8. 
 
 K). Ch. 22. Division of the land completed. The 2^ 
 tribes dismissed to their home east of the Jordan. Inci- 
 dent of the altar erected at the point of the crossing of 
 the Jordan. 
 
 17. Ch. 23. First of Joshua's two closing discourses. 
 Exhorts the people to faithfulness to the law, and to 
 abstain from intercourse with the native inhabitants of 
 Canaan. 
 
 18. Ch. 24. Joshua's second closing discourse deliv- 
 ered at Shechera. Review of God's mercies from patri- 
 archal days. People pledge themselves to obedience. 
 A stone witnessing thereto erected at Shechem. Death 
 and burial of Joshua. Burial of Joseph's bones at 
 Shechem. Death and burial of Eleazar. 
 
 X. Doctrine.— The doctrines emphasized are 
 
 1. Faithfulness on the part of God to fulfill covenant 
 promises. 
 
 2. Faithfulness on the part of the godly to possess 
 the promised inheritance. 
 
 XI. Messianic— The Messianic element in the Book 
 of Joshua is of a typological nature. See Messianic 
 under Exodus. As a type, the Book of Joshua finds 
 its antitype in the Epistle to the Ephesians. 
 
 JUDGES. 
 
 I. ^Siine.—Slioftivi = Judges. The Book takes its 
 name from the men who judged or ruled in Israel in the 
 period between Joshua and Samuel, and whose trans- 
 
64 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 actions the Book chiefly relates. The Book is not a 
 complete history of the times, but only accounts of 
 part of the nation at any one time. 
 
 II. Position.— The second of the historico-propheti- 
 cal Books. See under Joshua. Continues the annals 
 of the Israelitish nation from the death of Joshua to 
 the death of Samson, and the rise of Samuel the 
 prophet. 
 
 III. Theme.— The general theme of the Book is, — 
 Calamity following upon apostacy; — Deliverance fol- 
 lowing upon obedience. To illustrate this theme the 
 author brings together the most important data of He- 
 brew history between Joshua and Eli. 
 
 IV. Date.— The Book of Judges was evidently writ- 
 ten between the time of Saul, and the middle of the 
 reign of David, from the following comparisons: — 
 
 1. Judg. 1:21 compared with 2 Sam. 5:6-8. Ac- 
 cording to the former the Jebusites inhabiting Jerusa- 
 lem had not been driven out. According to the latter 
 David took the stronghold of Zion, and drove out the 
 Jebusites. 
 
 2. Judg. 1 : 29 compared with 1 Ki. 9:16. Accord- 
 ing to the former the Canaanites had not been driven 
 out of Gezer. According to the latter, Pharaoh, dur- 
 ing the reign of Solomon, captured Gezer, burnt it with 
 tire, and slew the Canaanites dwelling in it. 
 
 3. The expression in Judg. 17 : 6 ; 18 : 1 ; 19 : 1 ; 21 : 25, 
 that "In those days there was no king in Israel, " where 
 there seems to be a comparison between the times of 
 the Kings and those of the Jugdes, and from which it 
 would appear that the Book was not written before the 
 time of Saul. 
 
 4. " The captivity of the land" in 18:30, refers to 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 65 
 
 the victory gained over the Israelites by the Philistines, 
 and the disastrous results to Israel that followed it, as 
 further explained by ver. 31 following. 
 
 Authorship.— Of the authorship of Judges nothing 
 is positively known. The weight of probability assigns 
 it to Samuel, and the date of its composition about the 
 beginning of David's reign. As the Book covers a long 
 historical period, the author can have drawn his mater- 
 ials only from written sources, or oral tradition, most 
 likelj^ the former in view of the historical precision that 
 marks most parts of the Book. 
 
 VI. The Judges.— The Judges were leaders, deliv- 
 erers and governors in Israel; not simply administra- 
 tors of civil jurisprudence, but virtual rulers. 1 Sam. 
 8 : 5, 6. The Judges were not always the general au- 
 thority chosen b}^ prescribed law, nor was the position 
 an hereditary one. During the period of the Judges 
 there were six periods of servitude. The chronology is 
 as follows : — 
 
 Juflg. 3:7-11. 1st Servitude to Cushan-Risliathaim For Syears, 
 
 Judg. 3 : 7-11. Deliverance by Otlmiel, Judge . . .'. 40 
 
 Judg. 3 : 13-30. 2nd Serv. to Eglon of Moab, Amnion, Amalek. IS 
 Judg. 3 : 12-30. Deliverance by Ehud, Judge with Shamgar.. ," SO 
 
 Judg. Chs. 4, 5. 3rd Serv. to Jabin of Hazor in Canaan 20 
 
 Judg. Chs. 4. 5. Dellv. by Deborah and Baral^, Barak, Judge. 40 
 
 Judg. 6:1-8: 32. 4th Servitude to Midian, Amalek, &c T 
 
 Judg. 6 : 1-8 : 32. Deliverance by Gideon, Judge 40 
 
 Judg. 8 : 3:3-9 : 57. Abimelech reigns 3 
 
 Judg. 10: 1, 2. Tola, Judge 23 
 
 Judg. 10 : 3, 5. Jair, Judge ^~ 
 
 Judg. 10 : 6-12 : 7. 5th Servitude to Ammonites, Philistines.. . is 
 
 Judg. 10 : 6-12 : 7. Deliverance by Jephth;i4. Judge.... <> 
 
 Judg. 12 : 8-10. Ibzan, Judge ^ 
 
 Judg. 12 : 11, 12. Elon, Judge 10 
 
 Judg. 12:1.3-15. Abdon, Judge ^ 
 
 Judg. Chs. 13-16. 6th Servitude to Philistines 40 
 
 Judg. Chs. 13-16. Dehverance by Samson, Judge I '^ 20 
 
 [5J 
 
6(i INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 ISam. 1:1-4:18. Eli, Judge For 40 years. 
 
 1 Sam. 7 : 2. 7th Servitude (of the Ark) to Philistines 20 
 
 1 Sam. 7 : 15-25 : 1 . Deliverance by Samuel, Judge 12 
 
 An exact chronology of the period of the Judges is 
 as yet unattained, in order to make the sum total of 
 the above years, plus the forty years wanderings, the 
 seven years of Joshua's conquest, and the eighty years 
 of Saul's and David's reigns, harmonize with the state- 
 ment in 1 Ki. 6:1, which assigns 480 years to the 
 period from the Exodus to the fourth year of Solomon's 
 reign. Nor does the statement in The Acts 13 : 20 settle 
 the disputed points. One explanation is that some of 
 the periods named in the Judges are synchronous. 
 Anothei- is that the years of Israel's servitude to their 
 heathen oppressors are not reckoned in the 480 years 
 of 1 Ki. 6:1. The succession of events ,is regular till 
 the close of Samson's judgeship, where it is suddenly 
 broken off, and not resumed till the history reopens 
 with First Samuel. 
 
 VII. Divisions.— The principal divisions are three — 
 
 1. Introduction ;— Chs. 1:1-3:7. 
 
 2. History;— Chs, 3:8-16:31. 
 
 3. Appendix ;— Chs. 17-21. 
 
 VIII. Contents.— 1. The Introduction is twofold — 
 general and special, a. Chs. 1:1-2:5. General in- 
 troduction setting forth the historical connection with 
 what precedes in Joshua, and furnishing a summary of 
 the results of Joshua's wars of conquest, b. Chs. 
 2:6-3:7.* Special introduction setting forth the his- 
 torical connection with what immediately follows, and 
 treating of the people's sins, punishments and deliver- 
 ances during the period of the Judges, thus intro- 
 ducing the special history that follows. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 67 
 
 2. Chs. 3:8-16:31. History of the Judges and of 
 their wars of deliverance. See chronological table 
 above. 
 
 3. Chs. 17-21. Appendix. The history of the 
 Judges, abruptly interrupted at the close of Ch. 16, is 
 not resumed till 1 Sam. opens. Chs. 17-21, falling 
 between, and forming a sort of appendix, are still not 
 mere appendix, for they form an essential part of the 
 body of the work, while the events they chronicle oc- 
 curred in the earliest part of the period of the Judges. 
 These events are mainl}^ two, viz. — a. Chs. 17, 18. 
 Account of the worship of images by Micah, the 
 Ephraimite, and the transportation of that worship by 
 the Danites to Laish-Dan. h. Chs. 19-21. Account 
 of the infamous conduct af the inhabitants of Gibeah, 
 and the war of revenge which was waged by Israel 
 against the tribe of Benjamin as a punishment for the 
 crime. 
 
 The Book of Joshua may also be divided into four 
 periods based upon the four principal appearances of 
 the Angel of Jehovah. 
 
 IX. Doctrine.— The doctrines emphasized are — a. 
 Disobedience incurring divine judgments which are 
 both punitive and corrective. h. Penitence and 
 obedience securing pardon and power over one's 
 enemies. 
 
 X. Messianic— There is no direct Messianic element 
 in the Book of Judges save that connected with the 
 doctrine of the Angel of Jehovah, 
 
68 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 RUTH. 
 
 I. Name.— In Hebrew as in English, Ruth. The 
 Book takes its name from its principal character. 
 
 II. Position. -In the Hebrew Bible the Book of 
 Ruth stands among the Ketubim or Hagiographa. 
 According to the LXX and A. V. the Book is placed 
 between Judges and Samuel, which is its proper place, 
 as it is a supplement to the former, and an intro- 
 duction to the latter. 
 
 III. Time.— The events described in the Book oc- 
 curred during the period of the Judges, probably dur- 
 ing the judgeship of Gideon. 
 
 IV. Design.— The chief design of the Book is to 
 give the ancestry of David which is not fuinished by 
 the Books of Samuel, except as to the names of his 
 father Jesse, and his brethren. (1 Sam. 16:1-13.) 
 Especially included in this its chief aim, the Book is. 
 designed to show how Ruth, a daughter of Moab, and 
 a member therefore of a people not only outside of 
 Israel, but theocratically hostile to Israel, obtained not 
 only an eminent position among Jehovah's people, but 
 became also an ancestor of the illustrious king, David. 
 
 V. Authorship and Date.— The authorship of the 
 Book is not known. As to date of composition, the 
 weight of internal evidence assigns it to the time of 
 David. The social usages portrayed in the Book as- 
 sign it to a pre rather than a post-exilic date. The 
 so-called Aramaisms are ancient Arabic forms, pre- 
 served in the modern Arabic, and moreover forms that 
 occur in the Hexateuch and the Books of Samuel, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 60 
 
 VI. Divisions and Contents.— Are as follows: — 
 
 1. Ch. 1. Elimelech of Bethlehem, his wife, Naomi, 
 and their two sons, ^o to Moab, where Elimelech dies. 
 The two sons marry the Moabitesses, Orpah and Ruth. 
 The two sons dying, Naomi determines to return to 
 l^etlilehem, but bids her daughters-in-law remain in 
 their own country. Orpah does, but Ruth determines 
 to accompany Naomi back to Bethlehem. 
 
 2. Chs. 2-4. After their return to Bethlehem, Ruth 
 gleans in the fields of Boaz, a relative of Elimelech. 
 Boaz thus becoming acquainted with Ruth, marries 
 her. The offspring of their union was Obed, father of 
 Jesse, and grandfather of David. 
 
 VII. Doctrine.— The doctrinal thoughts emphasized 
 are — a. God calls and honors whom he will. h. Faith 
 in God and devotion to the godly. 
 
 VIII. Messianic— While there is no direct Messianic 
 prophecy in the Book of Ruth, still there is a Messianic 
 trait in the fact that Ruth, a heathen woman, of a 
 nation so hostile to Israel as Moab was, and on account 
 of her faithful love to the people of Israel, and her 
 entire confidence in Jehovah, the God of Israel, should 
 have been thought worthy to be made the tribe-mother 
 of the great and godly king David, and a lineage- 
 mother of Jesus according to the flesh. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND SAMUEL. 
 
 I. Name.— The name of the two Books arises from 
 the fact that Samuel is their principal character, both 
 as concerns himself, and the part he took in consecrat- 
 
70 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 ing the two kings, Saul and David, to the kingly office. 
 The two Books formed originally a single Book. By 
 the LXX the two Books of Samuel, and the two Books 
 of Kings were regarded as a complete history of the 
 two kingdoms of Israel and Judah, and the entire 
 work was divided by them into four Books of the 
 Kings. Hence the title "The First Book of Samuel 
 otherwise called the First Book of Kings," etc. The 
 Books however retain the general title they bore in 
 the Hebrew MSS., i. e. 1 and 2 Samuel, and 1 and 2 
 Kings. 
 
 II. Position.— The Books of Samuel are closely re- 
 lated to Judges preceding and Kings following. The 
 Book of Judges treats of the aifairs of the Hebrew 
 State after the conquest, when the nation was com- 
 posed of independent provinces, and had a tribal form 
 of government. Then came the change from the 
 tribal to the monarchical form of government, which 
 radical change occurred under the regency of the 
 prophet Samuel, and is set forth in the first Book 
 bearing his name. The Books of Samuel and Kings 
 are closely related in that 2 Sam. closes and 1 Kings 
 opens with events connected with the close of David's 
 reign. 
 
 III. Time.— The i^eriod of history included by the 
 Books of Samuel opens with an account of Samuel's 
 birth and early call, and extends to the close of 
 David's public life. The death of Saul is the histori- 
 cally dividing point between 1 and 2 Samuel. 
 
 IV. Theme.— As in the case of the other prophetico- 
 historical Books (see under Joshua), the design is not 
 to trace the history of the nation, in the ordinary 
 sense, but to trace the course of divine revelation; to 
 
iNTRODtrCTlON OUTLINES. tl 
 
 set forth God's method of dealing with his chosen 
 nation that he might instruct and establish them in 
 ways of righteousness, and so lay a foundation for the 
 world-wide work of Messiah. The history therefore is 
 not so much the history of the Kingdom of Israel as 
 the history of the Kingdom of God. 
 
 V. Date.— There is nothing in the Books that points 
 to a period later than the close of David's reign, or the 
 first part of Solomon's reign, as the date of composi- 
 tion. The statement in 1 Sara. 9 : 9 does not indicate 
 a later date than this, for while Samuel is called a 
 "seer" (1 Sam. 9:9), Nathan and Gad, both contem- 
 poraries of David, are called "prophets" (1 Sam. 
 22: 5 ; 2 Sam. 7 : 2). The statement in 1 Sam. 27 : 6 is 
 no proof that the composition should be assigned to a 
 date after the accession of Rehoboam, and the division 
 of the kingdom into the kingdoms of Judah and Israel, 
 for aside from the fact that the LXX and Peshito- 
 Syriac read Icing and not kings in the passage, is also 
 the fact that the distinction between Israel and Judah 
 existed alread3'^ in the time of David, and grew out of 
 the fact that David belonged to the tribe of Judah, 
 over which alone he had first ruled seven and one-half 
 years, during a part of which time Lshbosheth, Saul's 
 son, reigned over Israel. 1 Sam. 18: 16; 2 Sam. 24: 1. 
 The expression "unto this day" does not necessarily 
 imply a long period of time. 
 
 VI. Authorship.— The authorship of the Books is 
 unknown. Four theories are advanced: (1) Samuel; 
 (2) Samuel, Nathan and Gad; (3) Nathan; (4) Com- 
 posite. 
 
 VII. Divisions.— The two Books of Samuel may be 
 divided according as the contents group themselves 
 
72 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 about the three principal characters Samuel, Saul and 
 David, as follows : — 
 
 1. 1 Sara. Chs. 1-12. Samuel and the establishment 
 of the Monarchy. 
 
 2. 1 Sam. Chs. lo-31. Saul and the beginnings of 
 the Monarchy. 
 
 3. 2 Sam. Chs. 1-24. David and the succession of 
 the Monarchy. 
 
 VIII. Contents.— 1. 1 Sam. Chs. 1-12. Samuel and 
 the establishment of the Monarch3^ 
 
 Samuel's birth and consecration (Ch. 1). Hannah's 
 prayer (2: 1-10). Eli's evil sons, and the prediction of 
 the fall of Eli's house (2:11-36). The judgment of 
 Eli's house declared to him by Samuel (3:1-18). 
 Samuel prophet of Israel in Shiloh (3: 19-21). Double 
 defeat of the Israelites, and capture of the Ark, by 
 the Philistines; death of Eli's two sons, of Eli, and 
 birth of Ichabod (4: 1-22). Punishment of the Philis- 
 tines, and recapture of the Ark (5: 1-7: 1). Samuel's 
 reformation and its inauguration at Mizpah (7:2-6). 
 The invading Philistines defeated; Israelitish posses- 
 sions restored; peace established ; Samuel's judgeship 
 of Israel in a circuit of four cities 3^early (7: 7-17). 
 Samuel appoints his sons judges; their evil conduct 
 leads to the demand of a king; Samuel protests, then 
 divinely directed, yields (8:1-22). Saul, visiting 
 Samuel, the latter anoints him king, then calls a 
 national assembly at Mizpah when Saul is publicly 
 elected by lot as king, but has not the allegiance of all 
 Israel (Chs. 9, 10). Saul aids the men of Jabesh 
 Gilead, defeats the Ammonites, is recognized king by 
 all the people of Gilgal, where Samuel renews the 
 kingdom (Ch. 11). Samuel's address; justifies his 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 73 
 
 coarse, urj^es fidelity to God and the king; miracle 
 (Ch. 12). 
 
 2. 1 Sam. Chs. 13-31. Saul and the beginnings of 
 the Monarchy. 
 
 Saul and Jonathan defeat the Philistines at Geba; 
 the Philistines mass a great army, whereupon Israel is 
 dismayed, and Saul impatient at Samuel's delay, him- 
 self offers sacrifice, for which act of disobedience he is 
 rejected of God (13:1-14). Jonathan defeats Philis- 
 tines at Michmash, and for disobeying Saul is spared at 
 the demand of the people (13:15-14: 45). Saul's vic- 
 tories, children, relatives (14:46-52). Disobeying the 
 order to utterly destroy Amalek, Saul is rejected from 
 the kingdom (Ch. 15). Samuel anoints David to be 
 king; for mental relief Saul sends for David (Ch 16). 
 Philistines against Israel in Vale of Elah; David slays 
 Goliath (Ch. 17). Jonathan's and David's friendship, 
 and Saul's murderous jealousy of David (Ch. 18). 
 David flees to Samuel, is sought by Saul; learns of 
 Saul's continued enmity from Jonathan (Chs. 19, 20). 
 David flees to Ahimelech at Nob, to King Achish of 
 Gath, to the cave of Adullam, to Mizpah, to Hareth ; 
 Saul's massacre of Ahimelech and the priests (Chs. 21, 
 22). David delivers Keilah then flees from Saul to the 
 wilderness of Ziph, then to En-gedi where he spares 
 Saul's life (Chs. 23, 24). Samuel's death and burial; 
 David, Nabal, Abigail (Ch. 25). David spares Saul; 
 finds refuge with Achish; Philistines arm ; Saul con- 
 sults the witch of Endor; Achish dismisses David be- 
 cause of Philistine suspicions; his vengeance on Amal- 
 ekites, who had desolated Ziklag (Chs. 26-30). Death 
 of Saul and Jonathan on Mt. Gilboa (Ch. 31). 
 
74 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 3. 2 Sam. Chs. 1-24, David and the succession of 
 the Monarchy. 
 
 David's lament over Saul and Jonathan (Ch. 1). 
 David made king of Judah at Hebron ; Ishbosheth 
 king of Israel ; battle between their followers (Ch. 2). 
 David's power increases; his six sons; Abner forsakes 
 Ishbosheth for David, is slain by Joab, lamented by 
 David who punishes the slayers, after which David 
 made king of all Israel (3:1-5:3). David captures 
 fortress of Zion from Jebusites; his friendship with 
 Hiram; defeats Philistines; ark removed to "City of 
 David" (5:4-6:23). Nathan forbids David to build 
 the Lord's house; the Lord will build David's house 
 (dynasty); David's prayer (Ch. 7). David's wars, vic- 
 tories, ministers ; friendship for Mephibosheth; war with 
 Ammon (Chs. 8-10). David's sin, punishment, peni- 
 tence; Solomon born; Ammon defeated (Chs. 11, 12). 
 Amnion's criminal assault on Tamar; Ammon slain b}^ 
 Absalom's order; Absalom's flight ; restored after three 
 years by Joab (Chs. 13, 14). Absalom's rebellion; 
 David's flight; ark returned to Jerusalem; Ziba's 
 treachery; Shemei's cursing; Ahitophel's suicide (Chs. 
 15-17). Battle in forest of Ephraim; Absalom's 
 death ; David's sorrow ; his return to Jerusalem ; Shi- 
 niei, Mephibosheth, Barzillai; rivalry (Chs. 18, 19). 
 Rovolt of Sheba; Joab slays Amasa; Sheba's head pre- 
 sented to Joab; David's ministers (Ch. 20). Three 
 years famine ; satisfaction to Gibeonites ; bones of Saul 
 and his son buried; Philistine giants slain (Ch. 21). 
 David's song (Ch. 22; Psa. 18). David's last words; 
 names and deeds of his heroes (Ch. 23). The census 
 and pestilence; the altar and offering (Ch. 24). 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 75 
 
 IX. Doctrine.— The official and national institution 
 of the office of prophet and king in the sphere of reve- 
 lation, and the development of the Kingdom of God. 
 
 X. Messianic— Messianic prophecy in the Books of 
 Samuel treats for the most part of the Messianic King 
 and Kingdom. We have — a. In 1 Sam. 2:1-10, The 
 prayer for it. h. In 1 Sam. 2:27-36, The first divine 
 intimation of its coming, c. In 2 Sam. Ch. v, The 
 covenant with David constituting him and his seed, as 
 the family, house, dynasty in whom this Messianic 
 promise is to be developed, and through whom it is to 
 be realized and forever eatablished. d. In 2 Sam. 
 23:1-7, The theocratic king, and his theocratic rule. 
 
H 
 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 CO . 
 
 05 . .. .00 
 
 ••t-1-^..CO • T-l -rH-^CQCQ 
 -^ <-5 '.^ I . -^ O i> I i> i> 
 
 J^^Oi |T-iT-4.. ^ «D 05 Ci CO O •r-iC? 
 
 Wlh-^'-OtJh-^ •• .• i^' -^ r-l V^ \ . . iO ^ 
 
 ••S.-OtHthI CO 2 .. OJ....002 C5^ 
 
 r;; .^- CO ^ oi .-, "^ 00 ^ T: r-i . '^^ . . *^^ '-h ^ ^ 03 
 
 lK»H-.--iO .r-iO • ' oi OO'^Oi (^ ...CO ...^-^^ 
 
 5£_LI lOI llOt^l I_!hC005^0 1 I It-hI IiOOt-h 
 rC;C^T-H!>i.rHOJCQ<?;iOOOi|-o.pHGQCQ^i>'0*0 I T-HTt^COi-iCQ 
 
 O r\> '"^ T-l T— I (75 T— I 
 
 ^^ ••CQ— ilOiCOtO«OCDcr)CO':0 10 0> T-lr-iOCO!M 
 
 • -OjTH^r-I^T-lT-ITHT-I^T-ll-lTHCQT-lOOQOOiT-lT-lT-lirH-r-l 
 
 H S ^. ^- ^- ^- . • ^- ^- ^ . • ^ • ^ ^ ^ ■ ^ 
 
 ■'-iC<)-^'-'T^'-'i-i-r-iTHi--->-H^T-i^i-lT-JO"JCQOi03 0'>0')0?0305 
 
 w 
 
 
 "^ 03 OS 
 
 '^'^ fl' 
 
 ^' =§pd 03^ 03 03 
 
 03 cS^ 
 
 N rQ 
 
 O O 
 
 f3 S S 03rd Ce^ 03,J3r^^--^rJd 03 
 
 _ _ ^ ^ ^ :^-2 :!i?.2 1!!?.^ .2S ^ "^ -22 .2 ^ 
 
 COCOCOCOCO'XiCOT-iOt:'OCOCQiCOJ»OTt<t:"^COi^^t-iOQOt;: 
 
 C5lO-.-ii>t-*OiOlOiO(MO^O"J<MT-tr-iOiOiOOOOOOOOt-iOCO=2 
 000050iOi0505CiCiC50505Ci05GOoOOOOOGO<X)OOOOQOQD 
 
 
 CO 
 
 o o 
 
 :::::: >^ 03 r : 
 
 CO o 
 
 ot-<MCOT-H.rHCOi-ic^"^i>oiOi-ic<jod'rHao«ooi>«o25 
 
 
 +j4JHSo3<iiajo3aja>aia)a;ajacei»a)i:6:ea)ceo3aja>i:tf 
 *S*— '^ns c^i^fO c6 c3 o3 c^ cS c^ cj^o c^ c5<Tjrrt Oj"^"^ to cg"^ 
 
 flflS=lg^r3rtfH;H'Mf-i;H;-i;Hr-;;H!Hrtr5;HS3'-'fHr3 
 
 t— ih— Nt— N,^ ^ i^ L^ CO OJ QO CO C» CC CO^^ CO COV-''-' OJu'TuZ ^ tCu— 
 I— 'PPl-5HH'-5^-ti|-l|-|hHl— II— IhHI-H'-SMhHhSl-Sf-l'^'S'^l— l(-|hS 
 
 CO CO 
 C^ Co 
 
 O O 
 
 o o 
 
 :5 a 
 
 O-^ 03 
 
 .r3 CO ce c^ CO 
 
 2,^ 
 
 ^ 03 ce o3 c^ -..„.-.-- 
 _occ'SfH^H'r!_'-3cecSc6N 
 
 3'^ 5^ S-s ce'^ ^1^ BM fl^^ grS^ ES^i^^^^ a 
 
•Sh 
 
 JO 
 
 zo 
 
 O 
 
 • *2 ci o T-H 
 oi ■7' oi cQ C9 
 
 '-' J^ I I J 
 I "^ '^ CO ^ 
 
 to >o 10 »c »o 
 
 .00 
 
 I t- 
 
 CO c^ 
 
 • • ^ 
 
 ZO ^ 
 
 o . 
 
 o 
 (?5 
 
 o-?, 
 
 00 th 
 
 CO I 
 
 I 00 
 
 IC CO 
 
 CO 
 CO . 
 
 (M 01 . 
 
 00 I io 
 
 1 T-l Of 
 
 r-t .. I 
 
 • • CO o 
 Oi Ot) oj 
 
 o? . .. 
 
 . t-t CO 
 
 rCSQ . 
 
 .. CO ^ 
 
 CO I •• 
 
 CO -^ CO 
 
 .. CO 
 
 u «■ . 
 
 J CO ^H 
 
 ^01 
 
 zo >-< 
 
 co^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 o 
 
 • • tH CO CO CO '^ . o 
 O O'? 05 GQ CO OT t- O"? 
 
 I -i-i C5 CO O ^ \ l- 
 ■r-tC'jT-iCJCOCOCO-^ 
 
 ir o 
 
 CQ CM 01 W GQ o^ (N c<} 01 
 
 o> c<i c^ C5 o? CQ 01 w 
 
 0) 
 
 H 
 
 03 rj 
 
 WW 
 
 ,r3 (B 
 cS O 
 
 III 
 
 OSS 
 
 c3 03 c6 :6 ^ ,^ .^ 
 CD CD o) <D a; jg eg 
 
 Mti^ffiWK^^^ 
 
 
 rW i-H ^ 
 
 C3 N N 
 
 -^-^ 2 2 9 s s a 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ « 
 
 CO GO 
 
 
 OOOCit-oO 
 
 
 Oi 
 
 COCO'— 'OSOiCJGOGO 
 
 oS 
 
 (MO 
 
 
 t- t' t- JO i2 »o ^ 
 
 
 C3 
 
 i" G<JOirt<C00005ai 
 
 5; t>cococococo*Oio 
 
 1 
 
 |o 
 
 00 GO 
 
 
 j> t- i> r^ t- i> t- 
 
 
 i> 
 
 ^Cq 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 ^^ 
 
 12 
 
 
 e 03 03 
 2 ^ pa 
 
 rO^ 
 
 
 t/j 
 
 ^ 
 
 -M -+3 03 
 
 03 
 
 s: 03 -M 00 4^ 02 
 
 >^ 
 
 §3 
 
 ce " 
 
 
 §gS: : : - 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 ^r : : § ?S § ^ 
 
 CQ 
 
 
 ^' 
 
 1 
 
 aas. 
 
 
 k. 
 
 ^ ^ a^a^ 
 
 2^ 
 
 T-C W 
 
 h2i 
 
 CO T-l c^ S ^ '^ 
 
 "S 
 
 OS 
 
 ^Ci»OG<Ji-HCO-r-iCOi-l 
 ^GQ*0 CO ^ ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ IC 
 
 <» 
 
 tH GQ ^^ 
 
 S 
 
 
 §5 
 
 
 
 ^r^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ r^ ^ ^ r-H ^ ^ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ->* 
 
 cS 
 
 (D C CD 5^ eg CS 
 
 ^^ 
 
 <X) 
 
 2 ceccceceoScgi^ce 
 
 (5i 
 
 & 
 
 dni 
 
 g ce cs je grjTJ 
 
 cfi 
 
 ^g rO r^ ^^3 r§ n=i rS r^ r- 
 
 (^ 
 
 
 U r^ 
 
 J^ 
 
 ^ K fe S OD !^ S 
 
 ~ 
 
 fe 
 
 ^ 
 
 •^ 
 
 hH '"5 
 
 •<?i 
 
 1— 1 1— 1 1— 1 1— 1 H- 1 1-5 1-5 
 
 •^ 
 
 |_H 
 
 , l-5l-5l-5l-tH-5h-jK,l-5 
 
 "0? 
 
 ►^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S^ 
 
 <iS 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o- 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s§ 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 ..^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • F-l 
 
 s 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 ?^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 |l 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Zechariah 
 
 Shallum 
 
 Menahem 
 
 Pekahiah 
 
 Pekah 
 
 Jotham 
 
 Ahaz 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 Suhjectu 
 Hezekiah 
 Manasseh 
 Amon 
 Josiah 
 Jehoahaz 
 Jehoiakim 
 Jehoiachin 
 Zedekiah 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
78 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND KINGS. 
 
 I. J^ame.—Melakim = Kings. The Books are so 
 named for their embracins: the history of the kings of 
 Judah and Israel The two Books originall}^ constitu- 
 ted but one Book. 
 
 II. Position.— The Books are closely related to the 
 Books of Samuel in that they continue the history of 
 the Israelitish Monarchy, tracing it through the various 
 stages of its prosperity, decline and fall. 
 
 III. Time.— The Books of Kings cover a period of 
 about 450 years. They embrace the history of Israel 
 from the period of David's nomination of Solomon as 
 his successor, consequent upon the rebellion of Adoni- 
 jah, to the release of Jehoiachin from prison in Baby- 
 lon by Evil-merodach, 562 B. C, that is, the thirty- 
 seventh year of the Babylonian captivity. 
 
 IV. Composition:— Sources^ Date, Authorship. The 
 Books of Kings repeatedly refer to written documents 
 w^hich were doubtless used by the author in the compil- 
 ation of his work. These written documents, or sources 
 employed by the author are 
 
 1. The Book of the Acts of Solomon. 1 Ki. 11:41. 
 
 2. The Book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel. 
 1 Ki. 14: 19, and referred to altogether seventeen times. 
 
 3. The Book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah. 
 1 Ki. 15: 17, and referred to altogether fifteen times. 
 
 These books "of Chronicles" (2 and 3 above), to 
 which reference is made, were evidently historical rec- 
 ords written during the reigns of the kings of Israel and 
 Juhali, and not historical works written by two un- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 79 
 
 known private iindividuals in the last stage of the 
 Hebrew monarchy. The last time No. 3 above is re- 
 ferred to is in 2 Ki. 24:5, in connection with Jehoia- 
 kim, B. C. 600. Hence it is supposed that "The 
 Book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah " was 
 the work of a writer who must have lived at the be- 
 ginning of the Babylonian captivity. This view, 
 however, is untenable as evidenced by statements in 
 the Books of Kings going to show that these " Chron- 
 icles" were composed of documents written at an 
 early period. For example — a. The statement in 1 
 Ki. 9:21 refers to a condition existing in the time of 
 Solomon, and the writer of the statement, but not ap- 
 plicable to the divided kingdoms of Judah and Israel, 
 and certainly inapplicable after the deportation of the 
 ten tribes, and the remnant of the Canaanites in their 
 territory were no longer tributary to them. b. It is 
 evident that the statement in 1 Ki. 12: 19 was written 
 before the ten tribes were carried away captive by 
 Shalmaneser, inasmuch as the language was no longer 
 applicable after that event, c. It is evident that the 
 statement in 1 Ki. 8:8 was written before the Baby- 
 lonian captivity, because the language could not be 
 used respecting the staves of the ark when the temple 
 had been destroyed by Nebuchadnezzar, and all its 
 sacred utensils had been removed, d. It is evident 
 that the statement in 2 Ki. 8:22 was written before 
 the Babylonian captivity, for otherwise the language 
 would be inapplicable, as Judah was then carried 
 away captive. 
 
 The author of the Books of Kings, who lived during 
 the Babylonian captivity, did not change the language 
 of passages like the above as being no longer appli- 
 
80 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 cable to the condition of the people in his time, for the 
 reason that the altered circumstances of the people in 
 his time were well known, and were not of such a 
 nature as to demand that he should change the lan- 
 guage of the original documents. 
 
 Hence we conclude that " The Book of the Chronicles 
 of the Kings of Judah," and " The Book of tlie Chroni- 
 cles of the Kings of Israel," were the annals of the re- 
 spective kings of the two kingdoms, written down for 
 the most part during the reign of each king. These 
 annals were evidently written by the person who held 
 the office of the Mazkeer of his time. The Mazkeer 
 was the recorder^ historiographer, the king^s annalist, 
 whose duty it was to record the deeds of the king and 
 the events of his reign. The first mention made among 
 the Hebrews of this office of recorder is in 2 Sam. 
 8: 16 where we are told that in the time of David 
 " Jehoshaphat the son of Ahilud was recorder." 
 He is also mentioned in 2 Sam. 20: 24; 1 Ki. 4: 3. In 
 the time of Hezekiah the office was held by Joah the 
 son of Asaph, and in the time of Josiah b}^ Joah the 
 son of Jehoaz. 
 
 From such sources the author of the Books of Kings 
 drew his materials. It would seem that this author 
 wrote the Books of Kings, or at least completed his his- 
 tory, in the second half of the Babylonian captivitj^, 
 as he states that Evil-merodach, king of Babylon, re- 
 leased Jehoiachin, king of Judah, from prison in the 
 thirty-seventh year of his captivity. 2 Ki. 25:27-30. 
 On the other hand it would seem that the author com- 
 pleted his work before the close of the captivity as he 
 makes no mention of that event. Who this author of 
 the Books of Kings was is not known. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 81 
 
 V. Credibility. — 77^6 Monuments. The liistory of 
 the Books of Kings is admitted to be distinguished for 
 its fidelity and impartiality. The rulers and heroes of 
 Hebrew history are estimated according to the impar- 
 tial standards of the divine law, and justified or con- 
 demned according to their deeds. Moreover the history 
 being derived from contemporary annals, rests upon 
 the surest basis of truth, thus possessing, according to 
 sceptics themselves, a very high degree of probability. 
 The history of the Books of the Kings receives con- 
 firmation also from the monuments. The Moabite 
 Stone discovered in 1869, was erected about B. C. 900, 
 by Mesha, king of Moab, in commemoration of his 
 deliverance from the Israelites. The inscription on 
 the Stone agrees with Biblical statements pertaining to 
 that period. In the course of the inscription occur the 
 following names, that also occur in the Hebrew Scrip- 
 tures, viz. Jehovah, Chemosh (the national god of the 
 Moabites), Mesha, Omri, Moab, Gad, Israel, Medeba, 
 Atoroth, Dibon Baalmeon, Nebo, Jahaz, Beth-dibla- 
 thaim, Aroer, Iloronaim and Kirjathaira. This is 
 strikingly confirmatory of the historicit}^ of the Scrip- 
 ture narrative, and proves that the names in the Books 
 of Kings have come down to us in their integrity, and 
 that they represent real persons and places. The As- 
 syrian monuments furnish similar remarkable con- 
 firmations of the history in these Books of Kings. For 
 example: for some centuries Samaria was known to 
 the Assyrians as " Beth-Omri" = " house" or "city 
 of Omri," thus agreeing with the Hebrew records in 
 the importance they assign to this king, as especially 
 confirming the statement in 1 Ki. 16:24. Ahab, 
 [6J 
 
82 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Oinri\s son and successor, is mentioned by name in an 
 Assyrian contemporary inscription, which in liarmonj^ 
 witli the account in 1 Ki. 18: 4G ; 21 : 1 , 2, calls him 
 "Ahab of Jezreel." The Black Obelisk of Shalmaneser 
 contains a notice of the Israelitish king, Jehu, and an- 
 other of the Syrian king ]Iazael, who succeeded 
 Benhadad, Ahab's contemporary. The statements in 
 2 Ki. 15:29; 16:9, 10, 29, etc., receive abundant con- 
 firmation from the Assyrian monuments. The annals 
 of Tiglath-pileser also mention the Israelite kings, 
 Menahem and Hoshea. The annals of Sargon, Shal- 
 maneser's successor, note the events connected with 
 the capture of Samaria, and the fall of the northern 
 kingdom of Israel, and assign these events to his 
 (Sargon's) first year, which was B. C. 722, 721. Thus 
 an exact agreement exists between the Assj^'ian and 
 Hebrew dates, the Hebrew chronology placing the fall 
 of Samaria 135 j'ears before the capture of Jerusalem 
 b}^ Nebuchadnezzar, which was in the eighteenth year 
 of that king, or B. C. 586, and B. C. 586 -f-135-=B. C. 
 721. There is a like close agreement, and remarkable 
 confirmation in the Assyrian and Hebrew accounts of 
 the military operations between Sennacherib and 
 Hezekiah: the annals of Sennacherib compared with 
 2 Ki. 18 : 7, 13-16. And the walls of Karnak in Egypt 
 confirm the statement of 1 Ki. 14: 25, 26. 
 
 VI. Divisions.— The Books of Kings may be divided 
 upon the basis of their three principal historical 
 periods, viz. : 
 
 1. 1 Ki. Chs. 1-11. Solomon. 
 
 2. 1 Ki. Chs. 12-22 and 2 Ki. Chs. 1-17. Israel and 
 Judah. 
 
 3. 2 Ki. Chs. 18-25. Judah. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 83 
 
 VII. Contents.— The Scripture references in the pre- 
 ceding table of The Kings indicate the contents. 
 Compare also tlie Jiooks of those prophets who were 
 contemporaries of the kings. 
 
 VIII. Doctrine.— The two principal teachings that 
 receive repeated and startling enforcement are — 
 
 1. Obedience and righteousness procure every bless- 
 ing. 
 
 2. Disobedience and apostas}^ work general ruin. 
 
 IX. Messianic.— 'Jlie onl}'' Messianic element in the 
 Books of Kings is that which is bound up in the theo- 
 cratic development of the kingdom, and in its typical 
 characters, e. g. Solomon. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND CHRONICLES 
 
 I. Name.— D it* re ha y y am inL = Registers of Days or 
 Journal of Affairs. The nature of the work gives it 
 this name. The name Chronicles comes from some 
 copies of the Vulgate. 
 
 II. Position.— The Books of Chronicles originally 
 constituted one Book. Thej- are placed at the end of 
 the Hebrew Canon, being included in the Hagiographa. 
 As the events related in them, however, generall}^ be- 
 long to the same age as the Books of Kings, they ap- 
 propriately follow those Books, as in the A. V. 
 
 III. Time.— Considering that the Books of Chron- 
 icles open with the genealogies found in Genesis, they 
 cover a period of time beginning with Adam, and ex- 
 tending to the proclamation of Cyrus for the rebuild- 
 ing of the temple in Jerusalem. 
 
84 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 IV. Composition:— Sources, Date and Authorship. 
 The author of Chronicles refers to various works treat- 
 ing of the main portions of the history covered by his 
 Books, which works he doubtless used in the composi- 
 tion of his own work. These works are in addition to 
 the earlier historical, canonical Books from Genesis to 
 and including Kings. The first mentioned of these 
 additional sources are — The Book of Nathan the 
 prophet, and The Book of Gad the seer. 1 Ciir. 
 29 : 29. The Prophecy of Ahijah the Shiionite, and 
 the Visions of Iddo the seer, are also mentioned in ad- 
 dition to the Book of Nathan the prophet, as sources 
 for the history of Solomon. 2 Chn 9:20. Other 
 sources for the history of other kings are, the Book of 
 Shemaiah the prophet, the Book of Iddo the seer con- 
 cerning genealogies (2 Chr. 12:15), the Midrash or 
 Commentary of the prophet Iddo (2 Chr. 13:22), the 
 Book of the Kings of Judah and Israel (2 Chr. 16: 11; 
 25:26; 28:26; 32:32); the same work or works re- 
 ferred to, as the Book of the Kings of Israel and Judah 
 (2 Chr. 27:7; 35:27; 36:8); the Book of the Kings 
 of Israel (2 Chr. 20:34; 33:18); the Commentary of 
 the Book of Kings (2 Chr. 24:27). The author also 
 refers to Isaiah the prophet (2 Chr. 26:22), and to 
 the vision of Isaiah the prophet (2 Chr. 32: 32). Com- 
 paring the Books of Chronicles with the Books of Sam- 
 uel and Kings there is no good reason to doubt that 
 the compiler of the former Books not only made use of 
 the latter Books, but that they were for him in many 
 matters the chief source in his history of the kings. 
 
 As to the matter of date : — as the history in these 
 Books of Chronicles terminates with the proclamation 
 of Cyrus for the rebuilding of Jerusalem (2 Chr. 36 : 22, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. . 85 
 
 23), about 536 B. C, the Books could not have been 
 composed before that monarch's reign. On the other 
 hand there is nothing in the Books of Chronicles be- 
 longing to an age later than that of Ezra, which is 
 probable proof that they were composed in his time. 
 The supposition that the genealogies in 1 Chr. 3: 19-24 
 extend to the time of Alexander the Great is unfound- 
 ed, for the list goes no further than the sons of Han- 
 aniah, the son of Zerubbabel. There is no evidence 
 that the names following in the list were those of 
 descendants of the previous ones, but rather that they 
 are parallel genealogies. And this is confirmed by the 
 fact that in the last part of the list occur names of 
 persons found also in Ezra, who speaks of them as 
 having gone up with him in the reign of Artaxerxes. 
 Accordingly the genealogies in Chronicles do not come 
 down later than the time of Ezra, for Zerubbabel 
 went up to Jerusalem in the beginning of the reign of 
 Cyrus, 536 B. C, and the grandchildren of Zerubba- 
 bel, mentioned in 1 Chr. 3: 19-21, would be the con- 
 temporaries of Ezra, who went up to Jerusalem in the 
 seventh year of Artaxerxes, about 457 B. C. Ezra 
 7:6, 7. 
 
 In i3oint of authorship, the spirit, the style, the lin- 
 guistic usages, the comparison of the Books of Chron- 
 icles and Ezra — all point to Ezra as the author. ^ 
 
 V. Credibility.— As the main portion of the historj^ 
 in Chronicles is the same as that contained in the 
 Books of Kings, the Books of Chronicles possess all 
 the claims to be considered genuine history that be- 
 long to the narratives in the earlier Books. Where 
 the author of Chronicles furnishes additional matter 
 he refers to the original sources whence he derived his 
 
SG INTKODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 inforination. And in addition to this the historical 
 credibility of the author is confirmed by independent 
 testimony, and canonical authorities not named by the 
 writer. Thus the invasion of Jerusalem b}' the Phil- 
 istines and Arabians in the reign of Jehoram (2 Chr. 
 21:16-19), not mentioned in Kings, is confirmed by 
 Joel 3 : 4:-G. And the wars of Uzziah and Ahaz against 
 the Philistines, described in 2 Chr. 26:6; 28:18, 
 agree with Isa. 14: 28; Amos 6: 2. In respect to num- 
 bers, e. g. ages and reigns of kings, the Books of 
 Chronicles and Kings as a rule agree. In a few in- 
 stances numbers in Chronicles are excessive, but so 
 excessive as at once to indicate that the fault is not 
 to be ascribed to the author, but to a corruption of the 
 original text. 
 
 VI. DesigD.— Althougli the Books of Samuel and 
 Kings were already written, still the author of Chroni- 
 cles had a design in preparing his work not met by 
 the former Books. This design was in the first place, 
 to furnish the genealogies of the Israelites, which were 
 but partially given in the other Books of the Hebrew 
 people. In the next place his design was to give a 
 connected history from the death of Saul to the pro- 
 clamation of Cyrus for the rebuilding of the temple in 
 Jerusalem. In carrying out this design he confines 
 himself, after the separation of the ten tribes, to the 
 house of Judah, omitting considerable matter found in 
 Samuel and Kings, and introducing new matter, espec- 
 ially such as relates to the armies of David, and the 
 service of the priests and Levites in the temple. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— These are as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 1. 1 Chr. Chs. 1-9. A series of genealogical tables. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 87 
 
 similar to those found in Genesis, beginnin"- with 
 Adam, together with the genealogies of the Israelites 
 in the times following the history in the Pentateuch, 
 terminating in the royal line with the sons of Elioenai 
 (3 : 24), who lived after the return of the Jews from Baby- 
 lon. Interspersed with the genealogies are other no- 
 tices, — historical, geographical and liturgical. 
 
 2. 1 Chr. Chs. 10-29 and 2 Chr. Chs. 1-9. Begins 
 with the death of Saul and the accession of David 
 to the Kingdom of Israel, and giving the histories of 
 David and Solomon, ends with the death of Solomon. 
 
 3. 2 Chr. Chs. 10-36. Begins with the reign of 
 Rehoboam, Solomon's son and successor, embraces the 
 history of the kingdom of Judah only, and extends to 
 the proclamation of Cyrus for the rebuilding of the 
 temple in Jerusalem. 
 
 VIII. Doctrine.— Remembering that the Books of 
 Chronicles were written at the termination of the Baby- 
 lonian exile, these doctrinal teachings become empha- 
 sized : — 
 
 1. God's dispensational ways from the beginning. 
 
 2. The election of grace and the reward of faithful- 
 ness in the return of a remnant from captivity to the 
 Land of Promise. 
 
 3. The abandonment of idolatry and the attainment 
 of spirituality through divine chastisement. 
 
 IX. Messianic— The Books of Chronicles close with 
 a kingless nation ; but a nation looking forward to the 
 near coming of its true King, Jehovah, the Messiah; — 
 the King of whom its David and Solomon were types. 
 
88 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 EZRA. 
 
 I. Name.— In Hebrew and English, Ezra. The Book 
 is so called from its principal character, Ezra, and per- 
 haps also from his being the reputed author of tlie 
 Book. The Book is written partly in Hebrew, partly 
 in Chaldee. 
 
 II. Position.— Formerly the Books of Ezra and Neh- 
 emiah constituted one Book. But in modern editions 
 of the Hebrew Bible, as also in the LXX, the Peshito- 
 Syriac, and the Vulgate, they are separated. No suffi- 
 cient reason exists for combining Ezra and Nehemiah 
 in one Book as if they were the work of one and the 
 same author. The language with which Nehemiah 
 opens, — "The words of Nehemiah, the son of Hacha- 
 liah," naturally separates the two Books. The list in 
 Ezra Ch. 2 is given, with slight variation, in Neh. 
 7 : G-70. If the two Books are really one, and the work 
 of a single author, wh}' is the long list given twice, and 
 with variations ? 
 
 II. Time.— The Books of Ezra and Nehemiah extend . 
 over a period of about one hundred years, i. e. from* 
 the return of the exiles under Zerubbabel, B. C. 536, 
 to the second visit of Nehemiah in B. C. 432. 
 
 IV. Theme.— The Books of Ezra and Nehemiah treat 
 of — Restoration, Reorganization and Reformation; — 
 that is, the restoration of the Jews from the Babylonian 
 captivity, their reorganization in the Promised Land, 
 and the reformation as to certain abuses that had 
 crept in. 
 
 V. Clironolog-y.— The chronology of the period of 
 Ezra and Nehemiah, and up to the close of the Old 
 Testament Canon, is in brief as follows: 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 89 
 
 B. C. 536. 
 
 Cyrus. 
 
 B. C. 444. 
 
 Nehemiah's first visit to 
 
 '■• 529. 
 
 Cambyses. 
 
 
 Jerusalem. 
 
 '• 522. 
 
 Pseudo-Smerdls. 
 
 " 432. 
 
 Nehemiali's second visit to 
 
 '• 522. 
 
 Darius Hystaspis. 
 Dedication of the Temple. 
 
 
 Jerusalem. 
 
 " 516. 
 
 ^- 425. 
 
 Xerxes II. 
 
 '• 485. 
 
 Xerxes. 
 
 '' 425. 
 
 Sogdianus 
 
 " 465. 
 
 Artaxerxes I. (Longima- 
 
 •' 424. 
 
 Darius 11. 
 
 
 nus). 
 
 ^^ 405. 
 
 Artaxerxes II. 
 
 '' 458. 
 
 Mission of Ezra. 
 
 
 
 VI. Corn-position:— Authorship, ZMity, etc. Clis. 
 7: 27-9:15 are generally conceded to be the work of 
 Ezra. The remainder of the Book is for the most part 
 assigned b}^ critics to the author of the Books of Chron- 
 icles. No sufficient reason exists, however, against as- 
 <iribing the entire Book to Ezra. That Ezra speaks at 
 times in the tirst person, and at other times uses the 
 third person, is in the light of Scripture usage, no suffi- 
 <iient reason to infer diversity of authorship. Ch. 10 
 stands in such close connection witli what precedes 
 that we cannot but conclude it was written by the 
 same author. Moreover it is not at all probable that 
 Ezra would begin his narrative with 7:27, or with the 
 letter of Artaxerxes that immediately precedes it in 
 7:12-26; but would rather prefix to it an introduction 
 after the manner of 7:1-10. Hence it is concluded 
 that Ezra wrote the second part of the Book bearing 
 his name, i. e. Chs. 7-10. But the first part is also to 
 be assigned to him as its author. Ezra did not go up 
 to Jerusalem till the seventh year of Artaxerxes, about 
 B. C. 458. He therefore had no active part in the af- 
 fairs i-elated in the first part of the Book, and ending 
 ■with the dedication of the temple and tlie observance 
 of the passover (6:15-22). But the manner in which 
 the second part of Ezra opens, viz. — " Now, after these 
 things, in the reign of Artaxerxes," naturally refers to 
 a preceding part. As Ezra wrote an account of the 
 second companj^ of exiles who returned to Jerusalem, 
 
90 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 it was the most natural thing for hi in to prefix to it an 
 account of the preceding company who had returned. 
 He had several documents to furnish him with the 
 materials for this part of his histor^^ viz. the same list 
 that Nehemiah had found when he went up to Jerusa- 
 lem, and incorporated in his Book (Neh. 7:5-?3); the 
 decree of C3^rus in favor of the Jews; the letter of their 
 enemies to Artaxerxes, and his order to stop building the 
 temple; and the decree of Darius for its rebuilding. 
 These documents together with the statements of those 
 who had been eye-witnesses of those former transac- 
 tions furnished Ezra witli the material for writing the 
 history of the first part of his Book, Ohs. 1-G. This 
 history is consecutive, and directl}' connected with the 
 second part. Why should any other than Ezra write 
 the greater part of the Book (C'hs. 1-G) and prefix it to 
 a writing of Ezra, instead of calling it by some other 
 name ? 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— The Book of Ezra 
 naturally divides itsely into two parts. 
 
 1. Ezra Chs. 1-G. Account of the first company of 
 exiles who went up to Jerusalem from Babylon with 
 Zerubbabel, in the beginning of the reign of Cyrus, 
 and the restoration of the temple. The account in- 
 cludes, — a. Ch. 1. Decree of Cyrus permitting the Jews 
 to return to Jerusalem, and take with them the sacred 
 vessels Nebuchadnezzar had removed to Babylon, b. 
 Ch. 2. Register of those who returned, c. Ch. 8. 
 Altar of Burnt-olfering set up; Feast of Booths ob- 
 served ; foundations of the temple laid. d. Ch. 4. 
 The work of restoring the temple impeded till the 
 second year of Darius, e. Ch. 5. The work of restor- 
 ation resumed under the impetus given b}^ the prophets 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 91 
 
 Haggai and Zecliariali. f. Ch. 6. The temple re- 
 stored, dedicated, and the Passover observed. 
 
 2. Ezra Chs. 7-10. Acconnt of tlie going up to 
 Jerusalem of Ezra and his companions in the seventh 
 year of Artaxerxes, and the reforms they introduced 
 after their arrival; embracing — a. Ch. 7. Tlie permis- 
 sion of Ezra and his company to return; the decree of 
 Artaxerxes; Ezra's gratitude to God. h. Ch. 8. Ezra's 
 companions and the journey to Jerusalem, c. Ch. 9. 
 Jews in Judah having contracted marriage with foreign 
 wives, Ezra makes a solemn confession to God in the 
 name of his people, d. Cli. 10. The reform of abuses, 
 
 VIII. Doctrine.— The history of Ezra emphasizes — 
 
 1. God's government of tlie world for the benefit of 
 his people, as e. (j. in the decrees of restoration, etc. 
 
 2. Restoration to God, reorganization of the worship 
 of God, and reformation in life. 
 
 IX. Messianic— While there is no direct Messianic 
 prophec3^ in the Book of Ezra, still a number of Mes- 
 sianic prophecies were uttered in the times of Ezra 
 and the restoration, as, e. g. in the Books of the 
 prophets Haggai and Zechariah, and in the post-exilic 
 Psalms. Zerubbabel is also a type of the Messiah. 
 
 NEHEMIAH. 
 
 I. Name.— This Book receives its name Nehemiah 
 from the fact that he is the chief character in, as well 
 as the author of the Book. This Nehemiah is not to 
 be confounded with the Xehemiah of Ez. 2: 2. 
 
92 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 II. Position.— The Books of Ezra and Nehemiah, 
 formerly taken as one Book, are in modern editions of 
 the Hebrew Bible, in the LXX, in the Peshito-Syriac 
 and Vnlgate, separated as they should be. The Book 
 of Nehemiah, nnlike Ezra, is written wholly in 
 Hebrew. It properlj^ follows Ezra as it supplements 
 and completes the account of the return of the Jews 
 from captivity, recorded in Ezra. 
 
 III. Time. -Nehemiah flourished and wrought his 
 w'ork in behalf of the restored captives nearly one 
 hundred years after Zerubbabel reached Judea. The 
 Book itself of Nehemiah covers a period of about 
 twelve years, from B. C. 444 to 432. See Chroiiology 
 under Ezra. 
 
 IV. Biographical.— Nehemiah was cupbearer to Ar- 
 taxerxes Longimanus. In the twentieth 3"ear of that 
 monarch, Nehemiali, having receiv^ed intelligence of 
 the distressed condition of his countrymen in Judah, 
 obtained permission from the king to visit Jerusalem 
 and to rebuild it. After this the Book furnishes an 
 account of the building of the wall of Jerusalem under 
 his administration, the dedication of the rebuilt wall, 
 the correction of abuses, interspersed with various 
 lists. See Introduction to Malachi. 
 
 V. Composition :— Authorship, Unity, etc. The 
 close connection that exists between different parts of 
 the Book of Nehemiah argues a single authorship. 
 The opening words of the Book assert that this author 
 is Nehemiah himself. And this is for the most part 
 conceded with one or two exceptions. Some critics 
 regard Chs. 8, 9, 10 as an interpolation made by the 
 author of the Books of Chronicles upon the basis, of 
 contemporary notes. But such an interpolation in the 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 93 
 
 writinojs of one who held the position Nehemiah did, 
 and that an interpolation too in the middle of the Book, 
 is most unnatural. Moreover there is a close connec- 
 tion between the incidents recorded in this so-called 
 interpolated section, and what immediatel}^ precedes; 
 6^. ^. compare 7 : 73 with 8:14-18, and 9:1. Besides 
 the minute particulars given in these three so-called 
 interpolated chapters show that the}^ were written 
 down by an eye-witness; thus note the writer's use of 
 the first person plural in Oh. 10, showing that he was 
 a participator in the events. Once more the unity of 
 authorship, the unity of the whole Book is evidenced 
 by the fact that there are linguistic peculiarities com- 
 mon both to the so-called interpolated section and the 
 undisputed parts of the Book, that occur rarel}^ else- 
 where. As to 12:1-16, the incorporation of such a 
 list in the Book is altogether appropriate, as its object 
 was to give the names of the Levites who took part in 
 the dedication of the wall of Jerusalem, described in 
 12:24-47. It is perfectly consistent with Nehemiah's 
 authorship that reference should be made in 12: 26, 47 
 to "the days of Nehemiah and Ezra," for these words 
 could have been written bj^ Nehemiah after he had 
 retired from the governorship if not before, as they 
 refer to his political life. The historicity of the Books 
 of Ezra and Nehemiah is confirmed by the correspond- 
 ence that exists between them and other prophetical 
 writings. 
 
 VI. Divisions and Contents.— The principal divi- 
 sions are three, viz. : 
 
 1. Chs. 1-7. Embracing — a. Chs. 1, 2. Occasion 
 of Nehemiah's visit to Jerusalem — the restoration of 
 the city's walls, etc. 6. Chs. 3, 4. The opposition to 
 
94 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the progress of this work, overcome, c. Ch. 5. Se- 
 cures just enactments in certain administrative courses. 
 d. Ch. 6. Another attempt to hinder the completion 
 of the walls defeated, e. Ch. 7. ]>eneficent muni- 
 cipal measures adopted, and a list of the exiles who 
 returned with Zerubbabel given. 
 
 2. Chs. 8-10. Embracing— a. Ch. 8. The people's 
 request to have the Law read, granted; the feast of 
 Booths observed, h. Ch. 9. Confession of sin, and a 
 solemn covenant made. c. Ch. 10. The terms of the 
 covenant. 
 
 3. Chs. 11-13. Embracing— a. Ch. 11. Residents 
 of Jerusalem and neighboring towns, b. Ch. 12. Le- 
 vitical lists; account of the dedication of the walls; 
 dues of the priests and Levites, and the liberality of 
 the communit}^ c. Nehemiah's second visit to Jeru- 
 salem ; religious measures av^ reforms. See under 
 Malachi. 
 
 VII. Doctrine and Messianic— See under Ezra, and 
 compare Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi. 
 
 ESTHER. 
 
 I. ^2iTaie,~Aster = Esther =^ star. The Book is so 
 named from its principal character, a Jewish maid 
 called originally Hadassah, but Esther after she be- 
 came the wife of Ahasuerus, i. e. Xerxes (B. C. 485- 
 465). 
 
 II. Time.— The Persian King Ahasuerus of the 
 Book of Esther is now generally identified with Xerxes, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 05 
 
 >y1io i-eigned B. C. 485-4G5. Tlie events therefore 
 took place during his reign. The Book opens in the 
 third year of his- reign (1:3), v. e. B. C. 482. See 
 Chronology under Ezra. 
 
 III. Arg-iiment.— The narrative of the book is, 
 briefly, as follows: — King Ahasuerus, who reigned from 
 India to Ethiopia, in the third year of his reign made a 
 g:reat feast in Shushan, the palace. During the feast 
 he ordered Queen Yashti to be brought in that he 
 might exhibit her beauty to his guests. Yashti refused 
 to comply with his request; whereupon he deposed her 
 from being queen, and chose in her stead Esther, a 
 Jewess, the cousin and adopted daughter of Mordecai. 
 Haman, prime minister of Ahasuerus, angered because 
 Mordecai did not show him required reverence, ob-* 
 tained a decree from the king for the slaughter of all 
 the Jews in the Kingdom. Esther obtains a counter 
 decree. Mordecai is promoted to the highest i)lace of 
 honor, and Haman is hung. The Jews slaughter their 
 enemies, and introduce the feast of Purim in commem- 
 oration of their deliverance. The Book concludes with 
 a description of the greatness of Ahasuerus. 
 
 IV. Credibility.— Against the credibility of the his- 
 tory in Esther it is urged that it is not supposable that 
 the king w^ould issue a decree for the slaughter of all 
 the Jews in his Kingdom and publish that decree twelve 
 months before it was to take effect. It is also consid- 
 ered unnatural that the king, Xerxes, instead of revok- 
 ing the bloody decree, should issue a counter decree 
 giving the Jews libert}^ to arm and defend themselves, 
 resulting in the slaughter of 75,000 of his subjects. 
 But there is nothing at all incredible in all this, or 
 any like objections that are urged against the histori- 
 
96 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 city of the Book. They correspond precisely with what 
 is known of Xerxes from other sources, with what is 
 known of many another despot. The historical details 
 furnished are too numerous atd precise to regard the 
 Book as pure fabrication, and to regard it as other than 
 genuine contemporary history. The universal observ- 
 ance of the feast of Purim is a standing attestation of 
 the historicity of Esther. The fact that the name of 
 God does not occur in the Book of Esther is certainly 
 strange, but seems also to be by design, and that not 
 simply in order to guard against the profanation of the 
 name at the Purim feast when it was intended that the 
 Book should be read, but also in this way to give peculiar 
 emjjhasis, to render all the more conspicuous, the provi- 
 dential work of God which is so obviously present and 
 operative all through the history of the Book. 
 
 V. Composition :—Autliorsliip and Date. The au- 
 thor of the Book is not known. It was probably writ- 
 ten by a Jew at Susa during the Persian dominion. 
 The minuteness and vividness of the particulars nar- 
 rated would seem to show that the writer lived in close 
 proximity to the events recorded. 
 
 VI. Doctrine and Messianic— The doctrinal thought 
 emphasized in the Book is God's government in provi- 
 dence. While there is no direct Messianic prophecy 
 in the Book, still throughout it there is a Messianic 
 symbolism. The Book was admitted into the Canon 
 because it contained the history of a most remarkable 
 deliverance wrought out by Providence in behalf of 
 Israel, a deliverance which may be regarded as a pre- 
 figuring symbol of that greater deliverance wrought 
 out by Messiah in behalf of the whole Israel of God. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES, '■> i 
 
 HEBREW POETRY. 
 
 Hebrew poetry goes back to the earliest times, ap- 
 pearing already in Genesis. A number of- the Books 
 of the Old Testament are entirely poetical, while poeti- 
 cal selections are preserved also in the historical Books. 
 The Books entirely poetical are Job (except Prologue 
 and Epilogue), Psalms, Proverbs, The Song of Songs, 
 and The Lamentations of Jeremiah. Eeclesiastes 
 approaches the form of gnomic poetry. Hebrew poetry 
 may be classified as ep/'c, when it describes God's deal- 
 ings with his people, e. g. Job, Psa. 78; Itjric, when it 
 expresses in song the religious or heart experiences of 
 the writer, e. g. The Song of Songs and most of the 
 Psalms; didactic when it inculcates the duties of life, 
 e. g. Proverbs; elegiac as in The Lamentations of 
 Jeremiah. There is strictly no dramatic poetry in the 
 Old Testament. Hebrew poetry has properly neither 
 rhyme nor metre, but is always distinguished by 
 rhythm. The rhythm of Hebrew poetry consists in a 
 certain harmonious relation of the parts or members of 
 the single verses to each other, called tJie parallelism of 
 memhers. This parallelism of members is the most 
 distinguishing feature of Hebrew poetry. It is classi- 
 fied as synonymous, antithetical, and synthetical par- 
 allelism. 
 
 1. Synonj^mous parallelism consists in repeating in 
 different form, and so additionally enforcing, in the 
 second member of the verse, the thought contained in 
 the first member; e. g. Xum. 23:8; Josh. 10: 12; Psa. 
 78:43. lI. Y. 
 
 2. Antithetic parallelism is that wherein the thought 
 
 [7J 
 
98 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 of the second member stands in contrast with the first, 
 the contrast emphasizing or confirming; e. g. Psa. 
 1:6; Prov. 10:1. R. V. 
 
 3. Synthetic or constructive parallelism consists of 
 several, and sometimes of many, members, closely con- 
 nected, and illustrating one subject; — it supplements 
 or completes; e. g. Psa. 37:25, 26. R. V. 
 
 4. A fourth kind of parallelism, though of rare oc- 
 currence, is climatic parallelism, where the second 
 member takes up and completes the thought of the 
 first member in the manner of an ascending climax; 
 e. g. Ex. 15 : ] 6 ; Psa. 29 : 1. R. V. 
 
 By far the greater number of verses in the poetry of 
 the Old Testament consist of distichs, i. e. two lines, 
 thus examples cited above. A very few are mono- 
 sticlis, consisting of a single line, e. g. Psa. 16: 1. In 
 tristichs, or verses of three lines, sometimes the three 
 lines are synonymous (Psa. 5: 11); sometimes the first 
 and second members are parallel in thought, and the 
 third completes it (Psa. 2:2); sometimes the second 
 and third members are parallel (Psa. 3:7); and some- 
 times the first and third are parallel, and the second is 
 in the nature of a parenthesis (Psa. 4:2). In tetra- 
 siicJis, or verses of four lines, generally the first mem- 
 ber is parallel to the second, and the third parallel to 
 the fourth (Gen. 49:7), but sometimes the first is 
 parallel to the third, and the second parallel to the 
 fourth (Psa. 55:21), and occasionally the tetrastich 
 takes other forms. Of rare occurrence are pentastichs 
 (Num. 24:8), and hexastichs (Song of Songs 4:8). 
 Using the term strophe in the modified sense as signi- 
 fying a group of verses, connected together by a cer- 
 tain unity of thought, then strophes are found in 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 99 
 
 Hebrew poetry. Such strophes appear in Psalms 
 where refrains occur, as e. g. Psa. 42: 5, 11, and 48: 5, 
 the two Psalms originall}^ constituting one. The 
 progress of thought in poems of considerable length 
 are also marked bj' pauses constituting strophes. 
 Manj^ of tlie Psalms fall logically, as well as poetically, 
 into groups of verses, thus also constituting strophes. 
 
 JOB. 
 
 I.'Satne.—Eyob = Joh=persecidecl or enduring. 
 The Book is so called from the name of its principal 
 character, or hero. 
 
 II. Position.— The Book of Job is included in the 
 Hagiographa, the third division of the Hebrew Bible, 
 called according to the Jews Ketubim or Writings. 
 The Book also forms a part of the so-called ChoJchmah 
 — or Wisdom-Literature (Job, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes) 
 of the Hebrews. This Literature is so called on ac- 
 count of the philosophico-religious character of its 
 observations and discussions upon the phenomena and 
 problems of human life. 
 
 III. Time.— According to the representations of the 
 Book, Job and the events recorded in the Book of Job 
 belong to the patriarchal period, or the very earliest 
 part of the Mosaic period. See V and VI below. 
 
 IV. Desig-n— Argument.— It is generally conceived 
 that the design of the Book of Job is to discuss the 
 problem— Why do the righteous suffer 9 and that the 
 result of the discussion is a failure to arrive at a satis- 
 factory solution of the problem. But this view of its 
 
100 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 design is contradicted by the Book, and especially by 
 the Prologue and Epilogue of the Book p^-ecisely where, 
 if anywhere, we should go to find the design of the 
 Book. According to the Prologue and Epilogue, and 
 according to the entire l^ook, the one great design of 
 the Book is not to discuss the problem of — Why do the 
 righteous sulfer ? — but to furnish a preeminent ex- 
 ample, and that example teaching precisely this — 
 Behold hoiv the righteous can suffer^ and still endure 
 stedfast to the end ; stedfast to his God and to his in- 
 tegrity. That this is the one great design of the Book 
 is the plain and emphatic teaching of the Prologue, 
 especially as it comes out in God's repeated testimony 
 and challenge with respect to Job and there is none 
 like him in all the earth in being perfect, upright, 
 fearing God, eschewing evil, and holding fast his in- 
 tegrity to the end and against all. No interpretation 
 can be put uj^jon the Book, or any part of it, that does 
 uot agree with the statement of God in regard to Job, 
 and accept it as a true statement of Job's i-eal char- 
 acter. Moreover that this is the design of the Book is. 
 the evident teaching of the prophet Ezekiel (14: 14, 20), 
 and the apostle James (5: 11, R. V.). How this is and 
 that this is the design of the Book appears also from the 
 argument of the Book which is as follows: — The first 
 Celestial Council meets (1 : G). The principal char- 
 acters in this Council are God, Satan and Job. The 
 point at issue is, — Which is the greater in and over 
 man, the power of God, or the power of Satan ? A 
 test of this is to be instituted, a supreme trial of it is 
 to be made. Job is the one chosen and mutually 
 agreed upon as the one in whom the test, the trial is 
 to be made. God issues the challeniie to Satan in 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 101 
 
 the words — "Hast thou considefecl my servant Job? 
 fc there is none like him in the earth," etc. Satan 
 accepts the challenge with the words, — "Doth Job 
 fear God for nought ?" The details of the challenge 
 are then arranged, according to which Satan is given 
 permission of God to do what he will with all Job's 
 possessions, Satan's object being to force Job to re- 
 nounce God. Accordingly Satan goes forth and dis- 
 possesses Job of all his estates, and all his children. 
 Job stands the test. Though his possessions and 
 children are gone he refuses to renounce God. Satan 
 is discomfited. But God challenges Satan a second 
 time, and again Satan accepts the challenge. The 
 only stipulation that God makes is that Satan shall 
 spare Job's life. Satan goes forth to do his utmost to 
 force Job to renounce (4od. The test Satan now insti- 
 tutes and applies to Job is threefold. 1st. He smites 
 Job with leprosy. 2nd. He turns Job's wife against 
 him. 3rd. He marshals against Job three false friends 
 who b}^ the shrewdest arguments of devilish clever- 
 ness try to unbalance Job's reason, and overthrow his 
 convictions as to God. These arguments, constituting 
 the third part of the test, occupy the larger portion of 
 the Book, beginning with Ch. o and terminating with 
 Ch. 32. But Job endures through it all, stands the 
 test, refuses to renounce God. Satan seeing his de- 
 feat does not appear again upon the scene, in the 
 Epilogue, when Job, having stood the test, is blessed 
 of God with double what he before possessed. Exam- 
 ination will show that this conception of the design 
 and argument of the Book alone consistently explains 
 and harmonizes all the parts and statements of the 
 l^ook. 
 
102 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 V. Integrity— Historicity.— The jj^enuineness of cer- 
 tain parts of the Book of Job have at different 
 times been called into question. A very few have 
 questioned the genuineness of the Prologue and Epi- 
 logue, but these are absolutely necessary to the under- 
 standing and completeness of the Boolv. Without 
 these parts the Book is devoid of anj^ evident design, 
 and the character and experiences of Job are entirely 
 purposeless. Some critics have also questioned the 
 genuineness of Chs. 27:11-28:28 owing for the most 
 part, to the different moods and attitudes taken by Job 
 therein. The real difficulty however is not owing to 
 the different positions taken by Job, but owing to a 
 misconception of the design of the Book on the part of 
 the critics. If the design of the Book be as stated 
 above under IV, then the difficulties vanish and all be- 
 comes plain. According to this design the three false 
 friends are the agents of Satan in the attempt to effect, 
 by the acutest arguments of Satanic plausibility, the 
 overthrow of Job's reason, and force him to renounce 
 God. Relentlessly assailed b}' such arts and arguments^ 
 it becomes precisel}^ what is to be expected that Job 
 would manifest different moods, be subject to changes 
 of mind, give uttei-ance to sentiments seemingl^^ con- 
 tradictory, and in short be at times cast down to the 
 lowest depths of doubt and despair, as well as times 
 exalted to sublimest heights of assured faith and hope. 
 But the genuineness of the discourses of Elihu (Chs. 
 32-37), has been especially assailed, and the discourses 
 rejected by man}^ critics as spurious, interpolations. 
 But the grounds upon which these discourses have been 
 rejected as being spurious, are utterly insufficient. 
 These grounds are : — 1st. It is objected that Elihu is 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 103 
 
 not mentioned either in the Prologue or Epilogue. But 
 according to the design and argument of the Book as 
 stated above under IV he would not and ought not to be 
 so mentioned ; for he was not one of the false friends 
 arrayed to assail Job, and therefore is not mentioned 
 in the Prologue; and on the other hand being a true 
 friend and counselor of Job, and occupying the same 
 position as Job, he therefore would not be mentioned 
 in the Epilogue when the three false friends are sum- 
 moned to have judgment passed upon them. 2nd. It 
 is objected that the discourses of Elihu are attached 
 but loosely to the poem as a whole. On the contrary 
 we assert that the discourses of Elihu furnish the final 
 link that unites all the discourses. Among other 
 proofs this will become evident by comparing, e. tf. 
 33 : 23, 24 with 19 : 25-27 ; Ki : 10-22 and 9 : 32-35. 3rd. 
 It is objected that Elihu occupies substantially the 
 same position as the three friends, especially P^liphaz. 
 On the contrary we assert that Elihu occuj)ies substan- 
 tially the same position as Job, and directly the oppo- 
 site of that of the three friends; — the passages quoted 
 above in proof. Elihu's i)osition is indicated in 33: 23, 
 24 and corresponds in every particular with Job's posi- 
 tion as expressed in 9:32-35; 10:19-22; 19:25-27. 
 Elihu's conceptions of sin and of God are in every par- 
 ticular truer than those of the three friends. 4th. It 
 is objected that Elihu's style is prolix, labored. On the 
 contrary it is not as prolix and labored as that of the 
 three false friends, especially Bildad and Zophar. 
 
 In regard to the historical character of the Book, and 
 of Job its hero: — We regard the Book as being in the 
 main real historj^ True the discourses of Job, Elihu, 
 and the three friends may not have been uttered extem- 
 
lOJ: INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 pore in precisely tlieir present form and fulness. But 
 that the}- were uttered for tlie most part extempore, 
 and substantial!}^ in the same form, and with almost 
 the same fulness, — there is no good reason to doubt; 
 especial!}^ when we remember the histor^^ of those re- 
 markable literar}^ conventions and contests which in 
 somewhat later days were held in the same country 
 and by those who were descendants of Job. As to Job 
 himself, it is now generally conceded that he was a 
 real, historical cliaracter. The Book itself certainly 
 intends to convey that idea, for in regular historical 
 narrative form it gives us Job's name; it tells us where 
 Job lived, i e. in the land of Uz, in Xorthern Arabia; 
 it states the number of his children; it enumerates his 
 possessions; it describes his family and religious life; 
 it gives the names and nativity of the friends, etc. 
 And in addition to this the prophet Ezekiel and the 
 Apostle James testity to the real, historical character 
 of Job. To refer in such language as Ezekiel uses to a 
 fictitious, unhistorical character, and associate him 
 with men (Noah and Daniel) who had a real existencCj 
 is to say the least extremely unnatural. 
 
 VI. Authorship Date.— The authorship of Job is 
 not positively known. Among those mentioned as 
 probable authors are Job, Moses, Solomon, Jeremiah, 
 a post-exilian author, etc. The most probable of all 
 is Moses, considering the thoroughly extra-Palestinian 
 character of the Book on the one hand, and its thor- 
 oughly Arabian and Eg^^ptian character on the other 
 hand. In its structure as a poem ; in its use of a num- 
 ber of words and forms of words occurring nowhere 
 else; in its figures of speech; in its allusions to many 
 social and civil usages; in its reference to various 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 105 
 
 natural phenomena; and in many incidental allnsions 
 Avhich oftentimes constitute .ne surest indication, the 
 Book is intensely Arabian and Egyptian, and without 
 exception non-Palestinian. It is in the highest degree 
 improbable that a Post-Mosaic, Palestinian author 
 should have so thoroughly detached himself from 
 everj^thing Palestinian, and have become so thoroughly 
 native Arabian and Egyptian, without ever once be- 
 traying himself. Respecting the date of the composi- 
 tion of the Book, a similar difference of opinion pre- 
 vails. Ezekiel 14: 14, 20 implies that the Book of Job 
 had been written in his time. Certain passages in Jer- 
 emiah and Isaiah indicate a knowledge and use of the 
 Book of Job by these prophets. But critics strenu- 
 ously object to having the date of the composition of 
 the Book assigned to any date earlier than the time of 
 these X3rophets, or at the utmost earlier than the time 
 of Solomon. Their objections are mainly and strictly 
 only two, viz. — 1st. The Book exhibits such remarka- 
 ble literary finish, culture, power, excellence as to make 
 it impossible to assign it to a date earlier than the age 
 of Solomon, /. e. the mental endowments and capacities 
 of the human race were not sufficiently developed to 
 produce it before that time. 2nd. The theological 
 views set forth in the Book respecting life, God, sin, 
 deliveraiice, immortality, etc., are so clear, true and 
 full as to make it impossible to assign to the Book a date 
 earlier than Solomon or 1)00 B. C. ; inasmuch as before 
 that time the race was not sufficiently developed to ac- 
 cept and announce such perfect theological views as 
 articles of truth and faith. We deny the truth and 
 force of these two objections on these three grounds: 
 1st. They are rationalistic in nature. 2nd. They are 
 
106 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 untrue to fact. 3rd. Tlie^' charge the author of the Book 
 vvitli misrepresentation. They are rationalistic in na- 
 ture in that they limit the operations of God in revela- 
 tion and inspiration to what the human mind can itself 
 acquire by the unaided exercise of the human reason. 
 They are untrue to fact in that the Ancient Egyptians 
 before the times of Abraham held to a pure monotheistic 
 conception of God, announced their belief in immortal- 
 ity, and looked to a divine-human deliverer to deliver 
 from sin. They charge the author of the Book of Job 
 with misrepresentation in that, conceding Job to be a 
 patrijnchal character, they make the author put in the 
 moutli of Job the statement of views and beliefs not 
 possible to be entertained and expressed till centuries 
 after that, thus making the author guilty of anachronism. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— The Book of Job 
 may be divided and its contents indicated as follows: — 
 
 I. Chs. 1, 2. The Prologue. Written in prose. 
 The author's historical statement setting forth the oc- 
 casion and design of the Book, and consisting of — 
 
 1. Ch. 1 : 1-5. Statement as to Job, — his countr\^^ 
 character, possessions, religious life. 
 
 2. Ch. 1:6-22. First meeting of the Celestial Coun- 
 cil, and fii'st trial of Job. 
 
 3. Ch. 2. Second meeting of the Celestial Council,, 
 second trial of Job and gathering of Job's false friends. 
 
 II. Chs. 3-31. Debate. Written in poetry. Con- 
 tains the debate between Job and his three false 
 friends, Eliphaz, Bildad and Zophar. Ch. 3 is Job's 
 cry, introductory to this debate, which then proceeds 
 as follows:— 
 
 1. Chs. 4-14. First debate; consisting of — 
 
 a. Chs. 4, o. Argument of Elipiiaz. God is good. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 107 
 
 No man so good as to be exempt from suffering. The 
 ungodly resent suffering. Let Job submit. 
 
 b. Clis. 6, 7. Reply of Job. Job's sufferings are 
 exceptional, but his guilt is not exceptional; hence 
 the argument of Eliphaz does not meet and satisfy his 
 case. 
 
 c. Ch. 8. Argument of Bildad. God is not un- 
 just. Job greatly punished must have greatly sinned. 
 Let him seek God for mercy. 
 
 f/. Chs. 9, 10. Reply of Job. True God is not un- 
 just; still injustice prevails on the earth, and the in- 
 nocent are involved with the guilty. Therefore there 
 must be another cause for suffering. 
 
 e. Ch. 11. Argument of Zophar. God detects sin 
 where man is unconscious of it. So prominently Job; 
 therefore let him forsake sin, and seek mercy. 
 
 /. Chs. 12-14. Reply of Job. lie resents Zophar's 
 assumption to an insight of God's ways. His con- 
 science gives him courage, and God must extend hope. 
 
 2. Chs. 15-21. Second debate. Consisting of — 
 
 a. Ch. 15. Argument of Elii)haz. Job assumes 
 superior wisdom. Evil does not go unchecked and 
 unpunished, as a tormenting conscience and disas- 
 trous end prove. 
 
 h. Chs. 16, 17. Reply of Job. But he (Job) is in- 
 nocent, and yet afflicted, persecuted. That he is inno- 
 cent he has in heaven a Witness who will attest and 
 vindicate it. 
 
 c. Ch. 18. Argument of Bildad. Vexed at Job, 
 and his protestations of innocence, when the miserj^ he 
 has, and the dishonor that awaits him, aigue the con- 
 trary. 
 
 d. Ch. 19. Reply of Job. Bildad's argument false. 
 
108 INTRODUCTION OUVLINES. 
 
 and application cruel. Hence appeals for pity. At 
 any rate his vindicator, Redeemer liveth who will 
 acquit, and reveal himself. 
 
 e. Ch. 20. Argument of Zophar. He is unmoved 
 by Job's language. Declares Job perverse. Job's 
 brief prosperit}', and present destruction a proof he is 
 wicked. 
 
 f. Ch. 21. Reply of Job. Facts contradict Zophar's 
 argument. The wicked prosper and die in peace hence 
 suffering has another cause and reason for it. 
 
 3. C1is. 22-28. Third debate. Consisting of— 
 a. Ch. 22. Argument of Eliphaz. God punishes 
 only for impiety, sin. Eliphaz unscrupulously charges 
 Job with inhumanity, avarice, abuse of power. Let 
 Job repent. 
 
 h. Chs. 23, 24. Reply of Job. Makes no direct re- 
 ply to the false accusations of Elij)haz, but discourses 
 upon the mysteries of God's providence. 
 
 c. Ch. 25. Argument of Bildad. Protests against 
 Job's declaration of his innocence. (4od is great and 
 great is his majesty. 
 
 d. Ch. 2G. Reply of Job. True God is great as his 
 works show, but the question at issue turns not on 
 God's greatness, but on his justice. 
 
 e. Chs. 27, 28. Zophar failing to aijpear Job utters 
 his final words to the three friends. God is great, wise, 
 good, and requires holiness of life. 
 
 f. Chs. 2{)-31. Job's final survej' of his whole case, 
 i. e. the conclusion or summing up of the debate. 
 
 III. Chs. 32-37. Discourse of P]lihu. Consisting of — 
 a. Ch. 32:1-5. Introduction of Elihu by the author. 
 h. Ch. 32 : 6-22. Elihu's introduction to his dis- 
 course. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 109 
 
 c. Chs. 3:3-37. Elibu's discourse. (4od not Job's 
 enemy. God does not afflict unjustly, but in affliction 
 has gracious, disciplinary designs. 
 
 lY. Chs. 38 : 1-42 : (3. Jehovah's reply to Job. Con- 
 sisting of — 
 
 a. Chs. 38: 1-40: 2. First part of Jehovah's reply. 
 
 h. Ch. 40: 3-5. Job's humble confession of unworthi- 
 ness. 
 
 c. Chs. 40:G-41:34. Second part of Jehovah's 
 reply. 
 
 d. Ch. 42:1-6. Job's further confession of God's 
 greatness, and his own unworthiness. 
 
 V. Ch. 42:7-17. Epilogue. Concluding historical 
 statement by the author setting forth the end of Job's 
 trials; the condemnation of Eliphaz, Bildad and 
 Zophar; the vindication and commendation of Job; 
 the restoration of Job to prosperity^ twofold as great as 
 that which he enjo^'ed before; and Job's long life and 
 death. 
 
 VIII. Doctrine.— 1. Job's conception of God is pure, 
 monotheistic, Biblical. 
 
 2. As to man he is a sinner who must both have a 
 divine righteousness imijuted to him, and himself work 
 righteousness. 
 
 3. Atonement (kafar), Redemption (pada), and 
 Ransoming, Restoring {gcCal)^ are clearly defined in 
 their relations, nature and working. 
 
 4. The doctrines of resurrection and immortality are 
 clearly exj)ressed as, e. y. 14 : 14; 19: 20, etc. 
 
 5. In its practical bearing the key-word of the Book 
 is Endurance (James 5: 11); — the perseverance of the 
 godly based on preservation hy God. 
 
 IX. Messianic— While there is no direct jjersonal 
 
110 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 reference to the Messiah, still there is a strong Messi- 
 anic element in Job. Jehovah is the Redeemer. The 
 great offices and works of the Redeemer are strongly 
 brought out in the Messianic sections 9 : 32-35 ; 16:19- 
 22; 19:25-27; 33:23, 24. 
 
 THE PSALMS. 
 
 I. l!fa.nie.—Tehillim = Praises or Praise Songs. So 
 called as setting forth the main object of the Book, vis. 
 the worship of God. The title Psalms is derived from 
 the LXX rendering of the Hebrew name. 
 
 II. Position.— The Book of Psalms is included in the 
 Hagiographa, the third great division of the Hebrew 
 Bible. In this division the Psalms have commonly oc- 
 cupied the first place, and hence we find the entire Old 
 Testament summed up under the three names of the 
 Law, the Prophets, and the Psalms. Lu. 24:44. 
 
 III. Divisions.— In the Hebrew Bible, as in the R. 
 v., the Psalter is divided into five Books, viz. 1. Psas. 
 1-41. 2. Psas. 42-72. 3. Psas. 73-89. 4. Psas. 90- 
 106. 5. Psas. 107-150. This division into Books is 
 older than the LXX translation. The end of each of 
 these five Books is marked by a doxologj^ The 150th 
 Psalm constitutes the doxology of the fifth Book. 
 
 IV. Collections.— The Psalms cover a period extend- 
 ing from Moses to post-exilic times. The Psalter is not 
 the work of a single compiler. Originally a number of 
 smaller collections existed independently, which were 
 afterwards united in one, the completed Book being 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. Ill 
 
 thus gradually formed out of preexisting smaller col- 
 lections. It is reasonable to suppose that the first, 
 original collection of Psalms consisted mainly of those 
 Psalms, mostly David's, now classed as Book I. This 
 collection was probably made by David's son and suc- 
 cessor Solomon. The next collection was probably 
 not completed till the time of Hezekiah. This collec- 
 tion probably consisted in the main of those Psalms of 
 David, Asaph, and the sons of Korah, composing Books 
 II, III. This collection was probably made b}^ those 
 " men of Hezekiah " to whom we owe the preservation 
 of many proverbs of Solomon not included in the first 
 collection of his proverbs. (Prov. 25:1.) This also 
 agrees with 2 Chr. 29 : 30. The third and last collec- 
 tion was made in exilian or post-exilian times; no 
 further additions after Hezekiah having been made to 
 the Psalter till the times of Ezra and Nehemiah, when 
 it was enriched bj' a large number of songs written 
 during and after the exile. To this period are due, 
 in the main, the Psalms composing Books IV, V. 
 With these, however, were incorporated certain Psalms 
 belonging to earlier times. Thus Book IV opens with 
 a Psalm or Prayer ascribed to Moses. And in these 
 Books IV, V are seventeen psalms ascribed to David, 
 some evidently by mistake, but others again unques- 
 tionably David's, as e. g. Psa. 110. Hence it appears 
 that while a general chronological order has been ob- 
 served in the order of the Psalms, still sometimes the 
 chronological order has been displaced by an order 
 based on subject-matter. 
 
 V. Titles or Inscriptions.— Most of the Psalms are 
 provided with titles or inscriptions, all except thirty- 
 four. Of the antiquity of these titles there can be no 
 
11^ INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 question inasmuch as they are found in the LXX. As 
 to the authority of these titles, while there is ground 
 to question their accuracy in some particulars still they 
 are in the main trustworthy. These titles or inscrip- 
 tions of the Psalms are chiefly of three kinds, viz. : 
 
 1. Those which define their musical or liturgical 
 character. 
 
 2. Those which assign them to particular authors. 
 
 3. Those which designate the particular circum- 
 stances under which a Psalm was composed. 
 
 Any of these may occur separately, or be combined 
 to form one title. A brief consideration of them fol- 
 lows. 
 
 VI. Titles of Character.— That is, those Psalms to 
 which notices of a liturgical or musical character are 
 prefixed. Such notices are — 
 
 1. Lanuiasoynlt — " For the Precentor." Probably 
 designates the leader of the choir who was to set it to 
 music, and superintend its practice. Occurs fifty-five 
 times. 
 
 2. Lelammed — " For teaching." Probably a Psalm 
 to be taught to or by the Levites. Psa. 60. 
 
 3. Lehazkeer — " To bring to remembrance." Prob- 
 ably memorializing Jehovah's goodness. Psas. 38, 70. 
 
 4. Letodah — "For thanksgiving." Probably with 
 the thank-offering. Psa. 100. 
 
 5. Mizmor — "A Psalm." A general name for 
 psalm., but implying instrumental ac( paniment. 
 
 6. Sheer — "A Song." Used separately, and in con- 
 junction with mizmor. A Psalm in celebration. 
 
 7. Miclitarn — " Golden." A song of deep import. 
 
 8. Maskeel—A " skillful strain, "or " skillfully con- 
 structed son'4." 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 113 
 
 0. SJiiggayoii — An "instrument," a "melody," a 
 " lament," or a " dithyrambic ode." 
 
 10. 7'e/uZ/a/i—" A hymn of praise." For occasions 
 of joy, triumph, thanksgiving. 
 
 11. Tefillah—'' A Prayer." So a whole collection of 
 David's songs. Psa. 72:20. 
 
 12. Slieer Yededotli — " A song of loves"; where the 
 subject is love. Psa. 45. 
 
 13. Sheer hammaaloth — "Song of accents." Pil- 
 grim festival songs, going up to Jerusalem. 
 
 14. Particular instruments by which the Psalm was 
 to be accompanied are hannaheloth—'^ flutes," and 
 neginotli — " stringed instruments." 
 
 15. Particular measures are alamoth, slieinenitli, get- 
 tifli, yedutun. 
 
 16. Particular melodies are the " Hind of the Dawn," 
 "The Dove," "The Lily of the Testimony," etr>. 
 
 17. Selali. Probably a pause, or call for renewed 
 attention. 
 
 VII. Authorship Titles.— The authors of the Psalms 
 according to their titles are as follows : — 
 
 1. Moses. One Psalm, the 90th. 
 
 2. David. Seventy-three Psalms. 
 
 3. Solomon. Two Psalms, 72nd and 127th. 
 
 4. The Sons ot Korah. Eleven Psalms, viz. 42-49, 
 84, 85, 87. Korah was the grandson of Kohath, son 
 of Levi. The Korahites or " Sons of Korah " were an 
 important branch of the singers in the Kohathite 
 division in the temple service. 1 Chr. 5:33; 2 Chr. 
 20:19. 
 
 5. Heman. One of the "Sons of Korah." One 
 Psa., 88. 
 
 [8] 
 
114 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 6. Asaph. Twelve Psalms, viz. 50, 73-83. 
 
 7. Ethan the Ezrahite. One Psalm, the 89th. 
 Asaph, Heman, Ethan are names of the three chief 
 
 singers of David. 
 
 The remainder of the Psalms, about a third, are 
 therefore anonymous. 
 
 VIII. Titles of Occasion.— The titles sometimes con- 
 tain historical notices, i. e. notices purporting to give 
 an account of the particular occasion for which a 
 Psalm was composed. Some of these notices are trust- 
 worth}^, others are not. They occur only in the 
 Psalms of David, and refer to events in his life. Thus 
 with Psa. 3 compare 2 Sam. Chs. 15-18. Psa. 7 
 comp. 1 Sam. Chs. 24-26. Psa. 18 comp. 2 Sam. Ch. 
 22. Psa. 34 comp. 1 Sam. 21:1-15. Psa. 51 comp. 
 2 Sam. Ch. 12. Psa. 52 comp. 1 Sam. Ch. 22. Psa. 
 54 comp. 1 Sam. 23:19-28. Psa. 56 comp. 1 Sam. 
 21:1-15. Psa. 57 comp. 1 Sam. 22:1-24. Psa. 59 
 comp. 1 Sam. 19:11-18. Psa. 60 comp. 2 Sam. 8:1- 
 13. Psa. 63 comp. 1 Sam. 22:3-5. Psa. 142 comp. 
 1 Sam. 22:1, 2; 2 Chr. 11:15-19, etc. The historical 
 occasion of other Psalms, not noticed in the titles, 
 might be assigned with a considerable degree of prob- 
 ability. 
 
 IX. Classifications. —The Psalms are variously 
 classified upon the basis of their subject matter or 
 because of certain peculiar literary features. Thus we 
 have, — 
 
 1. Psalms consisting of meditations on different as- 
 pects of God's providence as manifested in creation, 
 history, etc. Such are Psalms 8, 19, 29, 33, 36, 65, 
 103, 104, 107, etc. 
 
 2. Psalms consisting of reflections upon God's moral 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 115 
 
 government of the world, and on the character and 
 conduct that is pleasing to him ; hence these Psalms 
 are of a didactic character. Such are Psalms 1, 15, 32, 
 34, 37, 49, 73, 75, 77, 90, 92, 112, etc. 
 
 3. Psalms expressive of faith, resignation, joy in 
 God's law and God's presence. Such are Psalms 11, 
 16, 23, 26, 27, 42, 62, 63, 84, 91, 119, 121, 127, 128, 
 130, etc. 
 
 4. Psalms having a more distinct reference to the 
 circumstances of the Psalmist, as petitions for help in 
 illness, persecution, or other trouble, for forgiveness of 
 sins, besides many of personal thanksgiving. In these 
 the Psalmist sometimes includes his companions or co- 
 religionists. Such are Psalms 3-7, 12, 13, 17, 22, 30, 
 40, 116, etc. 
 
 5. National Psalms. That is, Psalms consisting of 
 complaints of national oppression or disaster; and 
 again expressions of thanksgivings for mercies received 
 or promised; and still again prayers for the welfare of 
 Jerusalem, and the coming glor}^ of Zion as the 
 metropolis of the world. Such are Psalms 14, 44, 46, 
 47, 48, 60, 66, 68, 76, 79, 87, 118, 122, 124, 129, 144, 
 etc. 
 
 6. Historical Psalms. That is. Psalms consisting of 
 a review of the national histor}^ with a reference to the 
 lessons deducible from it. Such are Psalms 78, 81, 
 105, 106, 114. 
 
 7. Royal Psalms. That is. Psalms relating to the 
 king or to the Davidic dynast}^, and containing 
 thanksgivings, wishes, promises, supplications, max- 
 ims, etc. These Psalms frequently have a Messianic 
 import. See below. Such royal Psalms are 2, 18, 20, 
 21, 45, 72, 89, 101, 110, 132. 
 
116 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 8. Penitential Psalms. So called on account of their 
 being expressions of profound penitence for sin. 
 These Psalms are seven in number, viz. 6, 32, 38, 51, 
 102, 130, 143. 
 
 9. Imprecatory Psalms. That is, those Psalms which 
 seem to invoke terrible judgments upon the enemies 
 of God and his people. Such Psalms more particularly 
 are 35, 69, 109, 137, and a few other isolated passages. 
 The usage of both the imxjeratwe and imperfect is to 
 be noted in the discussion of these imprecatory passa- 
 ages. Compare also Rev. Ch. 18. 
 
 10. Hallelujah Psalms. Psalms beginning with 
 "Hallelujah" are so called. They are Psalms 106, 
 111, 112, 113, 117, 135, 146-150. 
 
 11. Hodu Psalms, or Thanksgiving Psalms. These 
 are so called because they begin with the word Hodu = 
 Give thanks. They are Psalms 105, 107, 118, 136. 
 
 12. The Hallel. Psalms 113-118 are so called as 
 being those Psalms that are chanted at the three great 
 feasts, at the feast of the dedication, and at the new 
 moons In the family celebration of the Passover 
 night Psalms 113, 114 are sung before the meal, before 
 the emptying of the second festal cup, while Psalms 
 115-118 were sung after the meal, after the filling uf 
 the fourth cup, to which, after the institution of the 
 Lord's Supper, which was connected with the fourth 
 festal cup Math. 26: 30, Mk. 14: 26 probably refer. 
 
 13. Alphabetical Psalms. That is, those Psalms in 
 which successive verses, half verses, or groups of 
 verses begin with the successive letters of the Hebrew 
 alphabet. The alphabetical arrangement is not fully 
 carried out i»^ t^revy instance. Such alphabetical 
 Psalms are 9, 10, 25, 34, 37, 111, 112, 119, 145. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 117 
 
 For Messianic Psalms see below. 
 
 IX. Tlieolog-y.— Hebrew poetry is the poetrj^ of 
 friendship and fellowship between God and man. It is 
 preeminently so with the Psalms. In them God mani- 
 fests himself and speaks through nature, through his- 
 tory, through personal experience to Israel, to the 
 Israelite. And in them the true Israelite, the soul, 
 finds its completest expression, holds blessed communion 
 with God to whom it discloses all its emotions, desires, 
 hopes, fears. The God of the Psalms is very near, 
 and very real, and communion with him most spiritual 
 and intimate. The Law of God is also highly magni- 
 fied in the Psalms. As contrasted with its merely 
 ceremonial enactments, there is a remarkable recog- 
 nition of the higher and more spiritual requirements of 
 the Law, and an intense affection expressed for it. 
 The confession and remission of sins, purity in heart 
 and holiness of life, the blessedness of righteousness 
 here and hereafter, are matters repeatedly and boldly 
 inculcated. The hope of a future life glorifies not a 
 few Psalm utterances. 
 
 X. Messianic— The Messianic hope shines strongly 
 in the Psalms. This Messianic element is for the most 
 part typical. David and Solomon, the Priest and 
 Psalmist, ap]3ear therein as tj^pes of the Messiah, and 
 of the Messiah in his threefold office of Prophet, Priest 
 and King. It is to be remembered, however, that in 
 the Psalms this Messiah, this Anointed One in whom 
 are bound up the redemption of the world and 
 the glorifying of Israel, is not in the first instance, 
 or distinctly, Christ The Messiah, the Anointed 
 of God, is David, or Solomon, till both the one and the 
 other fail to fulfil the hopes of men's hearts. But the 
 
118 
 
 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Advent to whicli Israel looks forward is the Advent of 
 Jehovah. He is Israel's true King. It is his com- 
 ing which is to be Israel's redemption and glory. The 
 Messianic Psalms are the following: — 
 
 Psalm 2. The Divine and Conquering King. 
 
 Psalm 16. Jehovah the all, in all, and after all. 
 
 Psalm 22. The Typical Sufferer. 
 
 Psalm 40. The Offerer and the Offering. 
 
 Psalm 45. The Marriage of the King. 
 
 Psalm 69. God's Suffering One. 
 
 Psalm 72. God's Prince, and his Dominion of Peace. 
 
 Psalm 85. The Righteous Restoration and Reign. 
 
 Psalm 87. Zion, — Mountain of God, Metropolis of 
 Earth. 
 
 Psalm 102. The Suffering Soul, and Suffering City. 
 
 Psalm 110. Tlie Priest-King. 
 
 Psalm 118. Praise Jehovah's Loving Kindness. 
 
 THE PROVERBS. 
 
 I. ^ame.—Mishlay = Proverbs. The Book is so 
 called from the nature of its contents. The mashal or 
 proverb, coming from the verb to he like, denotes a 
 representation, i. e. a statement not relating solely to 
 a single fact, but standing for or representing other 
 similar facts. 
 
 The statement may be deducted from a particular 
 instance, but applicable to other like instances, or it 
 ma}^ be a generalization from experience. The proverb 
 concerns itself with observations relative to human life 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 110 
 
 and character, and, by striking comparisons and con- 
 trasts, expresses the trnth in a pithy, prei^nant manner. 
 
 II. Position.— One of the poetical Books of the Old 
 Testament. Stands in the Hagiographa, or tliird di- 
 vision of the Hebrew Bible. Is one of the Books in- 
 clnded in the Chokhmah — or Wisdom Literature of the 
 Hebrews. See under Job. 
 
 III. Desig-n.— The Design of the Book is clearly 
 stated in 1 : 2-4. 
 
 IV. Divisions and Contents. These, in brief, are 
 as follows: — 
 
 1. Chs. 1-9. This first section gives a masterly de- 
 scription of wisdom, treats of the blessings of wisdom, 
 and warns against various dangers and temptations, 
 especially unchastity. 
 
 2. Chs. 10: 1-22 : 16. This second section which has 
 the superscription, "The Proverbs of Solomon," con- 
 tains man}^ master sentences bearing upon practical 
 life, moral and religious precepts, and prudential 
 maxims. Especially emphasized are, — Jehovah's sov- 
 ereignty; the blessings that How from fearing Him; 
 righteousness more acceptable than sacrifice with Him; 
 the contrasted aims and ends of the wise and the fool ; 
 the right use of the lips or tongue ; parental authority ; 
 kingly justice, righteousness, wisdom, mercy, faithful- 
 ness, and amenableness to divine guidance. 
 
 3. Chs. 22: 17-24: 34. In this section the method of 
 a more or less consecutive argument is resumed, as in 
 the first section. The proverbs here constitute a body 
 of maxims interwoven, addressed with a practical aim. 
 
 4. Chs. 25-29. This section contains, as stated in 
 the superscription, the " Proverbs of Solomon which 
 the men of Hezekiah, king of Judah, copied out." 
 
120 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 On this superscription, see below. The proverbs of 
 this sectio^^ do not differ material Ij^ in their character 
 from the foregoing. 
 
 5. Chs. 30, 31. Ch. 30 is ascribed to Agur the son 
 of Jakeh. Neither Agur nor Jakeh is named else- 
 where. The Ch. is also described as an " oracle," a 
 term usually ajjplied to prophetic utterances. The 
 proverbs of this chapter consist of moral and philosoph- 
 ical reflections. Ch. 31 contains the " Words of King 
 Lemuel, the proverbs which his mother taught him." 
 The proverbs enjoin temperance, justice, etc. 
 
 v. Composition:— Gemdneness, Authorslivp. The 
 second division of the Book, Chs. 10:1-22:10, begins 
 with the superscription " The Proverbs of Solomon." 
 This division is regarded as constituting the oldest col- 
 lection of proverbs, and is generall}^ conceded to have 
 proceeded from Solomon. The section, Chs. 22:17- 
 24:34, is evidently intended to go with the preceding 
 division, as belonging to Solomon; nor should the last 
 twelve verses, 24 : 23-34, be excluded, . and treated as 
 the product of several wise men ; an unsuitable inter- 
 pretation of 24 : 23. The division Chs. 25-29 bears the 
 superscription "These are also proverbs of Solo- 
 mon, which the men of Hezekiah, king of Judah, 
 copied out." These proverbs were not floating about, 
 and by common consent attributed to Solomon, for the 
 word rendered " copied out " will not bear that con- 
 struction. The word can only signify that these men 
 of Hezekiah "copied out," i. e. transferred, trans- 
 scribed from one book into another, proverbs that were 
 correctly assigned to Solomon. The flrst division, Chs. 
 1-9, is also by the superscription ascribed to Solomon. 
 It is highly improbable that the flrst nine chapters of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 121 
 
 the Book should have been written by the collector of 
 the'proverbs, or b}' an editor, instead of by Solomon, 
 ^nd that the name of Solomon should be placed 
 at the head of them when the collector or editor him- 
 self in that case wrote about one-third of the Avhole. 
 Moreover the Book shows throughout a carefully ex- 
 ecuted intention on the part of the author to attribute 
 the proverbs to their proper authors, so much so that 
 the last two chapters in the collection are with a clear 
 discrimination attributed respectively to Agur one and 
 to King Lemuel one. Once more, certain peculiarities 
 of language characterize all the proverbs attributed to 
 Solomon, which further confirms the unit^^ of the au- 
 thorship of Chs. 1-29, and ascribes that authorship to 
 Solomon. We also read in 1 Ki, 4: 32 of Solomon that 
 *'He spake three thousand proverbs: and his songs 
 were a thousand and five." 
 
 VI. Doctrine.— The Book of Proverbs is the Old 
 Testament's special treatise on Ethics, the principal 
 source of the Old Teatament Ethics. As in the system 
 of Ethics virtue and duty must ever occupy the princi- 
 pal place, so in the Book of Proverbs the special doc- 
 trine is that of virtue and duty, rectitude and law. 
 
 ECCLESIASTES. 
 
 I. Name.— ivo/ie/e//^ = One addressing a public as- 
 sembly, a preacher; whence LXX, Vulgate, A. V., 
 EccJesiastes = a preacher. 
 
 II. Position.— This Book is included in the Hagio- 
 
122 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 graplia, and forms a part of the Chol-lnnah—ov Wis- 
 dom Literature of the Hebrews. See under Job. 
 
 III. Design.— The Book discloses, in progress, a 
 mental battle between old faiths and new doubts; be- 
 tween divine providence and retribution on the 
 one hand, and human doubt, irresponsibility and 
 despair on the other hand. It both summons to enjoy- 
 ment, and is intensely sad; it is seemingly skeptical at 
 times, and at other times as thoroughly convinced of 
 the ti'uth of the divine faith it inculcates. On the 
 one hand it is a discourse upon the unsatisfactory nature 
 of all things human, with a recommendation to enjoy 
 the blessings of life, while on the other hand it urgently 
 insists upon the importance of fearing God and keeping 
 his commandments. The Book cannot be charged with 
 any skeptical or Sadducean tendency, for the whole 
 Book must be interpreted in the light of its closing 
 utterance, the summary of the discourse,—" Fear God, 
 and keep his comnmndments; for this is the whole duty 
 of man." 
 
 IV. Authorship— Date.— The canonicity and unity 
 of the Book of Ecclesiastes have seldom been ques- 
 tioned. On the other hand the authorship and date 
 have been seriously questioned. Two principal views 
 obtain : — 
 
 1. Until about 1645 the view commonly held was 
 that Solomon was the author of Ecclesiastes. Prof. 
 Douglas in his additions to Keil's Introduction makes 
 a strong but unsuccessful effort to show that the Book 
 proceeded from Solomon. He argues — 
 
 a. That whereas no distinction has yet been estab- 
 lished between the writer and an imaginary speaker 
 whom he introduces there are many things throughout 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 123 
 
 the Book which suit Solomon adiniral)]3% and which 
 come in most naturally and incidentally. 
 
 h. Much weight oui>ht to be attached to the un- 
 broken chain of tradition in both the Jewish and 
 C'hristian Church; and this in spite of the obscurity 
 hauiiiiiy over the title Koheleth, which is generally ren- 
 dered 'Mhe Preacher," but which has also been inter- 
 l)rete(l as meaning " Preaching [Wisdom]." 
 
 c. 'J'lie predominant ideas in the Book are connected 
 witli wisdom and the fear of God, and both of these in 
 their practical applications; and it is notorious that 
 these are the features of that ideal character which 
 Solomon set before himself, and which predominates 
 in Proverl)s. 
 
 (7. Assigning to the Book of Ecclesiastes so recent 
 a date brings with it difficulties or improbabilities 
 peculiar to itself. The argument at this point is weak 
 and illogical. 
 
 e. The single argument in favor of a later origin is 
 the Aramaic character of the language, which Prof. 
 Douglas attempts to evade by changing the j^Zace, in 
 which it is conceived the Book was to be read, and not 
 the time at which the composition of the Book is dated. 
 
 2. Since 1G45 the constantly increasing and now pre- 
 vailing view is that the author of Ecclesiastes is not 
 Solomon but a post-exilic writer, and that this anony- 
 mous, post-exilic author composed the Book of Eccles- 
 iastes between the time of Malachi, who lived in the time 
 of Nehemiah's second visit to Jerusalem, probably 
 under Darius Nothus (423-405 B. C), and the apocra-.,. 
 phal Book of Wisdom which at the earliest was written 
 under Ptolemy Physkon (145-117 B. C). Nearly if 
 not quite all of the best authorities of recent times 
 
124 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 ascribe tlie Book of Ecclesiastes to an anonymous post- 
 exilic author. Thus e. (J. Grotius, Heno-stenberg, Luther, 
 Stuart, Evvald, Keil, Delitzsch, Lange, Plumptre, 
 Wright, Cheyne, Ginsburg, Bleek, Harman, et al. 
 Some reasons, in brief, upon which this conclusion is 
 based are as follows : — 
 
 a. The argument from language. Bernstein is right 
 in saying that the histor}^ of the Hebrew language and 
 literature is certainly divided into two epochs by the 
 Babylonian exile, and that the Book of Koheleth 
 (Ecclesiastes) bears the stamp of the post-exilic form 
 of the language. Delitzsch follows, saying that if the 
 Book Koheleth were of old Solomonic origin then there 
 is no history of the Hebrew language. Delitzsch 
 enumerates over a hundred different words and forms 
 peculiar to the Book of Ecclesiastes, and only found in 
 the most recent Books of the Old Testament, partlj^ 
 only in the Chaldee portions of these, and in general 
 use in the Aramaic, so that beyond all doubt we have 
 in this Book a product of the post-exilian, and, at the 
 earliest of the time of Ezra-Nehemiah. There is a 
 slight connection with the language of Koheleth and 
 the old language, but at the same time it is in full 
 accord with the new Hebrew which we meet with in the 
 Mishna, etc. Thus, further, some of the weak verbs 
 interchange their forms as in the Mishna and the later 
 language. The modal forms of the old language are 
 also disappearing in this Book. There is also a pecu- 
 liar use of the personal pronoun in connection with the 
 verbal form. And again the use of the demonstrative 
 pronoun Zeh bears a Mishnic stamp. 
 
 h. That the Book was not composed by Solomon is 
 indicated bv the circumstance that he is not called 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 125 
 
 Solomon, nor Jedidiah (2 Sam. 12:25) throiiglioiit the 
 entire Book, but is designated by a hitherto unheard 
 of name, which, by its form, shows that it belongs, a 
 the earliest, to the Ezra-Xehemiah age. 
 
 c. The very title of the Book acknowledges that it 
 was not written by Solomon himself, but by a Jewish 
 thinker of a much later age, who sought to conceive of 
 himself as in Solomon's position and clothed his own 
 life experiences in Solomonic confessions. Solomon is 
 called "King of Israel," "King over Israel," who 
 " reigued in Jerusalem over Israel," but the title 
 "King in Jerusalem," is peculiar to the title of this 
 Book. Moreover in 1 : 12 the Preacher says "I was" 
 or " have been king," which in view of following re- 
 trospective perfects could not be applied to Solomon. 
 Solomon, even in his advanced age, could not say in 
 respect to the period of his life as ruler, "I have been 
 king," for he was certainly always so during the forty 
 years of his reign, and on to the last moments of his 
 life. 
 
 d. The epilogue of the Book furnishes an argument 
 in favor of the late comjDosition of the Book in that it 
 is composed in a style of Hebrew approaching that 
 used in the Mishna, yet at an earlier date than the 
 Mishna. 
 
 e. The social and political allusions are utterly out of 
 harmonj^ with the condi'Jon of the Jewish state in the 
 Solomonic period. The historical Solomon could 
 scarcely have written such a satire upon his own ad- 
 ministration as is implied, e. g. 3:16; 4:1; 5:8. The 
 author of the Book shows no kingly or national feel- 
 ing. He lives in a period of political servitude, void 
 of all patriotism. His writings depict the depression 
 
126 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 produced by the corruption of an Oriental despotism, 
 with its capriciousness, injustice, revolutions, espion- 
 age, and hopelessness of reform. Thus 3:16; 4:1; 
 5:8; 8:9; 10:5, 7, 20. Evidently the writer lived 
 when the Jews had lost their national independence 
 and formed but a province of the Persian empire, or 
 later. The age of the author, the social status of his 
 times was a far gloomier one than is reflected in any 
 part of the Book of Proverbs. Unlike the prophets 
 and preachers preceding him he is not animated by 
 religious zeal and hope, he scarcely looks beyond t;he 
 present, he is not uplifted by the thought of Israel's 
 Divine election. He views human life in its sober, 
 sombre reality. He views his own life, it is full of dis- 
 appointments. He views the lives of others and finds 
 no enthusiasm, energy or serious endeavor. Hence 
 he repeatedly passes his unrelenting sentence of " All 
 is vanit5^" In short, the time in which the writer 
 lived was one of public misgovernment, dynastic op- 
 pression and social engulfment. This certainl}^ does 
 not suit the Solomonic period. 
 
 /. In the Proverbs of Solomon Jehovah is the usual 
 name for the divine Being; this word never occurs in 
 Ecclesiastes, but instead thereof Eloheem (God) which 
 is used forty times. 
 
 g. It is evident from 5 : 1 that when the Book was 
 written the Jewish temple had been alread}^ rebuilt ; 
 for the author gives advice about going to the house 
 of God. 
 
 h. In 1 : 16 and 2:7,9 the writer speaks as if he had 
 behi'nd him a long line of kings over the whole of 
 Israel and Judah. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 127 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents.— The preacher opens 
 his discourse with the exclamation " Vanity of vani- 
 ties," and then proceeding 
 
 1. Ch. 1:1-11. Describes the incessant changes in 
 human affairs. 
 
 2. Chs. 1:12-2:26. The preacher's position and 
 fruitless search for happiness. 
 
 3. Ch. 3. Declares there is an appointed time for 
 everything; inculcates doing good, and enjoying the 
 results of one's toil; while asserting that men and 
 beasts are subject to like calamities. 
 
 4. Ch. 4. Discourses on the miseries of man, and 
 the benefits of society. 
 
 5. Ch. 5. Religious precepts, the vanity of riches, 
 carnal enjoyments. 
 
 6. Ch. 6. The miseries of man, and an example in 
 illustration. 
 
 7. Ch. 7. Proverbs and moral precepts inculcating 
 moderation, and the sometimes seeming incongruity 
 between the portions of the righteous and the wicked. 
 
 8. Ch. S. "It shall be well with them that fear 
 God," and not well with the wicked, notwithstanding 
 seming contradictions. 
 
 9. Ch. 9. The doctrine of all things come alike to 
 all. 
 
 10. Chs. 10-12. Proverbs, precepts and exhorta- 
 tions to remember and fear God, and keep his com- 
 mandments. 
 
 VI. Doctrine and Messianic— Notwithstanding the 
 seeming pessimistic tone of his Book, the author is 
 never tempted to abandon his theistic faith. Not- 
 withstanding his recommendations to enjoy the fruit 
 of one's labors in this world, and his despairing view 
 
128 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 of life, still he strongly emphasizes the responsibility 
 of man, and accountability to God. 
 
 The Messianic element in the Book is of a negative 
 character. The meaning of the Book, in respect to 
 the histor}^ of redemption, consists in the actual proof 
 that humanity, in order to its being set free from its 
 unhappiness, must have another, a divine emanci- 
 pator. 
 
 THE SONG OF SONCS. 
 
 I. ^aine,— Sheer hashshereem ^^ The Song of Songs. 
 The name is derived from the opening words of the 
 Book, The grammatical form of the name (the com- 
 bination of a noun in the singular with a dependent 
 plural), is a Hebrew mode of expressing uie super- 
 lative. The name therefore sets forth the subject- 
 matter of this Book as constituting the most excellent 
 Song, the Song surpassing all other songs. 
 
 II. Position.— The Song is included in the Hagio- 
 grapha. It also forms the first of the five Megilloth, or 
 Rolls that are read publiciy at certain sacred seasons 
 in the synagogues. The Song of Songs was read at the 
 Passover. The other four Books of the Megilloth are 
 Ruth, Lamentations, Ecclesiastes, Esther. 
 
 III. Tlieine.— A song sung in Jerusalem at the cele- 
 bration of the marria[»e of Solomon and Shulamite, and 
 of typical import. 
 
 IV. Unity.— The Book is a unit, i. e. a single con- 
 nected Song and not composed of several distinct songs. 
 This is evident from the following considerations: — 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 129 
 
 1. The name declares it to be a single poem or song. 
 Thus the singular noun sheer=a song. If it had 
 been intended to designate a song composed of a num- 
 ber of songs, the grammatical construction must have 
 been different. 
 
 2. The name of Solomon which appears in the title, 
 1:1, or in exchange for it the designation of "the 
 king," appears at different points throughout the 
 poem, thus uniting the whole. 
 
 3. The consistency^ observed throughout the various 
 parts confirms the unit}^ of The Song; e. g. one loved 
 one, and always described in almost the same lan- 
 guage, the mention of her mother, but never of her 
 father, etc. 
 
 4. The Daughters of Jerusalem form a permanent 
 element throughout, uniting the whole. 
 
 0. There are constant repetitions of the same ex- 
 pressions and sentiments throughout, thus showing it! 
 to be a poetical unit, one song; e. g. the adjuration of 
 the daughters of Jerusalem, the challenging question, 
 " Who is this?" the chorus-description of Shulamite, 
 as " the matchless one among women," etc. 
 
 6. The Song throughout relates to different parts 
 and features of one and the same subject and event. 
 
 V. Date.— It is generalh^ agreed that The Song is 
 constructed upon a basis of fact; i. e. it refers to inci- 
 dents that actually occurred, and these incidents 
 occurred during Solomon's life-time. But when were 
 these incidents recorded ? i. e. what is the date of the 
 composition and writing of The Song ? According to 
 some the Solomonic period. According to others the 
 post-Solomonic, but pre-exilic period. And still others 
 [9] 
 
130 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 say the period of Ezra and Nehemiah, and even the 
 late period of the Greek erotic poets. The weight of 
 internal and external evidence points to the earlier 
 part of Solomon's reign, rather than to the middle or 
 latter ]3art of that reign, or to any subsequent time, as 
 the date not only for the occurrence of the events 
 referred to in The Song, but also the date of the 
 writing of The Song. In proof of this may be noted — 
 
 1. The consummate literary excellence of The Song 
 shows that it must have been written at a time when 
 Hebrew language and literature had reached their 
 most flourishing period, the Solomonic period. 
 
 2. The author or authors of Prov. Chs. 1-9 and 
 22:17-24:22 were evidently acquainted with The 
 Song, as comparisons will show. 
 
 3. The geographical references, commercial and po- 
 litical allusions, evidently recent occurrence of the 
 events recorded, point to the Solomonic era for its 
 composition. 
 
 4. From historical allusions to Solomon in The Song 
 we must conclude not only that The Song was written 
 during Solomon's reign, but toward the commencement 
 of his reign; thus 6:8 compared with 1 Ki. 11:3. 
 Moreover Solomon's mother Bathsheba is represented 
 as still living. 
 
 5. The so-called Aramaisms of The Song are pure 
 Arabic words and forms. The abbreviated relative 
 pronoun, the letter sh, for the full form asJier, occurs 
 in poems of acknowledged antiquity, e. g. Song of Deb- 
 orah, Judg. 5:7. 
 
 6. The reference to Tirzah, as that to Jerusalem, in 
 6:4, is not to either as a political capital, but to their 
 natural location. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 131 
 
 VI. Authorship.— The Solomonic authorship of The 
 Song is denied almost alone by those who hold to the 
 Shepherd- hypothesis method of interpretation (see 
 below), and these as a rule admit that all the other 
 evidences point to Solomon as the author. The Solo- 
 monic authorship is, in brief, defended on these 
 grounds: — 
 
 1. The title, 1:1, ascribes the authorship to Solo- 
 mon. 
 
 2. The extensive and accurate knowledge displayed 
 in The Song offers abundant and unmistakable testi- 
 mony to Solomon being the author; e. g. The Song as 
 a literary, poetic production ; the extensive and accur- 
 ate knowledge displayed in The Song in matters geo- 
 graphical and historical ; and a similar knowledge as 
 to the human arts and natural sciences. 
 
 3. It is abundantly evident that the chief reason for 
 denying the Solomonic authorship of The Song is be- 
 cause it is out of the question to hold to that, and at 
 the same time hold to the Shepherd-hypothesis inter- 
 pretation. But that) condemns the human hypothesis 
 rather than the Solomonic authorship so positively 
 asserted in 1:1. 
 
 VII. Form.— The Song is not a drama. It most 
 resembles the lyric. Certain it is that it is in no sense 
 a drama; but a song^ a nuptial song, Ij^rical rather 
 than dramatic in character. In proof it may be briefly 
 noted, — 
 
 1. According to its own name in the Title, 1:1, it is 
 sheer., i. e. a song, and a song in celebration, according 
 to the significance of the word. 
 
 2. From its poetic and artistic structure it is in the 
 nature of a song, and not a drama. 
 
132 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 3. As a slieer, The Song' is moreover a poetic com- 
 position intended to be sung or chanted, not theatri- 
 cally represented. 
 
 4. According to its form, nature and subject-matter, 
 The Song is a song of love and marriage; and to define 
 it more strictly still, a post-nuptial song; i. e. a song 
 composed to be sung, and that actually was sung dur- 
 ing the festivities following upon the marriage of 
 Solomon and Shulamite, and in celebration of that 
 marriage. 
 
 5. The drama is an institution entirely foreign to 
 the Hebrew, the Shemitic mind. 
 
 6. The Song violates all the principal rules of a 
 drama; — it is not represented in person throughout; 
 it is devoted to long descriptive and narrative ad- 
 dresses requiring no reply ; there is no regular historical 
 succession of events, no dr.'^matic development, no 
 progress of a plot ct.icl a denouement; while omissions 
 fatal to a drama constantly appear, and imaginary 
 characters, scenes and speeches are introduced in 
 order to fill out the dramatic conception. 
 
 VIII. Divisions and Contents.— It is to be remem- 
 bered that The Song is a marriage song; that all the 
 principal features and events connected with a Biblical, 
 oriental marriage are clearly set forth in it, though not 
 in the precise chronological order in which they natur- 
 ally occur. It is also to be remembered that The Song 
 was written by Solomon to be sung at the celebration 
 of his marriage with Shulamite; and was so sung by a 
 choir selected for the purpose, during the festivities 
 that followed immediately upon the consummation of 
 that marriage. So that at the time The Song opens 
 Solomon and Shulamite are actually married, even as 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 133 
 
 in the course of The Song they address each other b}^ 
 terms that absolute!}^ require us to regard them as 
 husband and wife. The Song is largely composed of 
 descriptive references to prominent incidents that pre- 
 ceded and led up to their marriage, and these inci- 
 dents embrace all the prominent features of a Biblical 
 and oriental marriage. The principal persons intro- 
 duced into The Song are — Solomon, King in Jerusa- 
 lem ; Shulamite, a Kedarene maiden from east of the 
 Jordan; Daughters of Jerusalem, apart of the ro3^al 
 household; attendants of the palace; citizens of 
 Jerusalem; mother and brothers of Shulamite. The 
 main divisions of The Song are as follows: — 
 
 1. Ch. 1 : 1. Title. Sets forth the name and nature 
 of the Book, i. e. a Song; and its authorship, i, e. 
 Solomon. 
 
 2. Chs. 1:2-2:7. First experiences in the royal 
 home. That is, it refers to the first experiences of 
 Shulamite the bride and wife, in her royal home, after 
 having been brought there in bridal procession as de- 
 scribed in 3: 6-11. 
 
 3. Chs. 2:8-3:5. Love's separations and meetings. 
 This division describes a pre-marriage incident, and 
 therefore, in point of time, antedates the preceding 
 division. It refers to a time when before their mar- 
 riage Solomon visited Shulamite, and that occurred 
 which here Shulamite narrates to the Daughters of 
 Jerusalem. 
 
 4. Chs. 3:6-5:1. The royal home-bringing of the 
 bride. Describes how Shulamite was brought in royal 
 procession to her royal home in Jerusalem, as the bride 
 and wife of Solomon. 
 
 5. Chs. 5 : 2-6 : 9. Love's separations, meetings and 
 
134 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 coDfessions. Refers to another pre-marriage incident, 
 in which occur mutual descriptions of love and praise 
 on the part of Solomon and Shulamite, the beloved 
 and loved one. 
 
 6. Chs. 6 : 10-8 : 4. The royal bridegroom and bride. 
 Consisting of descriptions of Shulamite in the midst of 
 her royal surroundings, and interviews between her 
 and her royal husband. 
 
 7. Ch. 8:5-14. Seals and Songs. Relates to the 
 time of the betrothal contract when Solomon goes ac- 
 companied and introduced by Shulamite into her 
 home, and the betrothal contract having been made is 
 finally sealed, and the customary dowry gifts be- 
 stowed. 
 
 IX. Interpretation.— Three principal methods of 
 interpretation have been adopted in explanation of 
 The Song; viz. : 
 
 1. The Allegorical interpretation. This interpreta- 
 tion denies that there is any historical basis to the 
 descriptions of The Song, and affirms that everything 
 in it is of spiritual import. It treats the persons, ob- 
 jects, events, and every utterance of The Song as 
 unhistorical, as mere figures, names, symbols for 
 spiritual persons, objects, sentiments. In general 
 this interpretation regards The Song as describing, 
 under the figure of the marriage relation, the mutual 
 love subsisting between the Lord and his people, — in 
 the first instance between the Lord and the Congrega- 
 tion of Israel, and in the second instance between 
 Christ and the Church. To this interpretation there 
 are serious objections; e. g. — 
 
 a. This interpretation in denying a primarj^, literal, 
 historical sense to The Song destroys its own founda- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 135 
 
 tion ; for it is from the sphere of the natural and his- 
 torical that the Scriptures rise to the spiritual. 
 
 b. Hence this interpretation is contrary to Scripture 
 analog}^; the order of which is first the s^^mbol then 
 the substance, first the type then the docti'ine. 
 
 c. The allegorical method of interpreting Tlie Song 
 is destructive of all sound hermeneutical laws, and 
 substitutes therefor an arbitrar}- system of exegesis. 
 
 d. This interpretation is unable to furnish a satis- 
 factorj^ and uniform exposition of The Song. 
 
 e. This interpretation practically makes The Song a 
 meaningless Book to the people of God under the Old 
 Testament. 
 
 /. This interpretation leads to all sorts of extrava- 
 gances and mal-interpretations. 
 
 2. The Shepherd-hypothesis interpretation. This 
 method of interpretation regards Tlie Song as histori- 
 cal, but introduces another and whoU}^ unnamed char- 
 acter in The Song, viz. the Shepherd, an obscure 
 peasant, who is supposed to be the betrothed of Shul- 
 amite, and the successful rival of Solomon. Accord- 
 ing to this interpretation, Solomon, during one of his 
 tours in the northern part of his kingdom, saw Shula- 
 mite, was overcome by her beauty, was smitten in love 
 for her, and so had her abducted and carried away to 
 his palace in Jerusiilem. There he plied her with all 
 the arts and arguments of a flatterer and would-be 
 seducer, in order to j)ersuade her to become one of his 
 liareem., a royal mistress. She refuses his seductive 
 overtures, remains true to this Shepherd to whom she 
 is finally wedded. According to this view The Song is 
 intended to teach the lesson of virtue and womanly 
 fidelit}^, but womanly fidelity to what is nothing more 
 
136 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 than a mere earthly, human love; for according to this 
 there is no typical, spiritual teaching of The Song. 
 This Shepherd-hypothesis interpretation of The Song 
 is utterably untenable, and, in brief, for the following 
 reasons : — 
 
 a. It repeatedly violates grammatical constructions 
 and must do so in order to maintain itself. 
 
 h. It repeatedly violates lexical meanings, and 
 Scripture usus loqueiidi, and must do so in order to 
 maintain itself. 
 
 c. It interpolates words and expressions that have 
 no existence in the text, and must do this to maintain 
 itself. 
 
 d. It eliminates words and significations from the 
 text because these cannot be retained, and their 
 hypothesis maintained. 
 
 e. It treats, and is compelled to treat, a number of 
 passages as being "ironical," or "said aside," or 
 " said in a low tone," when there is no intimation of 
 this in the text. 
 
 /. It repeatedly makes characters in The Song con- 
 tradict themselves and each other; and sets text and 
 context at variance. 
 
 g. It represents Solomon as a would-be seducer 
 when throughout The Song he is represented as pre- 
 cisely the opposite. 
 
 h. It charges The Song and the principal characters 
 in The Song with the most absurd incongruities; — 
 violations of all laws linguistic, social, moral. 
 
 i. It introduces an unnamed and entirely fictitious 
 character in The Song. 
 
 j. It violates the laws of interpretation and exegesis 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 137 
 
 in that it repeatedly takes certain statements as partly 
 literal and partly figurative. 
 
 k. It contradicts the plain and positive statements 
 of The Song which repeatedly represent Solomon and 
 Shulamite as the beloved and loved one; represent 
 Shulamite as giving herself to Solomon ; represent 
 Solomon and Shulamite addressing each other by the 
 same terms of love, and by terms that, if language has 
 -any meaning at all, require us to regard them as 
 husband and wife. 
 
 3. The Typical interpretation. It regards The Song 
 as entirely historical, the historical occasion being the 
 love consummated in marriage between Solomon and 
 Shulamite. But it is also typical; and has a certain 
 and blessed teaching. In an allegory everything must 
 be spiritualized. A type typifies one thing, and the 
 antitype far surpasses the type. So then as to the 
 typical character of The Song. 
 
 a. Solomon is a type of the Lord, — the one Lord of 
 each and all his followers in all times. 
 
 h. Shulamite is a type of the individual believer, 
 follower, lover of that one Lord. 
 
 c. The relation between Solomon and Shulamite is a 
 type of that relation which exists or should exist 
 between the Lord and each one of his individual fol- 
 lowers. 
 
 This is the onl3^ reasonable interpretation of The 
 Song as is evident, briefly, from the following con- 
 siderations : — 
 
 a. It is supijorted by Scripture analogy. Psa. 45, 
 and Isa. 5 : 1-7 show plainly how The Song is to be 
 interpreted. 
 
138 
 
 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 h. It is the only interpretation that satisfies the 
 languao^e of the text. 
 
 c. It is the onl3^ interpretation that furnishes a con- 
 sistent interpretation of the different parts of The 
 Song, and a uniform and consistent interpretation of 
 the whole. 
 
 d. It is supported by the direct positive statements 
 of The Song, and all the representations that The 
 Song makes relative to Solomon and Shnlamite as the 
 beloved and loved one, the husband and wife. 
 
 e. It furnishes not only the only consistent literary 
 interpretation, but also an interpretation consistent 
 with the name and nature of the Book, and its place 
 in the Canon. 
 
 PROPHET-PROPHECY. 
 
 I. Name.— The Hebrew verb nciba means to cause to 
 bubble up or pour forth abundantly ; to speak by a 
 divine power; to prophesy. From this verb comes 
 the title nahi, L e. a prophet. Other titles for prophet 
 are ro'eh, meaning a Seer, and liozeh, also meaning 
 Seer but especially in the sense of prophetic vision. 
 The title nahi = propliet is primary, and designates one 
 who belongs to the prophetic order, while the other 
 two terms meaning seer are secondary, included in 
 nabi, and set forth more especially the mode of re- 
 ceiving the divine communications. 
 
 II. Office.— The office of prophecy and prophet is 
 the announcement and interpretation of the divine 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 139 
 
 will to Others as that will is revealed to the prophet bj^ 
 God. The prophets were the divinely called and com- 
 missioned representatives of Jehovah, and prophecy 
 the will and words of Jehovah communicated of 
 Jehovah to the prophets, by whom it was to be com- 
 municated to the people. So the function of the 
 prophet and prophec}^ is to declare and defend the 
 teachin<i;s of God's truth, as that truth is set forth in 
 the sphere of precept and of promise. 
 
 III. Institution.— The piophetical institution was 
 one for which the Law made provision. See Deut. 
 18: 9-19. The historical origin of prophecy is contem- 
 poraneous with the constitution of the Theocracy at 
 Sinai. True, prophecy existed before this, existed 
 with the first promise of redemption immediately after 
 the fall of our first parents. But the Law, the Theoc- 
 racy, the ceremonials of worship were instituted for 
 the development of that promise tlirough the prophetic 
 office. 
 
 IV. Inspiration.— The modes of communication be- 
 tween God and men are set forth in Num. 12:6-8 
 where three modes are specified, viz. (1) Vision; (2) 
 Dream; (3) Direct communication and manifestation. 
 The last is the highest form. A like specification is 
 furnished by Joel and Daniel. Joel 2: 28; Dan. 1: 17. 
 Prophecy ma^^ include genius, but genius never con- 
 stitutes prophecy. Prophecj^ is not possible to human 
 attainment, but exclusively something of divine en- 
 dowment. The prophet stands in a unique, personal 
 and intimate relation to God, who makes him a par- 
 ticipator of the divine counsel, and discloses to him 
 secret things. He receives by direct communication 
 with God, the very truth from God, and communicates 
 
140 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 it in the language God intends to be used. Compare 
 Aaron's relation to Moses, Ex, 4:14-10, and Ex. 7:1, 
 2, also Deut. 18: 18 and Jer. 15: 19. 
 
 V. Classification.— In the main prophecy is of two 
 kinds: — Didactic and Predictive. 
 
 Didactic prophecy is the revelation to the prophet, 
 and the communication by the prophet, of the divine 
 will as it concerns the obligations of the present. It 
 instructs man as to what he should be through God's 
 gracious working. 
 
 Predictive prophecy is the revelation to the prophet, 
 and the communication by the prophet, of the divine 
 will as it concerns the occurrences of the future. It 
 foretells to man what certainly shall be through God's 
 sovereign working. 
 
 As to the union of the two kinds of prophecy, — 
 didactic instructs as to the requirements of the present, 
 while predictive foretells the things of the future in 
 harmony" with the requirements of the i)resent, both 
 being confirmed by the didactic and predictive 
 prophecies of the past. 
 
 Predictive prophecy is also of two kinds: — Local or 
 Temporary, and Messianic. 
 
 Predictive prophecy and its fulfilment is the strong- 
 est, the incontestable evidence to the truth of the 
 Scriptures. 
 
 VI. Succession.— The prophet was sovereignly called 
 of God to his office, generally without special reference 
 to lineal or scholarly antecedents. The Scriptures do 
 not represent an unbroken series of prophets, each 
 inducted into the office by his predecessor. The steps 
 in prophetic succession may be briefly represented as 
 follows : — 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 141 
 
 1. Prophecy began in Eden and with the Protevan- 
 gelinm. 
 
 2. Enoch, the seventh from Adam, prophesied. 
 Jude 14, 15. 
 
 3. Noah as a preacher of righteousness, and the 
 builder of the ark was a prophet. 2 Pet. 2: 5. 
 
 4. Abraham. 
 
 5. Isaac. 
 
 6. Jacob. 
 
 7. Intermission of prophecy from the death of Jacob 
 until the Exodus. 
 
 8. Moses. 
 
 9. From Moses to Samuel interval without prophecj\ 
 
 10. Samuel. 
 
 11. From Samuel to Malachi jn-ophecy continuous. 
 
 12. From Malachi to Christ interval without 
 prophec3^ 
 
0) 
 
 b 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 -2^ 
 
 •& 
 
 i 
 
 ® 
 
 ^ 
 
 so 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 'i 
 
 
 o 
 
 C3 
 ,£3 
 
 3 
 
 •5 
 
 <r> 
 
 <D 
 
 5^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1-3 
 
 1-5 
 
 55j 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 00 GO 
 
 a 
 
 O 
 ^-^ 
 
 I ^ 
 
 CQ -* o 
 00 (N Oi 
 tr- i> O 
 
 O :« ce 
 M ►^ ^3 
 
 ^ 000500000 
 
 ^ Sg lo th 05 JO o 
 
 00 GO 00 00 i> t- t^ 
 
 
 o ® 
 
 H 
 
 -d 
 
 ft ^* 
 
 IS] ^ 
 
 b CO 
 
 u 
 
 CD *0 o 
 CO CO (?;{ 
 
 lo »9 io lo o 
 
 iO C5 00 00 »o 
 CD CO (M O O 
 CD CD CD 
 
 tr o o 
 
 05 CO 0> 
 
 «:> io JO lo 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 b ^ >^ ^ 
 
 OO CO CO OQ 
 
 « CO 02 ac 
 
 <'1 <1 <tl <1 
 
 i O) i i 
 
 ^H Si ^ 5_ 
 
 eL( fin Ph (1( 
 
 S ^ 
 
 i H 
 
 cc c3 ce 
 
 PL, <1 <1 ^ o o o 
 
 I i i i 
 
 M S ^ r^ 
 rd H W P=^ 
 
 ^ M 6 6 o 
 
 W O Ph Oh (In 
 
 o 
 K 
 
 ,d ^ 
 
 ,-H 0) 
 
 I 
 
 ill 
 
 ■||^ 
 
 I -i i ^ -I 
 
 n^ p<i cc )K CC 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 143 
 
 ISAIAH. 
 
 I. Name.— Yesliayaliu = Isaiah = Jehovah's salva- 
 tion. 
 
 II. Biography.— Isaiah, who belonged to the King- 
 dom of Judah, flourished in the Assyrian period. (See 
 Table of Prophets.) Isaiah was the son of Amoz, and 
 resided and prophesied in Jerusalem. He was mar- 
 ried, and two sons are spoken of, both of whose names, 
 like that of Isaiah, were significant as to the times: — 
 the elder Shear-yashub^ A remnant shall return ; 
 the younger Malier - sJialal - hash - haz = Spoil swiftly^ 
 rob quickly. Isaiah received the prophetic call, and 
 appeared as a prophet iu the last year of King LTzziah's 
 reign. (See Table of Kings.) Isaiah continued to 
 prophesy throughout the reigns of the three succeed- 
 ing kings, Jotham, Ahaz and Hezekiah. He proba- 
 bly continued to exercise his prophetic office up to 
 the beginning of Manasseh's reign. Tradition says 
 that he sufi'ered martyrdom by being sawn asunder in 
 the persecutions that followed the accession of Man- 
 asseh, and by the order of that wicked king. Accord- 
 ing to 2 Chron. 26:22; 32:32, Isaiah was the author 
 of a history both of Uzziah and Hezekiah. Isaiah was 
 preeminently a statesman as well as a prophet, his 
 influence being strongly felt throughout the reigns 
 during which he prophesied, while he was especially in 
 high favor with King Hezekiah. The two principal 
 state events with which Isaiah was connected, and in 
 which he took a prominent part, were the two crises 
 through which in his lifetime Judah passed ; the first 
 
14:4 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 being the invasion of Judah on the part of the allied 
 Sj^rians and Israelites (Chs. 7, 8), and the second being 
 the invasion of Judah on the part of Sennacherib, and 
 the destruction of the Assyrian host (Chs. 36, 37). 
 Isaiah not only lived to an advanced age, but lived to 
 see a number of his predictions fulfilled. 
 
 III. Ministry.— Isaiah exercised his prophetic minis- 
 try during a period of forty-six j^ears (758-712 B. C), 
 and perhaps more nearly for about half a century, as 
 he began to prophesy in the last year of Uzziah's 
 reign, and continued to prophesy till at least fourteen 
 years of Hezekiah's reign had passed by. The sphere 
 of Isaiah's prophetic ministration was Judah and 
 Jerusalem. Ilis labors appear to have been carried on 
 chiefl3% if not exclusively, in Jerusalem. In the exer- 
 cise of his prophetic ministry Isaiah's range of subjects 
 was ^ar-reaching, the burdens of his prophecies em- 
 bracing all the chief contemporary nations, not only 
 Judah and Israel, but also Syria, Assyria, Babylon, 
 Egypt, Moab, Edom, Philistia, Ethiopia, Tyre, etc. 
 But these prophecies concerning other nations were 
 intended primarily for the benefit of Judah, its warn- 
 ing, instruction and hope. Throughout his ministry 
 Isaiah showed himself to be without an equal in the 
 prophetic order as a social and moral reformer, as a 
 court councilor and statesman, as the theologian of all 
 times. The prophetic utterances of Isaiah's ministry 
 revolve about the two great themes of prophecy; — for 
 the unbelieving and disobedient, judgment; for the 
 believing and obedient, redemption and the glorious 
 consummation of the Theocracy. 
 
 IV. Chronology.— The chronology of this period is 
 1. Contemporary Prophets ; — Hosea, Micah. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 145 
 
 2. Kings of Jiidali ; — Uzziah, Jothara, Ahaz, Heze- 
 kiah, Manasseh. See Table of Kings. 
 
 3. Kings of Israel ; — Menahem, Pekahiah, Pekah, 
 Hosea. See Table of Kings. 
 
 4. Damascene Syria ; — Hazael (2 Ki. 13 : 3-7). Ben- 
 hadad III. (2 Ki. 13:3-7.) Jeroboam II. invades 
 Syria. Daraascus vassal of Assyria. Rezin (Rezon) 
 742 B. C. Last King of Damascus. 2 Ki. 16:5; 
 Isa. Ch. 7. 
 
 5. Assyria. Pul = Tiglath-Pileser II. usurps the 
 Assyrian throne, and founds the second great Assyrian 
 empire. Reigned 745-728 B. C. 
 
 Shalmaneser IV. a general of the Assyrian army 
 seizes the throne, and succeeds Tiglath - Pileser. 
 Reigned 727-722 B. C. 
 
 Sargon, a military hero, succeeds, usurping the 
 throne and reigning sixteen years, 722-705 B. C. 
 
 Sennacherib, son of Sargon, succeeds, and reigns 
 about twenty-four years, 705-681 B. C. ; and is then 
 succeeded by his son, 
 
 Esarhaddon, who reigned 681-668 B. C, and is suc- 
 ceeded by his son, 
 
 Asshurbanipal = Sardanapalus II., who reigned 
 668-626 B. C. 
 
 Toward the close of the reign of this monarch begins 
 the swift decline of the Assyrian empire, and then 
 follows its fall under Esarhaddon II., the Sarakos of 
 the Greeks. 
 
 6. Egypt. After a period of dynastic changes, in- 
 ternal dissensions, and threatened invasion from 
 Assyria on the north and Ethiopia on the south, 
 Bokenranef, about 740 B. C, and sole king of the 24th 
 
 [lOJ 
 
146 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 D3mast3', was succeeded by the Ethiopian King 
 Shabaka or Sabako, the So of 2 Ki. 17: 4 who took 
 the Egyptian throne and founded the dynasty of the 
 Ethiopians 725 B. C. He was succeeded by Sha- 
 batak whose reign was short when he was succeeded 
 by Tirhaka (Isa. 36 : 6 ; 37 : 9), brother-in-law of Sabako, 
 and who after a reign of twenty-six years was succeed- 
 ed by Rut-Ainon or Urdamen, his son-in-law, and he 
 by the first king of the 26th Dynasty, Psaraetik I. or 
 Psammetichus, who was followed about 612 B. C. by 
 his son Neku II., the Pharaoh Necho of 2 Ki. 23:29, 
 and contemporar}^ of Josiah King of Judah. 
 
 7. Events. B. C. 756. Jotham made regent along 
 with his father Uzziah. 
 
 B. C. 745. Tiglath-Pileser usurps the Ass^^-ian 
 throne. 
 
 B. C. 742. Call of Isaiah. Death of Uzziah. 
 
 B. C. 741. Death of Jotham; accession of Ahaz. 
 
 B. C. 738. Tribute paid to the Assyrians by Men- 
 ahem and Rezin. 
 
 B. C. 734. Pekah deposed and slain; Hoshea with 
 Assj^rian help raised to the throne of Samaria ; Damas- 
 cus besieged; deportation of transjordanic tribes by 
 Tiglath-Pileser. 
 
 B. C. 732. Damascus captured by Tiglath-Pileser; 
 Kezin put to death. 
 
 B. C. 727. Tiglath-Pileser succeeded \>y Shalmane- 
 ser IV. , and Ahaz by Hezekiah. 
 
 B. C. 722. Sargon seizes the throne; captures Sa- 
 maria. End of the Northern Kingdom. 
 
 B. C. 721. Merodach-baladan captures Babylon. 
 
 B. C. 712. Embassy of Merodach-baladan to Heze- 
 kiah. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 147 
 
 B. C. 711. Conquest of Jiidah and Ashdod by Sar- 
 gon. 
 
 B. C. 710. Conquest of Babylonia by Sargon. 
 
 B. C. 705. Sargon murdered, and succeeded by his 
 son Sennacherib. 
 
 B. C. 703. Sennacherib defeats Merodach-baladan. 
 
 B. C. 701. Campaign of Sennacherib against Phoe- 
 nicia, Philistia and Judah. 
 
 B. C. 697. Death of Hezekiah ; succeeded by Man- 
 asseh. 
 
 B. C. 681. Sennacherib murdered and succeeded by 
 his son Esarhaddon. 
 
 B. C. 607. Nineveh destroyed by the Medes and 
 Babylonians. 
 
 B. C. 586. Destruction of Jerusalem by Nebuchad 
 nezzar. 
 
 B. C 549. Cyrus. 
 
 B. C. 538. Cyrus captures Babylon, and releases 
 the Jewish exiles. 
 
 V. Authorship— Unity.— Aben Ezra, a distinguished 
 Spanish rabbi of the twelfth centur}^, was the first to 
 suggest a duality of authorship as to the Prophecy of 
 Isaiah; intimating that the prophecies of the last part 
 of the Book were written by King Jechoniah at the 
 time of the Babylonian captivity. When we reach 
 Eichhorn in the last century we find that he has carried 
 the hypothesis of documents so far as to divide the 
 Book of Isaiah into eightj'-five fragments, wiiich he 
 attributed to very different authors and times. 
 Modern criticism does not go quite so far; but having 
 accepted the Isaianic duality of Aben Ezra, and given 
 us a Proto-Isaiah, author of Chs. 1-39, and a Deutero- 
 Isaiah, author of Chs. 40-66, it has further proceeded 
 
148 INTRODUCTION OUi'LINES. 
 
 to give us different authors for different prophecies in 
 these two great divisions, especially the proto-Isaiah 
 division. A recent writer has styled this criticism, 
 not Higher, but "rationalistic criticism," and such it 
 unquestionably is, for it is evident that it is not 
 Isaiah, as such, that is being criticized and assailed. 
 What is being assailed is the supernatural, is inspir- 
 ation, is in a word the possibility and reality of pre- 
 dictive prophecy. Granted that a prophet, by the 
 power and knowledge given him of God, may foretell 
 years and centuries beforehand what is to take place, — 
 and there ceases to be any objection, worthy of the 
 name, to the Unity of the Book of Isaiah, and its au- 
 thorship by Isaiah the son of Amoz. In support of 
 this unity and authorship, and as against the general 
 view that the second half of Isaiah was written by a 
 writer in the last decenium of the exile, it ma}^ briefly 
 be noted 
 
 1. The New Testament assigns the authorship of the 
 Prophecy of Isaiah to a single author, and that author 
 Isaiah the son of Amoz. Thus, e. g. John 12:37-41 
 where two quotations are made from Isaiah, viz. one 
 from the so-called proto-Isaiah, i. e. 6:9, 10, and the 
 other from the so-called deutero-Isaiah, viz. 53:1. 
 But John evidently quotes these passages as being the 
 sayings and writings of one and the same Isaiah, for 
 he emphasizes their Isaianic authorship by the three- 
 fold declaration, — "the saying of Esaias," " Esaias 
 said again," and " these things said Esaias." 
 
 2. It is the exceptionless rule with the prophets to 
 furnish in the opening words of their prophecies their 
 prophetic credentials. These credentials include a 
 statement — a. Of the prophet's name. h. Of the 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 149 
 
 prophet's divine authority, viz. that his prophecy is a 
 word or vision he had from Jehovah, c. The pro- 
 phet's parentage. cL The prophet's nativity, e. The 
 reigns during which or time when he prophesied. 
 /. The parties to whom his prophecy was addressed. 
 g. the place where he received or uttered his prophecy. 
 Nearly all the prophets, all the greater prophets, and 
 the majority of the minor prophets furnish most of the 
 above items in presenting and as constituting their 
 prophetic credentials. Not one of the prophets but 
 furnishes at least two, /. e. his name, and the divine 
 authority of his prophetic utterances. The greater 
 prophets of the Exilian and post-Exilian periods are 
 especially full and accurate in the data furnished by 
 them as to their prophetic authority and ministry. 
 But the so-called deutero-Isaiah, the greatest of all the 
 prophets, leaves us without even the remotest intima- 
 tion, utterly fails to present any ^prophetical creden- 
 tials, does not mention a single item, not even his 
 name or his divine authority for speaking. And yet 
 this prophecy, /. e. Chs. 40-6G, is the most pregnant 
 and the sublimest of all the prophecies ever uttered. 
 That such a prophecy should be anonymous, should 
 be destitute of divine official authority, and in defiance 
 of prophetical usage and law, is incomprehensible, far 
 more incomprehensible than all the assumed difficul- 
 ties of the critics. 
 
 3. The theologic and Messianic conceptions of the 
 first and second halves of Isaiah are not only in ])re- 
 cise agreement, but together constitute one continu- 
 ously developed, and finally completed unit; — a unit 
 indivisible as to nature, argument and authorship, 
 without rendering both X3arts imperfect. The proto- 
 
150 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Isaiah alone would be foundation without superstrnc- 
 tiire. The deutero-Isaiah alone would be superstructure 
 without foundation. Taking the Book as a unit the 
 conception of God is one and complete as to his nature 
 and attributes: — his majesty, infinitude, almightiness, 
 holiness; his purity, righteousness, faithfulness, truth, 
 mercy, love, jealousy, wrath. It is especially God's 
 holiness, the character of God as "the Holy One of 
 Israel," that is so strikingly Isaianic in its force and 
 frequency. It is almost peculiar to the one undivided 
 Book of Isaiah, occurring twenty-five times in Isaiah, 
 and onl3^ six times elsewhere throughout the whole Old 
 Testament. It is a characteristic of the second half of 
 Isaiah as well as the first, and constitutes not only a 
 remarkable bond of union between the two halves, but 
 also remarkable evidence to the unity of their author- 
 shii^. The same is true in resi)ect to Isaiah's Mes- 
 sianic conception and prediction. It is a progressively 
 and indivisibly developed unit. Thus, e. g. the devel- 
 opment of the twofold Messianic figure of a plant and 
 a child. Again the development of the threefold offiqe 
 of the Messiah, kingly, prophetical and priestly. And 
 again the marvelous prophetico-historical development 
 of the life and works of the Messiah between first 
 advent and last judgment. 
 
 4. 'J'he argument for a deutero-Isaiah from the his- 
 toric function of prophecy is not only contrary to the 
 spirit and analogy of prophecy, but is an argument 
 that proves too much. The position is that the author 
 of Isa. Chs. 40-60 lived and wrote in the last decenium 
 of the exile; that he describes historically as past the 
 times and experiences of the exiles ; that there is no 
 prediction of the exile; that the exile is presupposed, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 151 
 
 and only the release from it is predicted. But this 
 position is eontrar.y, indeed subversive of the spirit 
 and analogy of prophecy. For not only do others of 
 the prophets, but Isaiah the son of Amoz himself, throws 
 himself forward by the spirit of prophecy into the 
 future, and from that prophetico-historical standpoint 
 describes events as past, as historically having taken 
 place, which in reality are as yet future. Thus, e. g. 
 5:13-15; 9:1-6; 28:1, U, etc., compare Micah 
 7:7-20, etc. So Isaiah describes not only the exile, 
 but also the release from the exile. If it be granted 
 that a prophet may divinely foreknow and foretell, 
 there is then not a single statement in the dentero- 
 Isaiah tliat might not be the work of a prophet who 
 knew that the exile and the release from the exile nnist 
 take place. Besides, the above position and argument 
 proves too much ; for then portions of the proto-Isaiah 
 must have been written after the restoration from 
 Babylon, and Isa. Ch. do must have been written after 
 the sufferings, crucifixion and the burial of Christ. 
 
 5. The argument for a deutero-Isaiah from differ- 
 ence in language, literary style and character, not only 
 cannot be but is not pressed. The marvel the rather 
 is that the difference is so slight considering the vast 
 historical scope, and diversified prophetical teachings 
 of the prophet. The day is past when such slight 
 differences of style as seemingly exist between the 
 proto- and deutero-Isaiah can be alleged to be incom- 
 patible with unity of authorship. There is nothing in 
 the contents of the so-called deutero-Isaiah that may 
 not have been written by Isaiah the son of Amoz. 
 AVhat seem to be difficulties in style are only natural 
 and necessary to a difference in time, subject, treat- 
 
152 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 ment or environment. But examining it more closely, 
 the argument from language is strictly an argument 
 that strongly confirms the unity of the Book, and its 
 authorship by the son of Amoz. There is a consider- 
 able number of linguistic peculiarities, Isaianisms, 
 and these are common alike to the first and last parts 
 of the Book. 
 
 6. Many passages in the so-called deutero-Isaiah 
 would be, to say the least, utterly inconsistent and 
 meaningless, if treated as having been written at any 
 time during the exile ; e. g. 40 : 9 ; 43 : 22-24 ; 56 : 4-7 ; 
 58:6; 62:6; 66:3, 4, 6, etc. 
 
 7. There is one other thing especially to be marked; 
 a most remarkable argument passing all through, par- 
 ticularly the so-called deutero-Isaiah. It is an argu- 
 ment, the one supreme argument that God uses to prove 
 that he alone is the true God; the one supreme ar- 
 gument that Isaiah uses to prove that he is God's 
 prophet, and his words God's truth. The course of this 
 argument may in part be traced in these passages, — 
 41:21-28; 42:9; 43:8-10; 45:20, 21; 46: 6-10; 48: 
 3-16, etc. The argument is this; — God represents him- 
 self as announcing events before they come to pass as a 
 proof that he alone is the true God ; and the same argu- 
 ment Isaiah uses to prove that he is God's prophet, and 
 his words are God's truth. Now it is precisely this ar- 
 gument that this rationalistic criticism proposes to make 
 void, to make of none efi'ect, in its attempt to show that 
 the second half of Isaiah was written in the last de- 
 cenium of the-exile. It is very evident from the above 
 passages that the prophet regarded himself as revealing 
 the future, and not simply describing what was before 
 the eyes of all. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 153 
 
 VI. Divisions and Contents.— In brief the Prophecj" 
 of Isaiah may be divided, and its contents indicated, 
 upon the basis of six parts or Books, as follows: — 
 
 1. Chs. 1-6. The Book of Introdiictions. Contains 
 superscriptions, credentials of the Prophet, and pro- 
 phetic statements of judijment and salvation toward 
 Israel; as follows: a. Ch. 1. Sets forth the thought- 
 lessness, hypocrisy, and wickedness of the Jews, and 
 the destruction of their cities and desolation of their 
 country. Probably written in the reign of Hezekiah 
 after Sennacherib's invasion, h. Chs. 2-4. Contain 
 threateuings of God's judgments upon the people of 
 Judah for idolatry, wickedness, and pride, together with 
 a promise of future blessedness. Probably written in 
 the reign of Jotham. c. Ch. 5, Parable of the vine- 
 yard, addressed to Judah and Jerusalem, respecting 
 Judah and Israel, ending with a denunciation of divine 
 judgments upon the wicked. Probably belongs to the 
 time of Jotham. d. Ch. 6. Isaiah's call to the pro- 
 phetic office in the last year of Uzziah. 
 
 2. Chs. 7-10. The Book of Immanueh In Ch. 7, 
 against the confederated forces of Syria and Israel, 
 Isaiah gives Ahaz the sign of Immanuel, and announces 
 the impending judgments of God from the hands of the 
 Assyrians. In Chs. 8 : 1-9 : 10 there is a prediction of 
 the overthrow of Damascus and Samaria by the Assyr- 
 ians, an appeal to trust in God, and a prediction of the 
 Messiah's Kingdom. This prophecy probably belongs 
 to the time of Ahaz. In Chas. 9:8-10:4 there is a 
 prophecy relative to the destruction of Israel, probably 
 delivered in the latter part of the reign of Ahaz. In 
 Ch. 10:5-34 there is a prediction of the invasion of 
 
154 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Judah 1)3^ the King of Assyria, which was probably 
 littered in the last part of the reign of Ahaz. 
 
 Chs. II, 12 constitute a concluding statement to Chs. 
 7-10. They predict the appearance of the Messiah 
 from the stem of Jesse, set forth the Messianic .salva- 
 tion, Messiah's reign and the song of the final redemp- 
 tion. 
 
 3. Chs. 18-2)1 The Book of Oracles (concerning 
 the nations). This division or Book contains prophe- 
 cies directed against foreign natiims; fi'e., a. Chs. 13: 
 1-14:23. Against Babylon, h. Ch. 14:24-27. Against 
 Assyria, c. Ch. 14:28-32. Against the Philistines. 
 Last year of Ahaz. d. Chs. 15, 10. Against Moab. 
 e. Ch. 17:1-11. Against Damascus and Samaria. 
 Time of Hezekiah. /. Ch. 17:12-14. Against ene- 
 mies of Judah, probably the Assyrians. Time of 
 Hezekiah. g. Ch. 18. Against Ethiopia. Time of 
 Hezekiah. h. Ch. 19. Against Egypt. Time of Hez- 
 ekiah. /'. Ch. 20. Relates a symbolic action performed 
 b}' Isaiah in the time of Sargon, King of Assyria, 
 accompanied with a prophecy that the King of Assyria 
 would lead captive the Egyptians and Ethiopians. 
 Time of Hezekiah. j. Ch. 21 : 1-10. Against Babylon. 
 k. Ch. 21:11, 12. Dumah in Arabia. /. Ch. 21:13- 
 17. Concerning Arabia, m. Ch. 22:1-14. J^rophecy 
 of the invasion of Judah by Sennacherib in the four- 
 teenth year of Hezekiah's reign, and delivered shortly 
 before the event, n. Ch. 22:15-10. Against Shebna, 
 treasurer in the middle of Hezekiah's reign, o. Ch 
 22:20-25c Prediction as to Eliakim who is to replace 
 Shebna. p. Ch. 23. Against Tyre. 
 
 Chs. 24-27 constitute a concluding statement related 
 to Chs. 13-23, as Chs. 11, 12 were to Chs. 7-10. This 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 155 
 
 coiicliKliiig Statement, Chs. 24-27, sets forth the .judg- 
 ment of the earth, the luimiliation of :Moab, the salva- 
 tion of the nations, and the redemption and resurrec- 
 tion of Israel. 
 
 4. Chs. 28-33. The Book of Woes. These prophe- 
 cies belong to the period from the sixth to the fourteenth 
 year of Hezekiah. They treat of the Assyrian invasion, 
 and are prophecies uttered against: a. Ch. 2(S. Eph- 
 raim and Jerusalem, whose vices are rebuked, and 
 judgment threatened. h. Ch. 20. Against Ariel 
 (Jerusalem), followed by tlie promise of returning hap- 
 piness, c. Chs. 30, 31. Against those who look to 
 Egypt for help against the Assyrians, with a promise 
 of future prosperity, d. Chs. 32, 33. Variously ap- 
 plied judgments and promises. 
 
 Chs. 34, 35 constitute a concluding statement related 
 to Chs. 28-33 as Chs. 24-2? are to Chs. 13-23. These 
 Chs. 34, 35 set forth the judgment (Ch. 34=') upon all 
 nations of the world, especially (Ch. 34*^) Edom, and 
 the redemption (Ch. 35) of Jehovah's people. 
 
 5. Chs. 36-39. The Book of Histories : including 
 a. Chs. 36, 37. The double demand made by Sen- 
 nacherib for the surrender of Jerusalem, and the mira- 
 cle of its deliverance. 
 
 h. Ch. 38. The illness of Hezekiah, and the promise 
 of his recovery. 
 
 c. Ch. 39. The prediction of the Babylonian exile. 
 
 6. Chs. 40-66. The Book of Redemption : includ- 
 ing 
 
 a. Chs. 40-48. The certainty of the coming redemp- 
 tion from Babylon. 
 
 h. Chs. 49-57. The work and experiences prepara- 
 tory to the coming redemption. 
 
156 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 c. Chs. 58-66. The conditions of participation in 
 the coming redemption. 
 
 VII. Theology— Isaiah is the theologian preemi- 
 nent. His theology is all-embracing. Still even the 
 theology of Isaiah has its distinguishing characteristics; 
 that is, aspects, doctrines, attributes that the times of 
 Isaiah required should be especially emphasized. It 
 was in that vision of Jehovah's glory wherein were 
 especially revealed the supreme attributes of Majesty 
 and Holiness that Isaiah received his prophetic call. 
 These attributes of the divine character are therefore 
 distinguishing features in his theology, in his concep- 
 tion of God. And they were so in great measure 
 because the times required that these supreme attri- 
 butes of Jehovah's majesty and holiness should receive 
 most impressive emphasis. Luxury, independence, in- 
 justice, scepticism, idolatry, contempt for the rights of 
 the poor, and an insolent defiance of the supreme 
 majesty of Jehovah of hosts,— this was the proud spirit 
 of the times, a spirit that had to be humbled before the 
 awful manifestations of Jehovah's majesty. And even 
 more strongly does Isaiah emphasize Jehovah's holi- 
 ness. With Isaiah as with his contemporaries Amos 
 and Hosea, holiness is the essential characteristic of 
 Deity. This holiness is not simply negative but posi- 
 tive, refers not alone to the passive attributes, but 
 especially to all the activities of the Divine Being. 
 Jehovah is separated, is essentially deity, that is, is 
 holy, primarily and chiefly in that which he does, in 
 the character of his works. Precisely this Israel was 
 to be, and precisely this Israel was not. Hence Isaiah's 
 theology emphasizes holiness; that holiness which was 
 in Him who required holiness in his; that holiness which 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 157 
 
 rendered Him peculiarly the " Holy One of Israel" ; the 
 holiness of the Seraphim's song. 6 : 3. 
 
 VIII. Messianic— Isaiah is also preeminently the 
 Messianic Prophet. The life of the Messiah from be- 
 ginning to ending; the offices of the Messiah, propheti- 
 cal, priestly and kingly ; the work of the Messiah from 
 its inception to its consummation in the redemption of 
 the whole earth in the last days, — are set forth with 
 marvelous minuteness and power. The more especial 
 Messianic sections are 
 
 1. Isa. 2:2-4. The Final Messianic Period. 
 
 2. Isa. 4: 2-6. The Sprout of Jehovah. 
 
 3. Isa. Ch. 7. Immanuel. 
 
 4. Isa. 8 : 23-9 : 6. The Prince of Peace. 
 
 5. Isa. Chs. 11, 12. The Shoot of Jesse. 
 
 6. Isa. 19 : 16-25. Egypt, Assyria and Israel United. 
 
 7. Isa. 28 : 14-18. The Corner-Stone of Zion. 
 
 8. Isa. 33 : 13-24. Zion the City of the Great King. 
 
 9. Isa. Ch. 35. The Blessed Time Coming. 
 
 10. Isa. 42:1-9. The Chosen Servant of Jehovah. 
 
 11. Isa. 49:1-9. The Calling of the Servant of 
 Jehovah. 
 
 12. Isa. 50:4-11. The Mission of the Servant of 
 Jehovah. 
 
 13. Isa. 52:13-53:12. The Suffering and Saving 
 Servant of Jehovah. 
 
 14. Isa. 55: 1-5. The Invitation of the Covenant of 
 Redemption. 
 
 15. Isa. 61 : 1-3. The Glorious Words and Works of 
 the Servant of Jehovah. 
 
158 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 JEREMIAH. 
 
 I. ^smie.— Yermeyahu = Jeremiah = Jehovah raises 
 up. 
 
 II. Biography.— Jeremiah who flourished in the 
 Chaldean and Exilian period, belonged to the Kingdom 
 of Judah. See Table of Prophets. Jeremiah was born 
 at Anathoth, a small town in the territor^^ of Benjamin, 
 about three miles northeast of Jerusalem. Jeremiah 
 was of priestly descent. He received his call to the 
 prophetic ministry when yet a very young man, and 
 served in it for something over forty years. It would 
 seem that he was never married. The early part of his 
 life, and the earlier scene of a brief prophetic ministry 
 was spent in his native town of Anathoth. The main 
 scene of his ministry, and therefore life, w^as Jerusa- 
 lem. The closing scene of his prophetic ministry was 
 Egypt. In the time of Zedekiah he was imprisoned 
 and cast into a miry dungeon, from which he was lib- 
 erated by order of the king, though still confined to 
 the court of the prison. Indeed the life of the prophet 
 was spent during the most troublous times of the 
 Jewish State, i. e. during the reigns of the last kings 
 of Judah. 
 
 III. Ministry.— Jeremiah was called to the prophetic 
 ministry in the thirteenth year of the reign of King 
 Josiah. He continued in this ministry until the time 
 of the destruction of Jerusalem by the Chaldeans, and 
 even later. He prophesied under the reigns of Josiah, 
 Jehoahaz, Jehoiakim, Jehoiachin and Zedekiah. 
 During all this time Jeremiah took a most active and 
 effective part, in matters both external and internal, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 159 
 
 relative to the fate of his people and the attitude of 
 surrounding nations. Of these times of the prophet 
 his Book affords not only a graphic, but a more com- 
 plete historical account than does the Book of any 
 other prophets of his times. 
 
 IV. Chronolog-y.— The contemporary prophets of 
 Jeremiah were Zephaniah, Habakkuk, Ezekiel and 
 Daniel. The principal events were the following: 
 
 B. C. 6H9. Accession of .Tosiah. Reigned about 
 thirt3^-one years. 
 
 B. C. 620. Call of Jeremiah. 
 
 B. C. 609. Accession of Jehoaliaz. Reigned three 
 months. 
 
 B. C. 608. Accession of Jehoiakim. Reigned eleven 
 years. 
 
 B. C. ^04. Victory of Nebuchadnezzar over Pha- 
 raoh Necho at Carchemish on the Euphrates. 
 
 B. C. 597. Accession of Jehoiachin. Reigned four 
 months. 
 
 B. C. 597. First siege of Jerusalem, and deportation 
 of Jewish exiles. 
 
 B. C. 596. Accession of Zedekiah. Reigned ten 
 years. 
 
 B. C. 586. Destruction of Jerusalem by the Chal- 
 deans, and second deportation of Jewish exiles. 
 
 V. Genuineness.— The genuineness of the prophe- 
 cies of Jeremiah has been generally admitted. It is 
 difficult to see how it could be otherwise, inasmuch as 
 these prophecies are so interwoven with the events of 
 Jeremiah's life, and bear so strongly the stamp of Jere- 
 miah's age. Consequentl}^ only a comparatively^ lim- 
 ited number of isolated passages or small sections have 
 ever been called into serious question, and these have 
 
160 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 been questioned on insufficient grounds. In a number 
 of instances passages are found in the Hebrew text 
 that are wanting or omitted in the LXX. But the 
 mere fact that these verses are wanting in the LXX 
 furnishes no sufficient proof that they were wanting in 
 the Hebrew text before the time of Christ ; and cer- 
 tainly furnishes no sufficient reason for their being 
 rejected from the text. Examined in the light of the 
 context these passages omitted by the LXX are ail of 
 them well connected, and suitable to the occasion; 
 while on the other hand it is well known that tlie 
 LXX, not infrequently, took liberties with the text. 
 A few other sections in the prophecies of Jeremiah are 
 supposed by some critics to have been written or 
 rather revised by a later writer, the Deutero-Isaiah, 
 inasmuch as they are in his style; thus notably, e. g. 
 Chs. 30, 31, 33. But what possible object the^eutero- 
 Isaiah could have had in retouching portions of Jere- 
 miah to make these bear his style, is difficult to see. 
 True, there are a number of passages in Jeremiah that 
 strongly resemble Isaiah; but compaiing these pas- 
 sages, and comparing the styles of Jeremiah and 
 Isaiah, it becomes manifest that these passages are 
 original in Isaiah. The most natural conclusion then 
 is that Jeremiah used or imitated Isaiah. The last 
 chapter of Jeremiah, i. e. Ch. 52, constitutes an his- 
 torical appendix which describes the reign of Zedekiah, 
 the capture of Jerusalem and the events connected 
 with it, and the deliverance of Jehoiachin from impris- 
 onment in Babylon. This chapter was probably writ- 
 ten by another and later writer than Jeremiah, in view 
 of the words with which the preceding chapter, Ch. 
 51, closes, viz. " Thus far are the words of Jeremiah." 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 161 
 
 The Book of Jeremiah does not present the prophecies 
 of Jeremiah in the precise chronological order in which 
 they were delivered ; although the disorder is by no 
 means great in the arrangement of the proj)hecies and 
 the events. The chronological order is perhaps more 
 nearlj^ as follows: 
 
 Reign of Josiah, — Chs. 1-17. 
 
 Reign of Jehoiakim,— Chs. 18, 19, 20 ; 21 : 11-22 : 19 ; 
 25, 35, 36, 45, 46. 
 
 Reign of Jehoiachin, — Chs. 22 : 20-23 : 40. 
 
 Reign of Zedekiah,— Chs. 21:1-10; 24, 27-34, 37, 
 38, 39. 
 
 Chs. 40-44. Events after the capture of Jerusalem, 
 and Jeremiah's migration to Egypt. 
 
 Chs. 46-51. The prophecies respecting foreign na- 
 tions, having no special relation to the events of his 
 time, are placed at the end. 
 
 Ch. 52. Appendix by a later hand. 
 
 VI. Divisions and Contents.— The Book divides it- 
 self into two principal parts, according as the prophe- 
 cies relate to the prophet's own nation, or to foreign 
 nations, as follows : 
 
 I. Chs. 1-45. Prophecies relating to the prophet's 
 own nation, including 
 
 1. Ch. 1. The call of the Prophet. 
 
 2. Chs. 2-10. Rebukes, warnings and promises in 
 the times of Josiah. 
 
 3. Chs. 11-20. Rebukes, warnings and promises in 
 the times of Josiah, Jehoiakim and Jehoiachin. 
 
 4. Chs. 21-24. Rebukes, warnings and promises in 
 the times of Jehoiachin and Zedekiah. 
 
 5. Chs. 25-29. Prophecies uttered during the reigns 
 
 [lOJ 
 
162 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 of Jehoiakim and Zedekiah, placed together on account 
 of similarity of subject-matter, and treating of the 
 overthrow of Jerusalem, and the servitude of the 
 Chaldeans for seventy years.- This section is intro- 
 duced by the announcement of the judgment upon all 
 nations in the fourth year of Jehoiakim. 
 
 6. Chs. 30-33. Prophecies belonging to the latter 
 part of Zedekiah's reign, and making announcements 
 of salvation in reference to the future redemption and 
 glorification of Israel. 
 
 7. Chs. 34-39. Prophecies and narratives belong- 
 ing to the times of Jehoiakim and Zedekiah. 
 
 8. Chs. 40-45. Historical narratives treating of the 
 life and conduct of the Prophet among the people 
 left in the land by the Chaldeans after the destruction 
 of Jerusalem, both prior to and after their flight into 
 Egypt. 
 
 II. Chs. 46-52. Prophecies against foreign nations, 
 vis. — 
 
 1. Ch. 40. Against Egypt. 
 
 2. Ch. 47. Against the Philistines. 
 
 3. Ch. 48. Against Moab. 
 
 4. Ch. 49:1-6. Against Ammon. 
 
 5. Ch. 49:7-22. Against Edom. 
 
 G. Ch. 49:23-27. Against Damascus. 
 
 7. Ch. 49: 28-33. Against Kedar and Hazor. 
 
 8. Ch. 49 : 34-39. Against Elam. 
 
 9. Chs. 50, 51. Against Bab3don. 
 10. Ch. 52. Historical appendix. 
 
 VII. Theolog-y.— The distinguishing doctrine in Jere- 
 miah's theology, the distinguishing characteristic in his 
 conception of God is that of Love, — Jehovah's love. 
 But this implies also the reverse, viz. jealousy, wrath. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 163 
 
 Hence associated with Jeremiah's preaching setting 
 forth the tenderness and infiniteness of that love, we 
 find also awful rebukes, warnings, threatenings of 
 judgment directed to and against those who had out- 
 raged that love. Like Amos and Hosea, Jeremiah bases 
 his theology and preaching on the relation of Jehovah 
 to Israel. Jehovah had chosen Israel, entered into 
 covenant with Israel, brought them out of Egypt, led 
 them through the wilderness, and ever educated, de- 
 livered and blest them with infinite and almighty love. 
 Especially is Jeremiah the counterpart of his earlier co- 
 prophet in the Kingdom of Israel, Hosea. Like Hosea, 
 Jeremiah uses the figures of marriage and sonship to 
 describe the intimacy and intensity of the relationship 
 between Jehovah and Israel, and the duties implied in 
 that relationship. This relationship Israel had out- 
 rageously violated. The particular sins of which Israel 
 was guilt}^ are specified as idolatry, scepticism, immor- 
 ality, formalism, self-confidence, obduracy, moral de- 
 generac}' . On account of these Israel receives rebukes, 
 warnings, calls to repentance, threatenings of judg- 
 ment, inflictions of chastisements, and all these all the 
 more terrible because they proceed from outraged di- 
 vine love, — "The Wrath of the Lamb.'' But from 
 this sinful and desperate present, Jeremiah turns to a 
 more hopeful future, and to utter promises of consola- 
 tion and restoration. The fullest of these promises are 
 collected in Chs. 30-33, called the " Book of Comfort." 
 These promises set forth first of all one of Jeremiah's 
 favorite doctrines, viz. the indestructibility of Israel. 
 The judgment which must be infiicted is designed for 
 correction, not annihilation. Hence while the nation 
 must go into captivity, it must also through the ten- 
 
164 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 derness and eternity of Jehovah's love be restored from 
 captivity. With the restored people Jehovah will make 
 a New Covenant, a covenant written not on tables of 
 stones, but the tables of the heart, — an inward, spirit- 
 ual, everlasting covenant of pardon and grace. Jere- 
 miah also emphasizes the doctrines of personal respon- 
 sibility, spirituality of religion, while he describes the 
 spirituality and glory of the coming Messianic age 
 when, instead of the ark, Jehovah himself shall come 
 and dwell in the midst of his people. 
 
 VIII. Messianic— Jeremiah's view of the Messianic 
 King and Kingdom is perhaps less magnificent and com- 
 prehensive than Isaiah's, but none the less spiritual. 
 In that day of the true and final restoration of Israel 
 from all the lands of the diaspora, there shall be raised 
 up unto David a righteous Branch, who shall reign as 
 King, administer justice, save Israel, and be called 
 Jehovah our Righteousness. This King is styled 
 David. Not that Jeremiah expected David to return 
 in person, but, like Hosea, he looked for one of the 
 line of David who should fulfil the divine ideal. This 
 King should have priestly power. He should be the 
 righteousness of his people. He should thus reign a 
 righteous King over a righteous people. And ran- 
 somed Zion should once more be the wonder of all the 
 nations of the earth. The Messianic sections are 
 
 1. Jer3:14-18. Jerusalem Jehovah's Throne. 
 
 2. Jer. 23:1-8. Jehovah our Righteousness. 
 
 3. Jer. 33 : 14-26. Jehovah our Righteousness. 
 
 4. Jer. Chs. 30, 31. The Book of Comfort. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 165 
 
 THE LAMENTATIONS OF 
 JEREMIAH. 
 
 I. Name.— ^iTia/i = How ? The Book is so called 
 in the Hebrew Bible from its opening word. In the 
 LXX, Peshito-S3'riac and Vulgate it is called the 
 Lamentations of Jeremiah, or simply Lamentations, 
 whence the English name. 
 
 II. Position.— Being poetical, the Book in the He- 
 brew Bible stands in the Hagiographa just before 
 the Book of Ecclesiastes. The Peshito-Sja-iac and 
 Vulgate place the Book immediately after the Book 
 of the Prophet Jeremiah, from which, in the LXX, 
 it is separated by the Book of Baruch. The A. V. 
 also puts it after the Prophecy of Jeremiah, it being 
 connected therewith by unity of authorship, and unity 
 in historical matter. 
 
 III. Theme.— The Book of Lamentations is an elegy, 
 a dirge, written over the desolation of Jerusalem. It 
 has for its theme the calamities that befell the people 
 of Judah and Jerusalem in consequence of the siege 
 and capture of Jerusalem by the Chaldeans. 
 
 IV. Structure.— The Book of Lamentations has a 
 remarkably executed alphabetical arrangement. In 
 the first four chapters the verses are arranged 
 alphabetically^ In the first and second chapters each 
 verse consists of three members, and the verses begii 
 severally with the successive letters cf the Hebre^r 
 alphabet. In the third chapter the verses consist of 
 single members, and three verses, each having the 
 
166 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 same initial letter, are assigned to each successive 
 letter of the alphabet, so that the chapter contains in 
 all sixty-six verses. The fourth chapter is similar in 
 structure to the first, except that each verse has two 
 members onlj-. The fifth and last chapter is not 
 alphabetical, but consists nevertheless of twenty-two 
 verses, each formed by two somewhat short members. 
 V. Authorship— Date. —There is no statement in 
 the Old Testament as to the authorship of the Lamen- 
 tations. The LXX, the Vulgate and the most ancient 
 Jewish traditions ascribe the Book to the Prophet 
 Jeremiah. The evidences furnished by the Book itself 
 confirm rather than disprove the traditions; for 
 
 1. The same spirit, deeply sympathetic in national 
 sorrow, and ever ready to give unrestrained utterance 
 to its emotions, manifests itself strongly both in the 
 Lamentations and in Jeremiah. 
 
 2. In the Lamentations the national calamities are 
 referred to the same causes as in Jeremiah ; e. g. the 
 national sins, the guilt of prophets and priests, the 
 people's false confidence in the help of weak and 
 treacherous allies, etc. 
 
 3. Similar representations and figures occur in both 
 Lamentations and Jeremiah ; e. g. as to the virgin 
 daughter of Zion, the prophet's eyes flowing with tears, 
 the appeal for vengeance to the righteous Judge, the 
 expectation that the nations who exulted in the fall of 
 Jerusalem would be visited by a like desolation, etc. 
 
 •Jr. Many similarities of expression peculiar to the 
 Lamentations and Jeremiah. 
 
 From the vividness that characterizes the Book, it 
 would seem that it must have been written soon after 
 the events of which it treats. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 167 
 
 VI. Divisions and Contents.— 1. Ch. 1. In lan- 
 guage of deep pathos the author describes, and gives 
 expression to his sorrow for the desolations and miseries 
 of Judah and Jerusalem on account of their sins. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. He emphasizes the cause of the country's 
 sufferings, viz. Jehovah's just anger that has cast off 
 his people, his land, and his sanctuar}^ 
 
 o. Ch. 3. He sets forth his own and the ]3eople's 
 intense sufferings, while at the same time he expresses 
 hope and confidence in God, in God's compassion, and 
 the purposes of grace which God maj' have in this visi- 
 tation. 
 
 4. Chs. 4, 5. Zion'spastandpresent contrasted, and 
 the praj^er of the nation for Jehovah's compassionate 
 regard, and restoration to divine favor. 
 
 EZEKIEL. 
 
 I. Name.— Fe7ie2;/cae^=Ezekiel=God will strengthen. 
 
 II. Biography.— Ezeki el was the son of Buzi. He 
 was one of the captives who were carried with Jehoia- 
 chin in 597 B. C. into Babylonia, and was settled with 
 others at Tell-abib, by the river Chebar. He was a 
 priest, and as such belonged to the aristocracy of Jeru- 
 salem, who conslituted the majority of the first captivity 
 under Jehoiachin. He was married, as mention is made 
 of the death of his wife in the ninth year of the captiv- 
 ity. Ch. 24:18. He had a house of his own on the 
 Chebar in the land of his captivity. Chs. 3: 24; 8:1. 
 There is no account of his death. 
 
 III. Ministry.— Ezekiel received his prophetic call, 
 and began his prophetic ministry in the fifth year of 
 
168 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Jehoiachin's captivity, B. C. 592. Ch. 1 : 5. He con- 
 tinued to exercise his prophetic ministry for at least 
 twenty-two years, the latest date in his Book (29:17) 
 being twenty-two years after his call, i. e. B. C. 570. 
 Whether he prophesied for a longer period is not known. 
 Ezekiel probably began his prophetic ministry in the 
 thirtieth year of his age. Ch. 1:1. He exercised his 
 prophetic ministry among the Jews who had been 
 brought from Jndea, in the captivity of Jehoiachin, by 
 Nebuchadnezzar, King of Babylon, and dispersed in 
 different parts of his dominions. This deportation in 
 the reign of Jehoiachin was the second deportation of 
 exiles. A colon}^ of exiles had located near the river 
 Chebar, either a tributary of the Euphrates, or one of 
 the great canals constructed by Nebuchadnezzar. Ezek- 
 iel was dwelling in the midst of this colony of exiles, 
 when, in the fifth year of the captivity of Jehoiachin, 
 the heavens were opened to him, and he saw visions of 
 God, and the divine word was communicated to him. 
 
 IV. Aiitliorsliip— Date.— The genuineness of the 
 Book of Ezekiel is admitted by all critics, with scarcely 
 an exception. The Book throughout is uniform, closely 
 connected, w^hile the contents furnish abundant evi- 
 dences of the prophet's age and authorship. Driver 
 remarks, — " The dates of the several prophecies are in 
 many cases stated with precision. No critical question 
 arises in connection with the authorship of the Book, 
 the whole from beginniiig to end bearing unmistakably 
 the stamp of a single mind." 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents.— The prophecies of Eze- 
 kiel were delivered partly before and partly after the 
 destruction of Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar. This 
 fall of Jerusalem constitutes their central point. Before 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 169 
 
 this calamity EzekieFs chief object was to call to repent- 
 ance those who were living in careless security; to 
 warn them against indulging in the false hope that, hj 
 the help of the Egyptians, the Babylonian yoke would 
 be shaken off (17: 15, 17) ; and to assure them that the 
 destruction of Jerusalem was inevitable and rapidly 
 approaching. After the destruction of Jerusalem Eze- 
 kiel's chief object was to comfort the exiled Jews by 
 promises of future deliverance and restoration to their 
 own land. Between the call to repentance in the first 
 part, and the comfort given by the promises in the last 
 part, there occur the prophecies relative to foreign na- 
 tions in the middle part of the Book. The Book there- 
 fore falls into three principal divisions, viz : 
 
 1. Chs. 1-24. The call to repentance, and the ap- 
 proaching fall of Jerusalem. 
 
 2. Chs. 25-32. Prophecies on foreign nations. 
 
 3. Chs. 33-48. Israel's future restoration. 
 
 The contents of the Book may be brietly indicated as 
 follows : 
 
 1. Chs. 1-3. Ezekiel's call and commission to be 
 Prophet stated both in literal and symbolic form. 
 
 2. Chs. 4, 5. The impending destruction of Jerusa- 
 lem portrayed symbolically; and closing with an expo- 
 sition, in unmetaphorical language, of Jerusalem's guilt 
 and imminent judgment. 
 
 3. Ch. 6. Jerusalem and Judah alike guilty of idol- 
 atry that can only be eradicated by the desolation and 
 depopulation of their territorj'. 
 
 4. Ch. 7. A final denunciation of the kingdom, and 
 the certainty of the coming disaster. 
 
 5. Chs. 8-11. Vision of the guilt and punishment of 
 
l'^^> INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Jerusalem. Sixth year of the exile of Jehoiachin = 51)1 
 B. C. 
 
 6. Chs. 12-14. The certainty of the fall of Jerusalem 
 further established. Its cause, the nation's sinfulness. 
 Only the righteous delivered. 
 
 7. Chs. 15-17. Allegories, showing from different 
 points of view the nation's ripeness for judgment, where- 
 in Israel is compared to a vine-branch, to an adulteress, 
 while Ch. 1? setting forth lirst the result to be expected 
 from Zedekiah's disloyalty to his Babylonian masters, 
 closes with a prophecy of the restoration of the Davidic 
 kingdom in the future. 
 
 8. Ch. 18. The prophet emphasizes the doctrine 
 that every one is rewarded according to his own 
 doings, as against the complaint of the people that 
 they were suffering for the sins of their ancestors. 
 
 9. Ch. 19. A lamentation on the " princes," i. e. 
 the Jewish kings, and on the fall of the kingdom. Two 
 allegories; in the first the Davidic stock is compared 
 to a lioness, her two whelps being Jehoahaz and 
 Jehoiachin, whose fates are described; and in the 
 second it is compared to a vine planted, now uprooted, 
 its rods (Jehoahaz and Jehoiachin) destroyed, itself 
 planted in the wilderness ( = the exiles with Jehoia- 
 chin), and fire going out of the branches, destroying 
 the fruit ( = the suicidal policy of Zedekiah). 
 
 10. Ch. 20. While Israel's idolatry continues Jeho- 
 vah will not hearken, but the purifying judgments 
 must come. 
 
 11. Ch. 21. Jehovah's sword drawn against Jerus- 
 alem. 
 
 12. Ch. 22. Jerusalem's guilt, not only idolatry but 
 moral corruption and extending to all classes. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. l^^l 
 
 13. Ch. 23. Under an allegory similar to Ch. 16. 
 the prophet describes the past history of Samaria and 
 Jerusalem, representing' the two kingdoms by two 
 women, harlots, Oholah and Oholibah. 
 
 14. Ch. 24. The date is the ninth year of the exile, 
 B. C. 588, the tenth day of the tenth month, being 
 the day on which Jerusalem was invested by the 
 Chaldeans, 2 Ki. 25:1; Zech. 8:19. The chapter 
 contains a parable setting forth the siege of Jerusalem, 
 now commencing, and next the final issue of the siege, 
 viz. the forced evacuation of Jerusalem by its inhabit- 
 ants on account of their sins. The (chapter closes 
 with an account of the sudden death of the Prophet's 
 wife, which is made tlie medium of a lesson. 
 
 15. Chs. 25-32. Prophecies on foreign nations, viz. 
 Amnion, Moab, Edom, the Philistines, Tyre, Sidon, 
 and Egypt. 
 
 16. Chs. 33-39. The restoration of the land and 
 people; including — a. Ch. 33. The prophet, h. Ch. 
 
 34. The advent of the Messianic Kingdom, c. Chs. 
 
 35, 36. The land. d. Ch. 37. The people. e. 
 Chs. 38, 39. Jehovah's final triumph over the world. 
 
 17. Chs. 40-48. The constitution of the restored 
 Theocracy; including— a. Chs. 40-43. The Temple. 
 h. Chs. 44-46. The Temple and the People, c. Chs. 
 47-48. The land to be occupied by the restored dias- 
 pora. (Date twenty-fifth year of the exile = 572 B. C.) 
 
 VI. Theology.— Ezekiel emphasizes in particular 
 the glory and holiness of God. 
 
 1. The fundamental doctrine of Ezekiel's theology 
 was the glory of God. God's glory is the Old Testa- 
 ment expression for the revealed Presence of God 
 among his people. God's glory corresponds to his 
 
172 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 name, and his name is the summary of his nature, so. 
 far as he has revealed it. See 1 : 28 ; 3 : 23 ; 8:4; 9 : 
 3; 10:4, 18, 19; 43:2-7; 44:4, etc. 
 
 2. Jehovah's name which is the correlative of his 
 glory is the basis and the summit of everything. All 
 Jehovah's relation^ and dealings with Israel have been 
 and are and will be for liis name's sake. They are de- 
 signed to manifest his one unchangeable nature. See 
 20: 9, 14, 22; 36:22, etc. 
 
 3. Jehovah is holy, and will demonstrate his holi- 
 ness. His holiness is his essential Deity. It has been 
 profaned by his people.- He will sanctify it again in 
 Isreal and among the nations. See 20 : 41 ; 28 : 25 ; 36 : 
 23; 38:23, etc. 
 
 VII. Messianic— The Messianic sections in the Book 
 of Ezekiel are as follows : 
 
 1. Ezek. 11:14-21. Jehovah the Sanctuary of His 
 People. 
 
 2. Ezek. 17:22-24. The Cedar Sprout. 
 
 3. Ezek. 21:24-27. The Rightful King. 
 
 4. Ezek. 34: 11-31. The Faithful Shepherd. 
 
 5. Ezek. 36:22-36. The Purification. 
 
 6. Ezek. 37:7-14. The Resurrection. 
 
 7. Ezek. 37:21-28. The Reunion. 
 
 8. Ezek. Chs. 38, 39. The Judgment of God. 
 
 9. Ezek. Chs. 40-48. The Holy Land of the Restor- 
 ation. 
 
 DANIEL, 
 
 I. ^anie, —Daniijel = Daniel = God my Judge. The 
 Book takes its name from its author, Daniel, who is its 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 173 
 
 chief historical character, and whose prophecies it con- 
 tains. 
 
 II. Biography— Ministry.— Daniel was probably 
 born in Jerusalem. He was of noble if not of royal 
 birth. 1 : 3. He was carried away captive from Jeru- 
 salem to Babylon, at the first invasion of Judah by 
 Nebuchadnezzar, in the third year of the reign of 
 Jehoiakim. 1:1. The entire period of his exile, which 
 terminated onlj^ with his life, was spent at Babylon 
 and its vicinity, where he continued to occupy various 
 positions of honor, and to receive divine communica- 
 tions. He lived and ministered during the reigns of 
 Nebuchadnezzar and his successors, and down to the 
 third year of Cja^us. 10: 1. The time of his death is 
 uncertain. 
 
 III. Position.— The Book of Daniel is written partly 
 in Hebrew, partly in Chaldee. In the Hebrew Bible 
 the Book is now included in the Hagiographa. This, 
 however, has not always been its position in the 
 Hebrew Bible. (See below.) Its proper place is as 
 in the A. V., with the Prophets, after Ezekiel. 
 
 IV. Unity.— Eich horn and Berthold ascribed the 
 Book of Daniel to several authors. The unity of the 
 Book is now generall}^ conceded, i. e. it proceeded from 
 a single author. That this author, w^hora we take to be 
 Daniel himself, should in the first part of the Book 
 speak of himself in the third person, and in the rest of 
 the Book speak of himself in the first person, is per- 
 fectly consistent when the nature of the contents of the 
 Book is considered, for the first part of the Book is 
 historical while the second part is prophetical. 
 
 V. Genuineness.— About A. D. 300, Porphyry, a 
 pagan philosopher belonging to the school of the Neo- 
 
174 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Platoiiists, devoted the whole of the twelfth book of his 
 fifteen against Christianity, in the attempt to show- 
 that the Book of Daniel is spurious, and that it was 
 written in the time of Antiochus Epiphanes, B. C. 175- 
 164. After that the genuineness of the Book was not 
 seriously assailed until in the seventeenth century b}^ 
 Spinoza, a Dutch Jew; in the eighteenth century by 
 Anthony Collins, an English Deist; and then followed 
 Eichorn, Bleek, Ewald, Hitzig and others, together 
 with some of the critics of the present da}- in the same 
 line. While modern criticism does not altogether re- 
 ject the Book of Daniel as spurious, still itsauthorsliip 
 by Daniel is denied, while it is supposed to have been 
 composed under the persecution of Antiochus Epiph- 
 anes, B. C. 168 or 167. The grounds for this view and 
 answers to the same are 
 
 1. The position of the Book in the Jewish Canon, not 
 among the prophets, but in the Hagiographa, and among 
 the latest in the Hagiographa. But this implies that 
 the arrangement of the Books in the Hebrew Canon was 
 the same when the Canon was originally formed in the 
 time of Nehemiah, as it is now. This is denied. In 
 the time of Josephus, Origen and Jerome, Daniel was 
 classified among the prophets. It was not till about 
 the time of Jerome that the Rabbles of the school of 
 Tiberias re-arranged the Books of the Canon, and re- 
 moved Daniel from the prophets, and placed him in the 
 Hagiographa. It is very apparent that their anti-Mes- 
 sianic views led them to do this. Besides, if Daniel w^as 
 written in the time of Antiochus Epiphanes, it could no 
 more have been admitted in the Hagiographa either, for 
 that division was already closed. 
 
 2. It is objected that Jesus, the son of Sirach, who 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 175 
 
 wrote about 200-180 B. C, in his enumeration of Israel- 
 itish worthies, is silent as 1o Daniel. True, but he is 
 silent as to others also, and so the objection is without 
 weight. The son of Sirach mentions e. g. Enoch, Moses, 
 Joshua, but omits Jephthah, Gideon, Samson; mentions 
 Zerubbabel and Nehemiah, but omits Ezra and Mor- 
 decai, etc. On the other hand, other Apocryphal Books 
 confirm the fact that Daniel was the principal and only 
 prophet of the time in which he lived, and that the 
 Book which claims to be written by him and to which 
 they refer is genuine ; thus,l Maccabees, Book of Baruch, 
 Song of the Three Children, Susanna, Bel and the 
 Dragon. 
 
 3. It is alleged that there are especially Greek words 
 in Daniel that require us to put the composition of the 
 Book at a late date. But at the most there are only 
 two or three words that can be referred to a Greek 
 origin, and these words names of musical instruments. 
 But when we remember what was the inventive genius 
 of the Greeks in music, and what were the extensive 
 commercial relations of the Greek colonies more than 
 600 years B. C, it is difficult to see why we are com- 
 pelled to put the date of the composition of Daniel down 
 to 175 B. C. because of two or three Greek words 
 in it. 
 
 4. It is alleged that there are historical errors in 
 Daniel. That this charge is entirely unfounded see 
 more fully Pusey's Daniel the Prophet, Keil and De- 
 litzch commentary, Harman's Introduction, Sayce's 
 Fresh Light from the Ancient Monuments, etc. 
 
 On the other hand the historical reality of Daniel and 
 
 the genuineness of his Book receive confirmation from 
 
 1. The testimony of the prophet Ezekiel, e. g. 14: 14, 
 
1*^6 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 20; 28:3. When Ezekiel used this laiiguaoe Daniel 
 had been in Bab^don eighteen j^ears. 
 
 2. The testimony of Daniel who a number of times 
 throughout his Book claims to be its writer. 
 
 3. The testimony of Christ to " Daniel the prophet," 
 e. g. Matt. 24:15. 
 
 4. The testimony of its admission into the Canon. 
 
 5. The testimony of the Apocrypha, Josephus and 
 others. 
 
 6. The languge of the book of Daniel exactly repre- 
 sents Daniel's age and position. 
 
 7. The exact historical knowledge displayed in the 
 Book confirms the authorship by Daniel. 
 
 8. Confirmed by archaeological researches. 
 
 VI. Division and Contents.— The Book of Daniel 
 falls Into two principal divisions, viz. — 
 
 I. Chs. 1-6. Historical ; giving an account of im- 
 portant events at Babylon in the author's time. 
 
 II. Chs. 7-12. Prop/iefica? ; containing prophecies 
 respecting future empires, the Messiah's kingdom, and 
 resurrection of the dead. 
 
 A more detailed chronological analysis is the follow- 
 ing :— 
 
 1. Ch. 1. Introductory; Nebuchadnezzar the King. 
 B. C. 605. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. The image dream; Nebuchadnezzar's sec- 
 ond year. B. C. 603. 
 
 3. Ch. 3. The fiery furnace; Nebuchadnezzar's 
 twentieth year. About B. C. 580. 
 
 4. Ch. 4. Nebuchadnezzar's mania; his thirtieth 
 year. B. C. 570. 
 
 5. Ch. 5. Fall of Babylon. B. C. 538. Belshazzar 
 regent. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 177 
 
 G. Ch. 6. The lion's den. Darius the Mede. B. 
 C. 538. 
 
 7. Ch. 7. The four wild beasts. B. C. 555. Bel- 
 shazzar regent. 
 
 8. Ch. 8. Vision of the ram and he -goat. B. C. 
 553. Belshazzar regent. 
 
 9. Ch. 9. The seventy weeks. B. C. 538. Darius 
 the Mede. 
 
 10. Chs. 10-12. Final vision— the apocalypse. B. 
 C. 534. Cyrus King. 
 
 VII. Theolog-y.— The doctrines of the Book of Dan- 
 iel are closely connected with the writings of the exile, 
 and form a last step in the development of the ideas 
 of Messiah. Especially emphasized are the doctrines of 
 the Messiah, of angels, of the resurrection of the dead, 
 and the judgment of the world. 
 
 VIII. Messianic— The special Messianic sections of 
 the Book of Daniel are 
 
 1. Dan. 2 : 31-45 and 7 : 2-27. The Kingdom of the 
 Son of Man. 
 
 2. Dan. 9 : 24-27 and 12 : 1-13. The Seventy Weeks 
 — The Last Times. 
 
 HOSEA. 
 
 I. l^ame,—Hosheya = Hosea = Salvation. The 
 Book is so called from the name of its author. 
 
 II. Biography.— Hosea flourished in the Pre- Assyr- 
 ian period, and belonged to the Kingdom of Israel. 
 His time is about 790-724 B. C. A long life of activ- 
 ity of about sixty years extending from the latter part 
 
 [11] 
 
1*^8 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 of the reign of Jeroboam II. into the earlier part of the 
 reign of Hezekiah. He was the son of Beeri, and 
 probably a native of the Kingdom of Israel, in which 
 kingdom he exercised his prophetical office. Nothing 
 further is accurately known as to his personal, unof- 
 ficial history. 
 
 III. Ministry. -Hosea's ministry was exercised in 
 and for the benefit of the Kingdom of Israel, or 
 simply Ephraim as he frequently called the Northern 
 Kingdom, a rebuking designation. According to 1 : 1 
 Hosea's prophetical activity was of long duration, one 
 of the longest: — he saw Jeroboam's kingdom still in its 
 greatness, saw the rapid and anarchical changes of 
 dynasty that followed in the Northern Kingdom, saw 
 four successive reigns in the Southern Kingdom, and 
 saw the beginning of the Assyrian Period. Delivered 
 orally, Hosea's prophechies were probabl}" committed 
 by him to writing near the close of his prophetical 
 career, about 725 B. C. Judah is mentioned to be 
 censured with Israel, and again in contrast to Israel 
 as the house Jehovah would bless and deliver. 
 
 IV. Chronology.— The prophets contemporary with 
 Hosea were Amos and Isaiah. Contemporary kings 
 of Judah were Uzziah, Jotham, Ahaz, Hezekiah. 
 Contemporar}^ kings of Israel from Jeroboam II. to 
 subjection of Hosea by Shalmaneser. See Table of 
 Kings. 
 
 V. Composition.— Hosea is generally conceded to be 
 the author of the Book bearing his imme. The Book 
 is composed of the essential contents of discourses de- 
 livered by the Prophet at various times. It is, how- 
 ever, impossible to indicate the precise limits of each 
 of these individual discourses, or to give them any 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 1?9 
 
 exact chronological order. This however argues for 
 the unit}^ of the Book as written and transmitted, a 
 unity further confirmed by the orderly advance, ac- 
 cording to plan, from wrath and threatening to mercy 
 and promise; by the clearly defined strophical ar- 
 rangement of the Book; and by "The Word of the 
 Lord" in the superscription uniting the whole. 
 
 Hosea's style is concise, abrupt, poetical, powerful 
 in imager}'. There are peculiar idioms and unusual 
 constructions. The symbolical narrative, Chs. 1-3, 
 is prose, the rest poetico-rhythmical. The general 
 character of the prophecj^ is censure but terminating 
 with promises of Messianic import. 
 
 A number of coincidences between the prophecies 
 of Hosea and the Pentateuch show an acquaintance 
 with the latter. Hosea also refers a number of times 
 to the prophecies of Amos. A closer resemblance 
 exists between Hosea and the greater prophets than 
 between the greater prophets and any other of the 
 minor prophets. 
 
 VI. Historical.— The history of the times of Hosea 
 is similar to that of Hosea's elder contemporarj^ Amos. 
 Only in Hosea the corrupt conditions of the Northern 
 Kingdom is increased and aggravated to the extreme. 
 After the reign of Jeroboam H., when Hosea began to 
 prophesy the succession of kings, six in number, was 
 for the most part a succession of royal murders, and 
 anarch}^ in the State. Ungodlj^ alliances w ith heathen 
 nations were made, the rival factions in Israel in- 
 voking or buying the support alternately of Assyria 
 and Egypt. Thus, after an interregnum of eleven 
 j^ears Jeroboam II. was succeeded by his son Zechariah, 
 who, after a reign of six months, was murdered by 
 
180 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Shallum. Shallum after a month's reign was over- 
 thrown and assassinated by Menahem who sought to 
 strengthen himself by buying the support of the 
 Assyrian monarch Tiglath Pileser. 2 Ki. 15:17-22; 
 Hos. 8 : 9. About the same time another faction was 
 seeking aid from Egypt. Menahem was succeeded by 
 his son Pekahiah, who was murdered by his sucessor 
 Pekah, formerl}^ engaged with Rezin, King of Damas- 
 cus, in attacking the Davidic dynasty in Jerusalem. 
 Isa. Ch. 7. Pekah was deposed and murdered by his 
 successor Hoshea, the Assyrian king Tiglath Pileser 
 conspiring with him in this. Afterwards Hoshea 
 broke with the Assja-ian power, and opened treason- 
 able negotiations with So, king of Egypt, 2 Ki. 17:4, 
 with the result that Shalmaneser, Tiglath Pileser's 
 successor, laid siege to Samaria, which after holding 
 out for three years, capitulated to Sargon, who trans- 
 ported large numbers of Israelites to different parts 
 of Assyria, thus bringing the Northern Kingdom of 
 Israel to an end. In matters of religion as in matters 
 of state, corruption prevailed : — ingratitude, violence, 
 idolatry, immorality. Jehovah had been forsaken for 
 Baal; devotion Avas given to sensuous Canaanitish 
 cults ; the worldliness of the priests, and the sensual- 
 ity of the leaders intensified the public and gross 
 moral corruption; confidence was placed in enemies 
 instead of God ; the claims of law and religion were 
 set at nought;, schisms, homicides, fornications, per- 
 jury, theft, bribery, impiety fill up the dark catalogue 
 of Israel's sins, the swift and bloody forerunners of 
 Israel's impending destruction. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— According to its sub- 
 ject-matter the Book has a threefold division. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 181 
 
 I. Chs. 1-3. The Indictment. 
 II. Chs. 4-13. Tlie Argument. 
 
 III. Ch. 14. The Petition. 
 
 In the Indictment, Chs. 1-3, Israel is arraigned for 
 unfaithfuhiess to Jehovah, which unfaithfulness is 
 symbolically represented. Thus — a. Chs. 1 : 2-2 : 1 . 
 The prophet is directed to take to himself an unchaste 
 wife, Gomer, thus to represent the unfaithfulness of 
 Israel to Jehovah. The three children horn by the 
 prophet's unchaste wife are given symbolic names : — 
 Jezreel^ God will scatter, that is, in view of the ven- 
 geance to be exacted by the house of Jehu on the spot 
 where formerly Jehu had slain the house of Ahab. 
 2 Ki. Chs. 10, 11. Lo Ruha7nah = Not mercij, that is, 
 unfaithful Israel should be left without merc}^ or par- 
 don. Lo Ammi = Not my j^eople, that is, Jehovah 
 had rejected them. The rejection how^ever is not final 
 for a promise follows setting forth the union again of 
 Judali and Israel, and the restoration to the divine 
 favor, b. Ch. 2:2-23. The prophet's interpreta- 
 tion of his symbolic narrative in 1:2-2:1. Israel's 
 coming i3unisliment and its cause, vis. ingratitude 
 and idolatry ; this punishment being also a means of 
 reformation resulting in the restoration of Israel to 
 her Divine Husband, Avhen Jezreel, representing 
 Israel, shall verify the full meaning of the name, and 
 they shall become lolanted of God again in the earth, 
 for they shall obtain mercy and become his people. 
 c. Ch. 3. As in Ch. 1 Hosea again represents the 
 part of Jehovah toward his people. His love for and 
 conduct towards his adulterous wife, are, he declares, 
 symbols of Jehovah's love for the unfaithful Israel- 
 ites, and the means used hy Jehovah to bring them 
 
183 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 back to godliness, vis. the Avithholcling from them, 
 for a time, civil and religions institntions. 
 
 In Chs. 4-13, the Argnment sets forth Israel's guilt 
 and punishment. Thns— a. Chs. 4-7. Israel's flag- 
 rant moral corruption augmented by the worldliness 
 and sensuality of the nation's priests and leaders, re- 
 sulting in a national decline that can only end in a 
 national fall. b. Ch. 8. Announcement of judgment 
 about to be executed on the Northern Kingdom 
 together with its cause, idolatry and schism; a judg- 
 ment that has indeed already commenced to be exe- 
 cuted, and that Israel has brought upon itself by its 
 heathenish alliances and religious abuses, c. Chs. 
 9 : 1-11 : 11. A more minute description of the coming 
 judgment, viz. disaster, ruin, exile; with an intima- 
 tion of its cause, viz. national ingratitude and sin, 
 with a closing reference as to the responsibility of 
 restoration, d. Chs. 11:12-13:16. Again Israel's 
 sin, and Iioav they had withstood the influence of an- 
 cestral example, of the efforts and entreaties of Jeho- 
 vah, and therefore judgment must be executed. 
 
 In Ch. 14, the Petition, there is a closing appeal to 
 repent, whereupon Jehovah would come to them again 
 in rich blessings. 
 
 VIII. Theolog-y.— The fundamental and upi^ermost 
 doctrine in Hosea's theology is Jehovah's love ; — the 
 mighty and indestructible love of Jehovah for Israel, 
 which Avill not be satisfied until it has brought all Israel 
 into harmony with itself. God's love for his people is 
 the prominent thought, and God's loving kindness the 
 prominent expression Hosea uses to set foi-th the nat- 
 ural attitude of Jehovah to his people, and man's 
 natural attitude to his fellow-man, as the reflection of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 18:? 
 
 that love. Hosea emphasizes also a deep, spiritual 
 repentance, a radical change of heart, as the condition 
 of restoration. And while Hosea like Amos describes 
 the future as a time of restored prosperity and fertil- 
 ity, he especially emphasizes that the chief blessed- 
 ness of that time will consist in the perfect fellowship 
 of love and life between God and his people. 
 
 IX. Messianic— The Messianic element in Hosea is 
 mainly connected with the promised restoration of 
 Israel in the last times, and after a long period of 
 exile, and as set forth chiefly in the first three chap- 
 ters. Briefly this Messianic element embraces: — 1. 
 The restoration of the Northern Kingdom of Israel 
 after a long period of exile. 2. The reunion of Israel 
 and Judah into one nationality, 3. The submission 
 and obedience of this reunited people to David their 
 King, which finally can refer only to the Messiah. 
 4. The natural world is to share in the promised 
 blessing of that period. 5. All this is to take place 
 in "the latter days," i. e. the Messianic or closing 
 portion of the Messianic period. 
 
 JOEL 
 
 I. Name.— FoV/ = Joel = Jehovah is God. The 
 Book is so called from the name of its author. 
 
 II.— Biography.— Joel flourished in the Pre-Assj^rian 
 period, and belonged to the Kingdom of Judah. His 
 time limits are B. C. 890-840. Probably flourished 
 between B. C. 860-850, or in the earlier part of the 
 reign of Joash. He was the son of Pethuel, and lived 
 
184 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 in Judali. Nothing further is known of his personal 
 unofficial liistory. 
 
 III. Ministry.— Joel ministered in Judah. There is 
 no allusion to Israel. Probably resided and minis- 
 tered in Jerusalem. Tliere is a presumption that he 
 was a priest. He exercised great power in the nation. 
 He not only exhorts but imperatively demands re- 
 pentance on the part of the nation, and with the evi- 
 dent assurance that he will be obeyed. 
 
 IV. Contemporaries.— King of Judah, Joash. Kings 
 of Israel, Jehu and Jehoahaz. High Priest, Jehoida. 
 Proi)hets, Jonah and Amos. Philistines and Plioeni- 
 cians are referred to as enemies dealing in Jewish 
 slaves. Edomites, from the same stock, also enemies, 
 independent, subdued later. Sabeans of Arabia 
 Felix. Greeks of Asia Minor. No reference to 
 Assyria. 
 
 V. Composition,— Aid] lorshq), Date, etc. It is gen- 
 erally admitted that Joel is the author of the Book 
 bearing his name. The unity of the Book is attested 
 in all its parts and contents, in subject-matter, style, 
 etc. A question has arisen in respect to the date of 
 the composition of the Book. It must be placed 
 either very early or very late. In support of the 
 earlier date, i. e. about B. C. 860-850, there are these 
 arguments : 1 . The position of Joel in the series of 
 the Minor Prophets raises a presumption in favor of 
 this early date. 2. Tliere is no mention of Syria, 
 Assyria and Babylon among the enemies of Judah, a 
 fact which points to a time when these nations had 
 not yet come into conflict Avith Judah. On the other 
 hand Amos threatens the Syrians with punishment, 
 and foresees that Israel will fall a prey to Assyria, so 
 
INTKODUCTION OUTLINES. 185 
 
 that Joel antedates Amos. 3. The times and condi- 
 tion of affairs described in Joel precisely suit this 
 earlier date and the reign of Joash, while they do not 
 at all apply to the later date; thus, e. g. the influ- 
 ence of the priests, the regularity of the temple ser- 
 vices, the spiritual nature of religion^ the absence of 
 any denunciation of i^articular sins, etc. 4. The 
 earlier date agrees with the references to foreign 
 nations, the latter does not. 5. Amos makes use of 
 Joel. That Joel and not Amos is the original is evi- 
 dent from the fact that the passages in question are 
 firmly imbedded in the context of Joel, and belong to 
 his circle of ideas, whereas they are not in Amos. 
 Compare Jo. 3:10 with Am. 1:2; Jo. 2:12 with Am. 
 4:0, etc. 0. The argument from style favors the 
 early rather than the late date. 
 
 VI. Historical.— The historical occasion of the Book 
 of Joel was a terrible visitation of Judah by locusts 
 and drought. This visitation was not prophetico- 
 allegorical, but present and actual. Joel describes 
 the destruction effected, views it as the beginning of 
 a great judgment day of Jehovah, calls ui^on the 
 priests to ax)point a day for national humiliation and 
 prayer. This was evidently done, and by divine 
 authorit}', as he promises the people richest blessings 
 for the present and future, and complete deliverance 
 from all their enemies. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— The book has a two- 
 fold division : — 
 
 I. Chs. 1:1-2:17. Plagues. 
 II. Chs. 2 : 19-3 : 21. Promises. 
 The two parts are joined together by the historical 
 statement in 2: 18. 
 
186 ' INTKODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 1. Plagues. The plagues are a divine judgment. 
 a. The plague of locusts and drought. This chapter is 
 not a prediction. The narrative of the locusts is not 
 an allegory, or a figurative description of the hosts of 
 Avar. It is the historical record of that wliich actually 
 took place. 1 : 4 does not describe different insects, 
 but all locusts appearing in different and successive 
 portions of a season or year. Hence the severity of 
 the judgment, extending over an entire year. The 
 description of the locusts is accurate as well as 
 graphic. Those afflicted by the plague are called 
 upon to mourn the desolation of the land. The worst 
 feature of the plague is the necessity for suspending 
 the daily sacrifices. 'J'herefore the priests required to 
 mouru and the people to join them. h. Ch. 2:1-17. 
 The plague a token of a coming judgment day of 
 Jehovah.- The locusts Jehovah's army doing his will. 
 Threatened judgment may be averted by repentance. 
 Hence humiliation and prayer. 
 
 2. Promises, a. For the present (2:18-27), God 
 will deliver his people; evil repaired; new blessings. 
 h. For the future (2 : 19-3 : 21), promises of greater 
 things. The day of the Lord coming with salvation to 
 Israel, terror to Israel's foes. This day introduced by 
 the outpouring of God's spirit. Signs in heaven and 
 earth. Safety in Zion. Nations found guilty and pun- 
 ished. Gathering in the valley of Jehosaphat. Na- 
 tions destro3^ed. Israel's eternal salvation and blessed- 
 ness. 
 
 VIII. Theology.-The doctrines emphasized by Joel 
 are^ 
 
 1. Jehovah's judgeship over the whole earth. 
 
 2. Repentance and obedience avert punishment. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 187 
 
 3. The blessedness of the redeemed. 
 
 IX. Messianic— General in character. The Messianic 
 salvation is bound up in the existence of the Kingdom 
 of Judah. The Messiah is not defined as of any dis- 
 tinct human personality, but Jehovah is specified as 
 the author of salvation. The promise of the outpour- 
 ing of God's spirit finds its essential fulfilment in the 
 Christian Church only, especially in the first establish- 
 ment of it, though at first the promise related to Judah. 
 It is indicated that members of other nations shall also 
 partake in the Messianic promise. 
 
 AMOS. 
 
 I. Name.— .4 ??;o.s = Burden. The Book is so called 
 from its author. 
 
 II. Biography.— Amos lived in the Pre- Assyrian 
 period, lie was a native of the Kingdom of Judah, 
 but ministered in the Kingdom of Israel. His time is 
 B. C. 810-782. Latter part of this period marks the 
 time Amos prophesied ; i. e. latter part of Jero- 
 boam's and early part of Uzziah's reign, these kings 
 being contemporaries about twenty-seven years. See 
 Table of Kings. Amos was a native of Judah, and of 
 the town of Tekoa, twelve miles south of Jerusalem. 
 
 III. Ministry.— The prophetic ministry of Amos was 
 in and to the Kingdom of Israel. Only the passages 
 2:4, 5 and 6 : 1 directly concern Judah and Jerusalem. 
 The execution of his mission was in Bethel whose 
 priests he greatly offended by his prophetic utterances; 
 so much so that Amaziah the priest sent word to King 
 Jeroboam that Amos was conspiring against him, at 
 
188 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the same time exhorting Amos to flee into Judea and 
 prophesy. The prophecies of Amos delivered orally 
 wei"e probably committed to writing after his return to 
 the Kingdom of Judah. 
 
 IV. Contemporaries.— King of Judah, Uzziah, and 
 of Israel, Jeroboam II. See Table of Kings. Pro- 
 phets Joel and Jonah. High Priest at Bethel, Ama- 
 ziah. Surrounding nations introduced are Damascus, 
 Philistia, Tyre, Edom, Ammon, Moab. 
 
 V. Composition.— Amos is generall}^ conceded to be 
 the author of the Book bearing his name, and the 
 unit}^ of the Book is likewise generally admitted. All 
 this is evident not alone from the superscription, but 
 from quotations made from the Book, the relation and 
 interdependence of parts, historical unity and contin- 
 uity, subject, style, etc. Though not by profession 
 or descent a prophet, but a shepherd, still Amos like 
 the shepherd David was not uncultured. His writ- 
 ings show marked literary finish and force. His 
 shepherd life was of great suggestiveness to him in 
 the language and imagery employed. He is remark- 
 ably orderly in his literary constructiveness and de- 
 velopment; e. g. the seven surrounding peoples taken 
 up in turn, and the series of predictions, each con- 
 structed after the same pattern, setting forth their sins 
 and doom. So following this the three successive 
 chapters, 3, 4, 5, each beginning with " Hear this 
 word." And so the series of symbolic visions in the 
 last three chapters. The symbolism or imagery of 
 Amos is extensive and varied. He makes large use 
 of the Pentateuch. On the other hand extensive use 
 was made of Amos by the prophets following, especi- 
 ally Hosea and Jeremiah. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 189 
 
 VI. Historical.— The liistorical occasion of tlie pro- 
 phecy of Amos was llie low moral and religious status 
 of the times, as observable and notorious not only in 
 the surrounding nations but especially in the North- 
 ern Kingdom of Israel. Idolatry, injustice, oppres- 
 sion, corruption, unchastity, formalism call forth 
 rebukes, admonitions, and threatenings of divine 
 punishment and overthrow. The terrors of impend- 
 ing judgment close with the announcement of the 
 final exaltation of the Theocracy. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— The Book of Amos 
 consists of two principal parts, viz. — 
 
 1. Chs. 1-6. Prophetical discourses of a threaten- 
 ing character. 
 
 1. Chs. 7-9. Visions and symbols followed by 
 their interpretations, and other prophetical announce- 
 ments. 
 
 Partfirst,Chs. 1-6, contain— a. 1:1. Preliminary his- 
 torical statement, h. Threatening discourses against 
 the surrounding nations, vis. Syrians of Damas- 
 cus (1 : 2-5) ; the chief cities of the Philistines (1 : 6-8) ; 
 Tyre (1 : 9, 10) ; Edom and its chief cities (1 : 11, 12) ; 
 the Ammonites (1 : 13-15) ; Moab (2 : 1-3). These na- 
 tions are charged with cruelty against the Israelites, 
 and their destruction is threatened, c. A charge of 
 disobedience and idolatry against Judah and the judg- 
 ment therefor, d. The statement concerning Judah 
 forms a transition to the principal prophecies that 
 follow on to 6 : 14 all directed against Israel (excepting 
 perhaps the single allusion to the careless in Zion in 
 6:1). These discourses of Amos against Israel are 
 directed against the moral and religious crimes such 
 as idolatrv, unchastitv, worldliness, the oppression of 
 
190 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 the pool- by the rich, corruption in the administration 
 of justice, and formalism in the service of Jehovali. 
 He follows these censures with warnings to turn back 
 to Jehovah, and with threatenings of divine punish- 
 ment, overthrow, deportation, captivity in a land l)e- 
 yond Damascus. 
 
 Part second, Chs. 7-9, contain — a. 7:1-9. Vision 
 representing the overthrow of Israel and of the house 
 of Jeroboam. Locusts, hre and a plumbline the fig- 
 ures employed to represent this overthrow, h. 7:10- 
 17. Hostility of Amaziah to Amos ; Amos warns 
 Amaziah, and announces Israel's captivity, c. 8:1-3. 
 Vision of a basket of fruit showing Israel to be ripe 
 for destruction, d. 8:4-14. The punishment of those 
 who oppressed the poor, carried on a shameful trade, 
 gave themselves to idoUitry, and uijon whom Jehovah 
 would bring affliction, mourning, hunger and thirst. 
 e. 9 : 1-10. Vision of the Lord standing on the altar. 
 He orders a destrnction from which there is no escape. 
 Jehovah will blot out the sinful kingdom, sinners shall 
 perish, the house of Israel shall be dispersed among 
 the nations but the house of Jacob shall not altogether 
 be destroyed. /. 9:11-15. Closing promise that Je- 
 hovah will reinstate the fallen tabernacle of David ; 
 Israel shall i)ossess the remnant of Edom, and the 
 nations called by Jehovah's name; the land shall be 
 abundantly blest; the scattered ones of the people 
 restored; the overthrown cities rebuilt; the Theocracy 
 reestablished. 
 
 VIII. Theolog-y.-The fundamental doctrine in the 
 theology of Amos is the sovereignty of Jehovah in 
 nature and in history. His conception of God is re- 
 markable for its pure, ethical monotheism. As to man 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 191 
 
 he is a sinner, whose sins are offensive to God to whom 
 he must turn forsaking his sins. An intimate, work- 
 ing, spiritual nnion must be established, and in which 
 alone is to be found blessedness. The prophet's views 
 of religion are marked by a deep spirituaIit^^ The 
 alternative of not seeking Bethel, Gilgal or Beersheba 
 is not the seeking of Jerusalem but the seeking of 
 Jehovah, and so live. The alternative of idolatrous 
 service is not ceremonial service, but the service of 
 heart and life. 
 
 IX. Messianic— The Messianic element in the Book 
 of Amos is composed of the promise that forms the 
 conclusion to the Book, viz. in 9:11-15, which sets 
 forth 
 
 12. The Restoration of the Davidic King- 
 Its divine up-building. 
 Its divine out-building. 
 The Restoration of the cursed but chosen 
 
 Constant productivity. 
 
 Abundant productivitj^ 
 15. The Restoration of the Diaspora. 
 Re-colonization. 
 Immovable Possession. 
 
 1. 
 
 vv. 11 
 
 dom, 
 
 
 a. 
 
 V. 11. 
 
 h. 
 
 V. 12. 
 
 2. 
 
 V. 13. 
 
 land 
 
 
 a. 
 
 V. 13=\ 
 
 b. 
 
 V. ld\ 
 
 3. 
 
 vv. 14, 
 
 a. 
 
 V. 14. 
 
 b. 
 
 V. 15. 
 
 OBADIAH. 
 
 I. l!(auie,— Obadyah = Obadiah =: Servant of Jeho- 
 vah. The Book is so called from the name of its au- 
 thor. 
 
192 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 II. Biography and Ministry.— O bad i ah who flour- 
 ished ill the Pre-Assyrian period belonged to the King- 
 dom of Jiidah. He lived and prophesied during the 
 reign of King Jehorani, B. C. 890-850. Of the pro- 
 phet himself nothing further is positively known. 
 
 III. Composition.— Obadiah is generally admitted 
 to be the author of the Book bearing his name: — 
 the smallest of the prophetic Books. Question has 
 arisen however in regard to the date of the composi- 
 tion inasmuch as it seems to be necessary to place 
 Obadiah as the earliest of the prophets, or assign his 
 prophecy a date about the time of the destruction of 
 Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar. The weight of argu- 
 ment is in favor of the early date, and for the follow- 
 ing reasons : — 
 
 1. The comparison of Obadiah's prophecy with Jer. 
 49 : 7-22, also against Edom. Examining these two 
 prophecies it is evident that one has copied or quoted 
 the other. If Jeremiah is regarded as the original 
 then we have the anomaly of a prophet appearing 
 with a single chapter of matter, called a vision, i^rin- 
 cipally borrowed from a great prophet living just be- 
 fore him. Certainly that makes Obadiah's prophetic 
 status somewhat questionable. On the other hand, if 
 Obadiah is the original, there is nothing strange in 
 Jeremiah's borrowing from him in his great prophetic 
 Book, just as he has borrowed from Isaiah. More- 
 over the prophecy in Obadiah is a w^ell-aiTanged whole, 
 whereas in Jeremiah the same matter is broken up and 
 given in a less forcible and obvious order. For the 
 above reason it is also highly improbable that both 
 Jeremiah and Obadiah are borrowing from a still 
 older prophet. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 193 
 
 2. The capture of Jerusalem to which Obadiah re- 
 fers cannot be that made by Nebuchadnezzar, for he 
 carried away the people of Jerusalem to Babylon. 
 The language of Obadiah refers to a very different 
 captivity, see ver. 20. This undoubtedly refers to the 
 capture of the city in the reign of Jehoram, about B. 
 C. 887, when the Philistines and the Arabians made 
 an irruption into Judah and Jerusalem, and took cap- 
 tives, and carried off valuable property (2 Chron. 21: 
 16, 17). To this Joel also seems to refer (3 : 4-6). He 
 represents the children of Judah and Jerusalem as sold 
 to the Grecians. The captivity of Jerusalem in Sep- 
 harad (Obad. 20) — a district in or about Asia Minor — 
 seems to be that part of the people carried away at 
 that time. It therefore seems best to refer the plund- 
 ering of Jerusalem, to which reference is made in 
 Obadiah, to the reign of Jehoram, and the prophecy to 
 the time immediately subsequent, about B. C. 880. 
 
 3. This earlj^ date for Obadiah agrees with the allu- 
 sions to his prophecy in Joel, and with the references, 
 to Edom in Amos. Joel was evidently familiar with 
 the words or writings of Obadiah, e. g. compare Joel 
 2 : 32 with Obad. 17 ; Joel 3 : 3 with Obad. 11 ; Joel 3 : 
 7, 8, with Obad. 15; Joel 3: 17 with Obad. 11, 17, etc. 
 
 IV. Historical.— The historical occasion of the pro- 
 phecy of Obadiah was some recent capture of Jerusa- 
 lem, in which ihe Edomites had been guilty of the 
 grossest insult and injury to Judah. It does not ap- 
 pear that they were themselves the principal assail- 
 ants, but they had shown a most unbrotherl}^ spirit by 
 their malignant delight at Judah's calamity, by sharing 
 in the plunder of the cit}^ by intercepting the fugi- 
 [12] 
 
194 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 tives, and slaughtering them or surrendering them to 
 be sold as slaves. 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents. — 1. vv. 1-10. The na- 
 tions are summoned by Jehovah's messengers to make 
 war upon Edom. He has determined to humble 
 Edom's pride. Edom will be plundered by enemies, 
 deserted by allies, and its counsellors and heroes over- 
 thrown ; all because of Edom's inhuman treatment of 
 his brother Jacob. 
 
 2. vv. 11-14. For in the day of Judah's humilia- 
 tion and calamit}^, Edom maliciously exulted, and 
 shared in the plunder. 
 
 3. vv. 15-21. But Jehovah's day of judgment for 
 all the nations is at hand, and Edom will not escape a 
 just retribution. A remnant will remain in Jerusalem; 
 Jerusalem will no more be defiled by invaders; Judah 
 and Israel will possess Edom and Philistia ; Jehovah's 
 Kingdom will be forever established. 
 
 VI. Theolog-y— Messianic— O bad iah's theology em- 
 phasizes 
 
 1. Jehovah's enemies shall be defeated. 
 
 2. Jehovah's people shall prevail. 
 
 3. Jehovah's Kingdom shall be established. 
 
 The Messianic thought is contained in the closing 
 words of the prophecy which set forth the final result to 
 which all Isreal's history pointed, viz. the Kingdom 
 shall be Jehovah^ s. 
 
 JONAH, 
 
 1. Name.— Fo?ia7i = Jonah = A Dove. The Book is 
 so called from the name of its author. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 195 
 
 II. Biog-raphy.— Jonah, who flourished in the Pre- 
 Assyrian i^eriod, belonged to the Kingdom of Israel. 
 He lived and ministered during the reign of Jeroboam 
 II. He was the son of Amittai, and was born about B. 
 C. 859. He was a native of Gath-Hepher, a town of 
 Lower Galilee in Zebulon. The only incident of 
 Jonah's life recorded outside of this Book, and its New 
 Testament reference is mentioned in 2 Ki. 14:25. 
 
 III. Ministry.— Jonah's prophetic ministry covered 
 quite a long period, probably not less than 825-790 B. 
 C. His visit to Nineveh was only a single event in 
 his official career. He doubtless lived a life of faithful 
 prophetical activity in the ungodly and idolatrous 
 kingdom of the Ten Tribes. This certainly seems to 
 be implied b}' the waiv = ancl, with which the Book 
 begins, as if other calls and ministrations had pre- 
 ceded this one. A single allusion to his ministry in 
 the Kingdom of Israel is that in 2 Ki. 14: 25 where he 
 foretold to Jeroboam II. the success of his wars for the 
 restoration of the boundaries of Israel upon which 
 Hazael, King of Syria, had encroached. He is sent on 
 a mission unique in the history of the ancient economy, 
 viz. to preach judgment and repentance to the Gentile 
 Ninevites. Not from fear, but from exclusiveness 
 (4:2) he attempted to flee to the commercial port of 
 Tarsus in Celicia. Arrested by a miracle he returned, 
 obeyed, preached. The failure of his prophecy on 
 Nineveh was only apparent while it was really a signal 
 success. The royal edict calls the Ninevites to re- 
 pentance, while discontented Jonah is rebuked. 
 
 IV. Contemporaries.— King of Israel, Jeroboam II. 
 Kings of Judah, Amaziah and Uzziah. Prophets, 
 Joel and Amos. 
 
196 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 V, Composition.— Not only is Jonah historical, but 
 the Book that bears his name is also historical. It is 
 not fiction, allegory, myth or legend, but an ac- 
 count of that which actually took place, genuine his- 
 tory, of deep prophetico-symoolic and typical signifi- 
 cance. Ancient Jews and Christians regarded the 
 Book as real history. The Book of Tobit so regards it 
 (14:4, 8). In making Jonah and his history a type 
 of his own resurrection, Christ affixes the seal of his 
 authority to the Book. Still while the Book records an 
 actual history, it is not solely or chiefly history. The 
 compilers of the Canon considered the Book a pro- 
 phetical one. The historical omissions are too great 
 for the Book to be simply a pure history. The Book is 
 prophetical, and only those historical events are fur- 
 nished which are required as the basis of the pro- 
 phetical teaching. Moreover the unity of the Book is 
 actually and externally indivisible. The word " sec- 
 ond" in 3: 1 connects both halves in the most intimate 
 manner. While Jonah is not distinctly declared to be 
 the author of the Book, still that is in all probability 
 the fact. He probably wrote the Book shortly after 
 his return from Nineveh. His prayer of thanks- 
 giving in Ch. 2, uttered from the bowels of the fish, 
 and reproduced essentially, though not perhaps liter- 
 ally, afterward, follows the Psalms in structure and is 
 filled with reminiscences of passages from the Psalms. 
 That Jonah should be the author of the Book and still 
 speak of himself in the third person is in strict accord- 
 ance with the manner of the other prophets who also 
 speak of themselves in the third person except when 
 they speak of God's revelations to them. The so-called 
 Aramaisms of the Book are all genuine Hebrew words 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 197 
 
 or forms except the one Aramaic name for the decree 
 of the King of Nineveh which Jonah naturally heard 
 in Nineveh itself. The abbreviated form of the rela- 
 tive pronoun {sJil or sh for aslier) in 1 : 7 by no means 
 indicates an exilic or post-exilic date, as this abbrevi- 
 ated form of the relative is found not only in The 
 Song of Songs, and in Deborah's Song (Judges 5:7), 
 but is also found on a beautifullj^- preserved weight, 
 recently discovered on the site of Samaria, which bears 
 an inscription in characters iDointing to the 8th century 
 B. C, and where precisely this same form, shI, of the 
 relative occurs. 
 
 VI. Historical.— The narrative of the Book indicates 
 histor}^ Not all the details but the principal facts in 
 this history are given. The immediate occasion of 
 this histor}' of Jonah's mission to Nineveh was the 
 great wickedness of Nineveh, and the just judgment 
 of God to be visited therefor, or repentance shown 
 through the preaching of Jonah. Its historical scope, 
 however, embraces the entire heathen world, and the 
 true attitude of Israel, of the people of God in all 
 times, to the world. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— The Book contains 
 two principal divisions, united by the historical state- 
 ment in 3:1, viz : 
 
 1. Chs. 1, 2. The Man. 
 
 2. Chs. 3, 4. The Mission. 
 
 In the contents we have — 1. Ch. 1. The Prophet 
 Jonah receives divine orders to proceed to Nineveh, 
 and declare judgment against it for its great wicked- 
 ness. Foreseeing, according to 4:2, a possible re- 
 pentance on the part of the Ninevites, and a conse- 
 quent sparing and blessing on the part of God, and 
 
198 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 selfishly considering God's spiritual blessings to be 
 exclusively for the benefit of Israel, Jonah attempts to 
 evade the divine command by fleeing to Tarshish. A 
 storm arises, the heathen crew pray, and sleeping 
 Jonah is awakened. The crew regard the storm as a 
 sign of divine wrath, and cast lots to detect the guilty 
 person. The lot falls upon Jonah, who confesses, and, 
 upon his own advice, is cast into the sea. 2. Ch. 2. 
 A large fish swallows Jonah, but he is preserved in 
 life and thanks God. On the third day he is vomited 
 out on the land. 3. Ch. 3. The divine command 
 comes again to Jonah, who obeys, and in Nineveh pro- 
 claims its destruction for its sins. Headed by the 
 King, the Ninevites observe a public fast, whereupon 
 Jehovah determines to withdraw his threatening. 4. 
 Ch. 4. Jonah, selfish of the divine blessings, and 
 feeling that the effect of the divine purpose to remit 
 the calamity would put him in a false light, is dis- 
 pleased. His displeasure is increased by the incident 
 of the plant that shot uf), shaded him, and then was 
 destroyed in the night. The next day's heat angers 
 him. He pities the plant — Jehovah pities the city. 
 
 VIII. Tlieolog-y.— The teaching of Jonah is mani- 
 fest, viz : 
 
 1. Sin incurs the divine judgment. 
 
 2. Repentance secures the divine remission. 
 
 3. God's spiritual blessings are for the world. 
 
 4. They who have must give those blessings or be 
 punished. 
 
 IX. Messianic— The Book of Jonah is a symbolical 
 one after the analogy of Isa. Ch. 5, and Ezek. Ch. 16. 
 The Book is typical especiall}^ in Ch. 2 where Jonah is 
 a t3^pe of Christ according to Mat. 12 : 40. The Book is 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 199^ 
 
 prophetical aud symbolical. Jonah represents Israel! 
 Nineveh represents the heathen world as afterwards 
 did Babylon and Edom. Israel has the mission of 
 preaching God's Word to the heathen world. He seeks 
 to flee from his callini^. God reproves and punislies 
 Israel, because he in whom all the families of tlie earth 
 were to be blessed had neglected his vocation. Israel 
 is restoied and recommissioned to preach that the 
 heathen world shall perish. Israel doubts, delays, 
 despairs and therefore God corrects Israel. But as 
 the sparing of Nineveh came before the correction of 
 Jonah, so the type as to the future is that the multi- 
 tude of the heathen world shall be gathered in before 
 the Jewish people who must first be humbled and 
 broken. In the fulfilment of his mission Jonah is a 
 type of Israel, and Israel a type of Christ. Mat. 
 12:40. As the sparing of Jonah and his preaching of 
 repentance was a sign to the Ninevites which must 
 bring them to faith or judgment, so the preservation 
 of Christ in the grave, and the preaching of the Risen 
 One were a sign to the world of judgment and of 
 faith. 
 
 MICAH 
 
 I. 'Nan\e,—2Ieecah = Micah = Who is like Jehovah? 
 The Book is so called from the name of its author. 
 
 II. Biograpliy.— Micah who belonged to the King- 
 dom of Judali, lived in the Assyrian period. His 
 date is about 758-710 B. C. He was a young contem- 
 porary of Isaiah and Hosea. In 1 : 1 he is called "the 
 Morashtite," i. e. he was a native of Moresheth, a de- 
 
200 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 IDendeiicy of Gath, in the maritime plain, abont 
 twentj^ miles soutliwest of Jernsalem. Like Amos, 
 Micali Avas a conntryman, a "man of the peojole," 
 born of obscure parentage, his father's name not be- 
 ing mentioned. As in the case of many of the other 
 prophets little is known of the circumstances of 
 Micah's life other than as indicated in his iDrophecy. 
 II r. Ministry.— According to the superscription 1:1, 
 Micah proj^hesied under the reigns of Jotham, Ahaz 
 and Hezekiah, kings of Judah. Micah's time limits 
 would therefore be about B. C. 756-697, i. e. a period 
 of fifty-nine years. The minimum limit of his minis- 
 tr}^ would be sixteen years, i. e. from the death of 
 Jotham to the accession of Hezekiah. But the pro- 
 phecy itself furnishes a more accurate estimate of the 
 duration of Micah's prophetic ministr}^ inasmuch as 
 1 : 6 was evidently uttered prior to the fall of Samaria 
 which took place in B. C. 722, while according to the 
 notice in Jeremiah 26: 17 sq. Micah 3: 12 was spoken 
 during the reign of Hezekiah. Micah's prophetic 
 message was directed both to Israel and Judah, but 
 for the most part to his country Judah. AYhile Isaiah 
 the statesman-prophet at the capital rebuked the 
 courses and foretold the destinies of nations, kings 
 and nobilities, at the same time emj)hasizing in an 
 unrivaled manner the great truths of religion and 
 uttering glorious promises, — Micah on the other hand 
 spoke as a man of the people, in sympathy with 
 the common x)eoi^le in their sufferings, attacking the 
 wrong like Isaiah, but otherwise less interested in 
 matters of state, foreign policies, etc. His ministry 
 therefore was more exclusively that of an ethical and 
 religious teacher. At the same time Micah had a 
 
INTKODUCTION OUTLINES. 201 
 
 powerful influence at the capital, and gave weightiest 
 evidence of his prophetic ministry as a religious 
 teacher inasmuch as he was largely instrumental, ac- 
 cording to Jer. 26:17 sq. compared Avith Mic. 3:12, 
 in effecting the reformation under Hezekiah. 
 
 IV. Contemporaries.— Kings of Judah, Jotham, 
 Ahaz and Hezekiah. Kings of Israel, Pekah and 
 Hoshea. Prophets, Isaiah and Hosea. Assyria re- 
 ferred to as an invading, conquering and deporting 
 foe. 
 
 V. Authorship.— Micah is generally conceded to be 
 the author of the Book bearing his name. The chief 
 opposition to this view is raised by a few who attri- 
 bute Chs. 6, 7 to an anonymous author. But from 
 their contents these chai3ters not only may have been 
 written under the reigns of Ahaz or Manasseh, but in 
 every respect the most suitable time for their j)roduc- 
 tion is the reign of Ahaz, rather than the reign of 
 Manasseh, Avhen true prophets were silenced, or itiny 
 subsequent time. More recent criticism assigns the 
 passage 7 : 7-20 to the Exile, so that according to 
 this view there is a gap of a century between 7 : 6 and 
 7:7. But there is no difficulty whatsoever in this 
 passage precluding it from being the work of a pro- 
 phet who might know and foretell that the exile must 
 happen. Besides, a prophec}^ can hardly be con- 
 ceived of as ending so abruptly as would be the case 
 at 7: 6. 
 
 VI. Historical. —The sins of Judah and Israel con- 
 stituted the historical occasion of Micah's prophecy. 
 These sins were against the fundamental law^s of 
 social morality, transgressions of the elementary 
 principles of justice and merc^'. The A^ery founda- 
 
202 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 tions of society were being upheaved and overtlirown. 
 It is especially the social sins of his time that Micah 
 attacks with passionate energy. The accumulation of 
 vast estates by wealthy nobles; the unscrupuloasly 
 powerful defrauding the honest poor and dispossess- 
 ing him of his ancestral land and home ; governors 
 and judges fleecing the people whom they were sworn 
 to protect; exacting creditors tearing the garments 
 from a man's shoulders ; exorbitant taxation and pri- 
 vate extortions ; the dictates of natural piety ignored 
 and the most sacred relations of life violated ; strong 
 fortifications and stately palaces constructed of 
 human lives and cemented with human blood; every- 
 where appalling social selfishness, corruption, fierce- 
 ness. These are the sins that Micah denounces, and 
 upon them, the people, for the commission of these 
 sins he denounces the judgment of God, — humiliation, 
 overthrow, anguish, exile, dispersion. But Micah 
 also preaches promise ; and be\'^ond this blackness of 
 darkness dawns the sure hope of restoration, reunion, 
 and glorification. 
 
 VII. Divisions and Contents.— Upon the basis of its 
 subject matter the Book of Micah is best divided into 
 three parts, as follows : — 
 
 I. Chs. 1, 2. Reproof dominant but closing with 
 promise. 
 
 II. Chs. 3-5. Promise dominant but closing with re- 
 proof. 
 
 III. Chs. (3, 7. The legal controvers}" and conclu- 
 sion : — will it be reproof or promise? 
 
 I. Chs. 1, 2. Reproof and promise; including 
 1. Ch. 1. Jehovah the Judge. a. 1:1. Super- 
 scription, b. 1 : 2-5. Jehovah the Judge of Israel is 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 203 
 
 about to appear. c. 1:6, 7. Samaria will be de- 
 stroyed. f7. 1:8, 9. The catastrophe will reach Jeru- 
 salem: e. 1:10-10. Various towns of tlie Lowland, 
 where the prophet's own home is, will be overwhelmed. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. Judah's woe and Jehovah's promise. 
 a. 2:1-5. The violent deeds of Judah's nobles de- 
 mand punishment. b. 2:6,7. They would silence 
 true prophets and listen to false ones. c. 2:8-11. As 
 they eject the poor so shall they themselves be exiled. 
 d. 2:12, 13. The exiled and dispersed Hock of Israel 
 will one day be reassembled, and go forth from cap- 
 tivity in a second exodus, led by their King with 
 Jehovah at his side, to restoration. Compare Ex. 
 13:21; Psa. 110:5; Isa. 52:12. 
 
 II. Chs. 3-5. Promise and reproof ; including 
 
 1. Ch. 3. The censure of rulers. a. 3:1-11\ 
 Judges, prophets and priests dishonor their office. 
 h. 3:ll^ Their false reliance upon Jehovah, c. 3: 
 12. Their ungodliness the cause of Jerusalem's im- 
 pending ruin. 
 
 2. Ch. 4. The center of salvation and the humilia- 
 tion to Zion. a. 4:1-5. But in the ending of the 
 days Jerusalem will be the center of instruction, 
 obedience and peace, h. 4:6-8. The dispersed will 
 be reassembled, the eternal reign of Jehovah inaugur- 
 ated, and the Davidic Kingdom restored, c. 4: 9, 10. 
 Zion's immediate future is humiliation and exile. 
 d. 4:11-13. Zion's ultimate future will be victory 
 over the nations. 
 
 3. Ch. 5. Exaltation from Bethlehem. a. 5:1. 
 Israel and her ruler must be reduced to extremity and 
 insult, h, 5:2-6. But from Bethlehem shall come 
 forth a Ruler of David's house to rule over a reunited 
 
204 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 people, and repel the Assyrian invader, c. 5:7. Israel 
 will be a source of blessing to some. d. 5 : 8, 9. Israel 
 will be a source of destruction to others, e. 5: 10-15. 
 Israel will be i3urified and vengeance executed on the 
 disobedient. 
 
 III. Chs. 6, 7. Controvers}' and conclusion. The 
 representation is that of a legal suit between Jehovah 
 and his people Israel. Jehovah is plaintiff, Israel is 
 defendant. 
 
 1. Chs. 6:1-7:13. The controversy. a. 6:1,2. 
 Exordium, h. 6:3-5. Jehovah states his case. c. 6: 
 6, 7. The people admits its sin, and asks how Jeho- 
 vah can be propitiated, d. 6:8. The prophet answers. 
 e. 6:9-16. Jehovah speaks denouncing the wicked- 
 ness, and threatening punishment. /. 7 : 1-6. The 
 prophet speaks in the name of the true Israel lament- 
 ing the corruption, g. 7:7-10. They will bear the 
 punishment confident that Jehovah will vindicate his 
 righteousness, li. 7:11-13. In answer is heard the 
 divine proclamation of Zion's restoration. 
 
 2. Ch. 7:14-20. The conclusion, a. 7:14-17. The 
 prophet prays for this restoration of Zion, and Jeho- 
 vah promises to effect it. h. 7:18-20. The prophet 
 concludes by expressing a perfect trust in Jehovah's 
 pardoning mercy and unchanging faithfulness. 
 
 VIII. Theolog-y.-The theological doctrines of Micah 
 are similar to those of Isaiah. In the main they set 
 forth 
 
 1. The regeneration of Israel through judgment. 
 
 2. The establishment of Jehovah's Kingdom under 
 the ideal King of David's line. 
 
 3. The evangelization of the nations through that 
 Davidico-Messianic Kingdom. 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 205 
 
 In regard to man Micah emphasizes 
 
 1. Man must follow justice toward his neighbor. 
 
 2. He must also show mercy, and not only show it, 
 but love mercy. 
 
 3. Man must walk humbly with his God; live such 
 a life of fellowship with God as implies an identity of 
 will and purpose. 
 
 IX. Messianic— Israel is to be scattered in judg- 
 ment, but it will be restored again in mercy. The 
 ideal of the Theocracy will be realized. Jehovah shall 
 reign in Zion forever. A Prince of the house of David 
 will rule over a reunited Israel. He is to spring from 
 Bethlehem. The Kingdom of God will be established 
 in peace and righteousness. This Messianic produc- 
 tion in Micah is in the main threefold, and for the 
 most part contained in Chs. 4 : 1-5 : 5% as follows : 
 
 1. Ch. 4:1-7.- The final Messianic period. Comp. 
 Isa. 2:2-4. 
 
 2. Ch. 4:8-13. The Davidico-Zionitic dominion. 
 Comp. Am. 9:9-15. 
 
 3. Ch. 5:l-5^ The Ruler from Bethlehem. Comp. 
 Isa. 9:6: Zech. 9 : 9. 
 
 NAHUM 
 
 I. Name.— A^a/zoom = Nahum = Consolation. The 
 Booii: derives its name from its author. 
 
 II. Biography.— Nahum flourished during the As- 
 syrian period and in the Kingdom of Judah. He was 
 a native of Elkosh, probably a town in Galilee. He 
 probably belonged to the Northern Kingdom of Israel, 
 
206 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 and, upon the invasion and deportation of the Ten 
 Tribes, escaped into the territory of Judah taking up 
 his residence in or near Jerusalem. Nahum flourished 
 and prophesied between B. 0. 665-607. 
 
 III. Ministry.— Nahum's prophetic ministry was car- 
 ried on in the Kingdom of Judah, and in the second 
 half of Hezekiah's reign. It was after the capture of 
 No-amon (Thebes, in Upper Egypt) by Asshurbanipal. 
 And it preceded the destruction of Nineveh by the 
 Babylonians and Medes. The subject or burden of 
 Nahum's prophecy was the fall and destruction of the 
 Assyrian capital Nineveh. While the prophecy of 
 Jonah against Nineveh was followed by the remission 
 of God's judgments, the prophecy of Nahum against 
 Nineveh was followed by the execution of God's judg- 
 ments. 
 
 IV. Contemporaries.— King of Judah, Hezekiah. 
 Prophets, Isaiah and Micah. Assyrians who had an- 
 nihilated the Kingdom of Israel, and humiliated the 
 Kingdom of Judah. Egyptians. 
 
 V. Composition.— Nahum is generally admitted to 
 have been the author of the Book bearing his name. 
 The genuineness of the Book has never been called into 
 question. There is a peculiarty in the superscription 
 in that it makes the announcement of the subject pre- 
 cede the announcement of the author. There is how- 
 ever nothing inconsistent in this. Besides, the prophet 
 uses several words and forms of words that are almost 
 peculiar to himself. He uses several words that occur 
 elsewhere only in Job. He uses a striking expression 
 also in 2: 10 that only occurs besides in Joel 2: 6, while 
 the first clause of 1:15 is nearly word for word the 
 same as that of Isa. 52:7. Nahum occupies one of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 207 
 
 the hii>Iiest places in Hebrew literature, while he more 
 nearl}^ approaches Isaiah^thaii ari}^ of the other Pro- 
 phets. He possesses a peculiar power of representing 
 several phases of an idea in the briefest sentences, as in 
 his description of God, of the conquest of Nineveh, 
 and the capture of Thebes. 
 
 As to the date of the composition, it must have been 
 according to 3: 8-11 after the capture of Thebes by 
 Asshurbanipal which took place shortly after B. C. 
 664:-, and on the other liand, as Nineveh is represented 
 as still standing, it must have been before the destruc- 
 tion of that city by the Babylonians and Medes in 
 B. C. G07. 
 
 VI. Historical.— The historical occasion of Nahnm's 
 prophecy was the approaching fall of Nineveh. On 
 account of its great wickedness and corruption Nahum 
 predicts the fall of the Assyrian capital. This took 
 place not long thereafter when a coalition of Necho, 
 King of Egypt, Cyaxares, King of Media, Nabopo- 
 lassar. King of Babylon, was formed against Assyria, 
 and tlie Medes and Babylonians, after defeating the 
 Assyrian forces, laid siege to Nineveh which after two 
 years capitulated. 
 
 VII. Division and Contents.— 1. Ch. 1. The ai3- 
 pearance of Jehovah in judgment; his faithfulness 
 toward those who are faithful to him; the description 
 of the coming fall and irretrievable destruction of the 
 Assyrian capital. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. Description of the assault upon Nineveh, 
 the entrance effected, the scenes of carnage and tumult 
 that follow, the flight of the inhabitants, and the sub- 
 sequent deserted and silent condition of the city. 
 
 3. Ch. 3. Nineveh's cruelty, avarice, insidious 
 
208 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 policy, corrni)tion, the cause of liei' own ruin. Jeho- 
 vah is against her; overthrow awaits her; and amid 
 the rejoicings of those who have suffered by her, her 
 empire shall forever pass ^way. 
 
 VIII. Theolog-y.— The theological teaching of Na- 
 hum emphasizes 
 
 1. God's moral government of the world. 
 
 2. The certain destruction of this world's king- 
 doms built on the foundation of force and falsehood. 
 
 3. The certain triumph of the Kingdom of God up- 
 built on the foundation of truth and righteousness. 
 
 HABAKKUK. 
 
 I. ^aine,—Hahakkook = Habakkuk = Embraced. 
 The Book is so called from the name of its author. 
 
 II. Biography and Ministry.— Habakkuk belonged 
 to the Kingdom of Judah. He flourished and pvo- 
 phesied during the reign of Jehoiakim, and towards 
 the beginning of the Chaldean supremacy, i. e. B. C. 
 608-590. Nothing is known, outside of apocryphal 
 sources, of the personal history of this prophet, and 
 his prophecy gives us no information respecting him- 
 self. The subject of his prophecy is the overthrow of 
 Judah by the Chaldeans, and then, in turn, the over- 
 throw of the Chaldean monarchy, — each power for its 
 sins. 
 
 III. Composition.— Some modern critics maintain 
 that Chs. 1 : 1-2 : 8 is the only part of the Book which 
 
 ^is to be assigned to Habakkuk; that 2 : 9-20 is an ad- 
 dition of post-exilic times; and Ch. 3 a prayer of the 
 
INTKODUCTION OUTLINES. 209 
 
 post-exilic congregation in time of distress, possibly 
 written by the author of 2 : 9-20, or taken from some 
 Psalm-collection used in the TemiDle. But against 
 this position, the unity of the Book, and its author- 
 ship by the prophet Habakkuk, are both generally ad- 
 mitted, on account of the close relation between the 
 several parts, the progress of the thought throughout, 
 and the organic connection of the whole. As to the 
 date of the composition of the prophecy, the balance 
 of probability favors a date shortly before the defeat 
 of Pharaoh-Necho at Carchemish, B. C. 605, by which 
 defeat the supremacy of the Chaldeans was assured. 
 IV. Historical.— The historical occasion of Habak- 
 kuk's prophecy was the rise of the Chaldean power, 
 and its employment by Jehovah as an instrument to 
 inflict deserved chastisement upon ungodly Judah. 
 When the reformer-king, Josiah, fell in the fatal battle 
 of Megiddo, the hopes of Judah perished. Passing over 
 his eldest son Jehoiakim, the people made Jehoahaz 
 king. After a reign of only three months, Jehoahaz 
 was dei^osed by Pharaoh-Necho, who was now for a 
 short time supreme over the countries from the 
 Euphrates to the Nile. Necho placed Jehoiakim on 
 the throne instead of Jehoahaz. Jehoiakim was sel- 
 fish, despotic, godless. The nobles all too willingly 
 followed Jehoiakim's example, so that in a short time 
 the old evils of Manasseh's reign broke out afresh. 
 In the meantime the Chaldeans were mustering and 
 marching threateningly in the nortli . Reports of their 
 fierceness and resistlessuess reached Jerusalem. Fear 
 and doubt settled on many a mind and heart in Judah. 
 AYould a righteous God permit such an insatiable in- 
 [13J 
 
210 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 vader to overwhelm Judah ? At such a critical 
 moment Habakkuk appears upon the scene with his 
 proi)hetic message. 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents.— 1. Ch. 1. a. vv. 2-4. 
 Habakkuk expostulates with Jehovah for permitting 
 evil to go so long unchecked in Judah. b. vv. 5-11. 
 Jehovah replies by pointing to and describing the 
 Chaldeans whom he has raised up to chastise the 
 guilty nation, c. vv. 12-17. Habakkuk is amazed 
 that Jehovah can use as his instruments those cruel 
 Chaldeans. 
 
 2. Ch. 2. a. vv. 1-4. In answer to Habakkuk's chal- 
 lenge of the divine rectitude, Jehovah declares that 
 the Chaldeans carry in themselves the seed of their 
 own ruin, while the righteous possess the principle of 
 life. h. vv. 5-20. The truth that the Chaldean bears 
 in himself the germ of his own ruin is expanded and 
 proven in the description of the Chaldean's drunken- 
 ness, ambition, lust for conquest, cruelty, injustice, 
 bloodshed, despotism, intrigue, idolatry, c. Verse 20 
 contrasts the living God with heathen idols, and so 
 forms the transition to 
 
 3. Ch. 3. a. V. 2. Habakkuk has heard the an- 
 nouncement of God's judgment on Israel, and the final 
 doom of the Chaldeans. But the prophet fears that 
 a delay of the latter will prove too severe a test of 
 faith, and therefore prays that the time may be short- 
 ened, h. vv. 3-15. The answer to the prophet's 
 prayer is given in the fuller revelation of Jehovah's 
 working in the world, which is expressed by the de- 
 scription of His Advent to redeem his ijeople and 
 judge their enemies, c. vv. 16-19. Meditating upon 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 211 
 
 this transcendent Theophany the prophet determines 
 to rejoice and rest all assurance in Jehovah. 
 
 VI. Theology.— The Apostle Paul has adopted the 
 second clause of Hab. 2 : 4, as one of the watchwords 
 of his theology,— " But the just shall live by his 
 faith," or " in his faithfulness." The essence of Ha- 
 bakkuk's theology is 
 
 1. Faith in God and his supreme government. 
 
 2. Patience in waiting on God and his working. 
 
 3. Rejoicing in God alway. 
 
 VII. Messianic— The Messianic element in Ha- 
 bakknk appears for the most part in 2: 4, 14 and Ch. 
 3, setting forth the righteous life, the coming glory, 
 and the advent of Jehovah for the redemption of his 
 people. 
 
 ZEPHANIAH. 
 
 I. Name.- >Se/an?/a/i = Zephaniah= Whom Jeho- 
 vah hid. The Book derives its name from its author. 
 
 II. Biography and Ministry. — Zephaniah, who 
 lived in the Chaldean period, belonged to the King- 
 dom of Judah. According to the superscription, 1:1, 
 he was the great-grandson of Amariah, who was the 
 son of Hezekiah. This Hezekiah was probably King 
 Hezekiah, which would make Zephaniah belong to the 
 royal family. He probably lived and ministered in 
 Jerusalem. Zephaniah's prophetic ministry falls be- 
 tween B. C. 639-609, and during the reign of Josiah. 
 He was a contemporary of Jeremiah. 
 
 III. Composition.— Zephaniah is generally conceded 
 
212 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 to be the author of the Book bearing his name. As to 
 the date of the composition of Zephaniah's prophecy, 
 it doubtless belongs to the beginning of Josiah's reign, 
 and before the great reformation effected by that king. 
 From allusions to the condition of morals and religion 
 in Judah in 1: 4-6, 8, 9, 12; 3: 1-3, 7, it may be con- 
 cluded with certainty that the period of Josiah's reign 
 during which Zephaniah wrote was prior to the great 
 reformation of his, Josiah's eighteenth year (B. C. 
 621), in which the idolatrous practices condemned by 
 Zephaniah were abolished by Josiah. The design of 
 Zephaniah's prophecy is to announce God's judgment, 
 and the moral condition that necessitated it. 
 
 IV. Historical.— The historical occasion of Zeph- 
 aniah's prophecy seems to have been the irruption of 
 those mysterious, marauding hordes of Scythians who 
 poured down over Western Asia from the steppes of 
 the North, spreading consternation and devastation in 
 their path. As Joel saw the locust plague to be a vis- 
 itation of judgment from Jehovah, so Zephaniah viewed 
 the desolating invasion of the Scythians. It was a 
 visitation wiierein Jehovah was umnifesting his power, 
 judging the nations, and summoning his people to re- 
 pentance. 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents.— The Book has a three- 
 fold division. 
 
 1. Ch. 1. The menace. The prophecy opens with 
 an announcment of far-reaching destruction, but es- 
 pecially directed against the idolaters in Judah and 
 Jerusalem. Jehovah's day of sacrifice is at hand; the 
 victims, the Jewish people, and nations the "sancti- 
 fied" (1 Sam. 16: o), invited guests. Three classes to 
 be judged ; — court officials, merchants and those sunk 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 213 
 
 in irreligious indifferentism. The "Day of eTehovah " 
 further developed and described. 
 
 2. Chs. 2:1-3:7. The admonition. The prophet 
 urges his people to repent and so escape the doom 
 which will overtake, he declares, in succession the 
 Philistines, Moab, Ammon, Ethiopia, Nineveh. Then 
 again the prophet turns again to address Jerusalem, 
 describe her sins, and her heedlessness to warning. 
 
 3. Ch. 3:8-20. The promise. The prophet exhorts 
 the faithful in Jerusalem to wait patiently on Jehovah 
 whom all nations will yet serve, while the faithful, 
 cleaving to God, will dwell in safety upon their 
 own land, and be made to rejoice in the coming restor- 
 ation of Jehovah's presence. 
 
 VI. Theology.— Zei^haniah emphasizes the supreme 
 lesson that Jehovah is King and Judge; that judg- 
 ment is impending ; and that judgment will be uni- 
 versal. Force and violence are temporary ; truth and 
 righteousness shall abide. Out of the fury and fall 
 of world empires the faithful remnant shall see estab- 
 lished the universal empire of Jehovah. 
 
 VII. Messianic— Zephaniah has no prophecy of a 
 distinct personal Messiah. Jehovah is the Saviour. 
 He will effect redemption. The terrible judgments 
 impending will issue in salvation for Israel and the 
 world. The Messianic element in Zephaniah's pro- 
 phecy, contained for the most part in 3 : 8-20, is re- 
 markable as containing a prediction of the conversion 
 not only of tiie heathen nations, but even of those 
 who execute the divine judgments ui)on Israel. 
 
214 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 HAGGAI. 
 
 I. Name. -Haggai = Festal. The Book derives its 
 name from its author. 
 
 II. Biography and Ministry.— Haggai, like Zech- 
 ariah and Malachi, lived and ministered in the Post- 
 Exilian period. The date of his ministry Haggai 
 states very definitely in 1 : 1 where he declares that 
 the word of the Lord came to him on the first day of 
 the sixth month of the second year of the reign of 
 Darius (Hyslaspis), B. C. 520. All the other com- 
 mnnications belong also to the second year of the reign 
 of Darius, and fall w ithin the limits of four months. 
 Apart from his prophecy, Haggai is mentioned in 
 Ezra 5:1, 2 as prophesying to the Jews while they 
 were rebuilding the temple, after the return from 
 Babylon in the second year of Darius, and as helping 
 Zerubbabel and Joshua the son of Jehozadak, the 
 high priest, in their work. Haggai and Zechariah 
 were contemporaries in the prophetic ministry. Com- 
 pare Hag. 1 : 1 and Zech. 1:1. 
 
 III. Composition.— Haggai is generally conceded to 
 be the author of the Book bearing his liame. His 
 style is simjjle, pi-actical, and goes directly to the 
 point. His prophetic message is addressed to the re- 
 stored captives, and its design is to incite them to duty 
 and encourage them in duty, particularly in the mat- 
 ter of rebuilding the temple, — their national sanctuary 
 and living evidence of their national religion. 
 
 IV. Historical.— The decree of Cyrus permitting 
 the Jew^s to return to their own land (EzraCh. 1), and 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 215 
 
 to rebuild the temple at Jerusalem, was followed by 
 the joyful compliance of a considerable number, some 
 50,000 in all, who set out to return to their Holy Land. 
 The leaders of the returnin.2: exiles were Zerubbabel 
 the son of Shealtiel, and Joshua the son of Jehozadak. 
 Zerubbabel, as the actual or legal heir of Jehoiachin, 
 was the representative of the house of David, and had 
 been appointed governor of Judah by Cyrus (Ezr. 
 5:14). Joshua, who held the office of High Priest, 
 was grandson of Seraiah, the last High Priest who had 
 ministered in the Temple at Jerusalem before its de- 
 struction. The work of rebuilding began with the 
 erection of the altar in its ancient place, and the com- 
 mencement of the erection of the Temple. But with 
 the death of Cyrus the emigration of exiles to Judah 
 ceased, and under the reign of some of the successors 
 of Cyrus, particularly Cambyses and Pseudo-Smerdis, 
 the work on the Temple and city was suspended. 
 Great obstacles to the continuance and completion of 
 the work were encountered, owing to the jealousies of 
 the inhabitants of Samaria and Edom, and constant 
 misrepresentations at the court of Persia. Ezra Ch. 4. 
 So for some fifteen years the w^ork of rebuilding was 
 arrested, till in the second year of the reign of Darius 
 it was resumed under the prophetic ministry of Haggai 
 and Zechariah. 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents.— The prophecy of Hag- 
 gai consists of four sections, communications, arranged 
 chronologically. 
 
 1. Ch. 1. In the second yenr of Darius, the first 
 day of the sixth month, Ha<2gai appeals to the 
 people no longor to postpone the work of rebuilding 
 the Temple, declares that the failure of their crops is 
 
216 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 due to their having failed to rebuild the house of the 
 Lord, and that the pleasure and presence of Jehovah 
 will attend them in performing this work. 
 
 2. Ch. 2: 1-9. In the same year on the twenty-first 
 day of the seventh month the prophet again addresses 
 the people with words of encouragement assuring them 
 that this second temple, though inferior in splendor to 
 the first, shall have greater glory than it, and that Jeho- 
 vah will shake all nations, and the most excellent of the 
 nations shall come to it, and the house shall be filled 
 with glory. Comp. Heb. 12: 26, 27. 
 
 3. Ch. 2:10-19. In the same year on the twenty- 
 fourth day of the ninth month the iDroi^het addresses 
 the priests declaring that so long as the Temple re- 
 mains unbuilt the people are unclean, and hence the 
 seasons are unfruitful. 
 
 4. Ch. 2: 20-23. On the same day, Haggai encour- 
 ages Zerubbabel, the civil head of the restored com- 
 munity, and representative of David's line, with the 
 assurance that in the approaching overthrow of the 
 thrones and kingdoms of the earth, he will receive 
 special tokens of Jehovah's favor. 
 
 VI. Theology and Messianic— The theological 
 teachings of Haggai emphasizes 
 
 1. The obedience of Jehovah's people will ever se- 
 cure Jehovah's cooperation. 
 
 2. Jehovah will overrule all convulsions among the 
 nations of the earth to effect his i^urposes, and bring 
 in his reign of peace. 
 
 The Messianic portion is contained in Ch. 2:6-9, 
 21-23 wherein Haggai predicts that heaven and earth 
 will be shaken; kingdoms overthrown; instruments 
 of war destroyed ; nations bring their treasures to the 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 217 
 
 house of Jehovah, whose latter glory will be made 
 greater than the former ; Avhile Zerubbabel, the ser- 
 vant of Jehovah, will become His signet, according to 
 which it is evident that the Jewish governor is made 
 a type of Christ. 
 
 ZECHARIAH. 
 
 I. ^Same.—Zecharyah = Zechariah = Whom Jeho- 
 vah remembers. The Book derives its name from its 
 author. 
 
 II. Biography.— According to 1 : 1 of his prophecy 
 Zechariah was the son of Berechiah, the son of Iddo. 
 From Neh. 12:16 it appears that Zechariah was a 
 priest, and that he went up from Babylon to Jerusa- 
 lem with Zernbbabel. In Ezra 5 : 1, 2 he is spoken of 
 as prophesying along with Haggai, and aiding in the 
 rebuilding of the Temple. In this passage he is called 
 simply Iddo, probably because his father was already 
 dead when Ezra wrote, and his grandfather was his 
 nearest living ancestor. Zechariah lived and minis- 
 tered between B. C. 520-510. How much longer he 
 lived, and whether his prophetic ministry extended 
 over a greater period than four or five years, is not 
 known. Haggai was Zechariah's contemporary i)ro- 
 phet ; Joshua was High Priest ; Zerubbabel was gov- 
 ernor of the restored communitj^ of Jews in Judah ; 
 Tattenai was general Persian governor of the pro- 
 vince ; and Darius was King. 
 
 III. Ministry.— According to 2 : 1 Zechariah was a 
 young man when he was called to the prophetic office. 
 
218 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 In the beginning of his prophecy he states that the 
 word of the Lord came to him in the eighth month of 
 the second year of Darins, two months after Haggai 
 received his first divine communication. Besides this 
 Zechariah gives two other dates of divine communica- 
 tions, vis. the twenty-fourth day of the eleventh month 
 in the same year (Ch. 1:7), and the fourth day of the 
 ninth month of the fourth year of Darius (Ch. 7:1); 
 — these years were B. C. 520 and 518. As in the case 
 of Haggai, so with Zechariah, the first, local, present 
 and practical object of their preaching was to incite 
 and encourage the people in rebuilding the Temple 
 service. This preaching of these two prophets had its 
 desii-rd effect. The rebuilding af the Temple pro- 
 gressed rapidly. Tattenai, the Persian governor, re- 
 fei'red the matter of the rebuilding to Darius, but did 
 not interfere with the work. The reference to Darius 
 led to the discoverj^ of the decree of Cyrus in the ar- 
 chives at Ecbatana; and Darius issued a decree direct- 
 ing Tattenai to furnish materials for the work, and to 
 provide the Jews with animals and other requisites for 
 sacrifice. In less than four and a half years from the 
 recommencement of the work the Temple was com- 
 pleted and dedicated on the third day of the twelfth 
 month of the sixth year of Darius, B. C. 516. But it 
 must be remembered that while Haggai and Zechariah 
 in the exercise of their prophetic ministry directed 
 their words and efforts primarily to the rebuilding of the 
 Temple, and the restoration of the Temple service, still it 
 was by nomeans with a formal, ceremonial, unspiritual 
 conception of that service, and by no means in any 
 spirit of national exclusiveness and religious bigotrj'. 
 These prophets themselves predicted that the glory of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 219 
 
 that Temple was to be its catholicity. They saw not 
 only the nations of their time bringing offeiings for the 
 rebuilding of that Temple, bnt like Isaiah and Micah, 
 they saw all the nations of the future flowing thither 
 to the worship of Jehovah. There in that place they 
 saw was to be consummated the final reconciliation of 
 man to God and man to man. Looking forward to 
 that coming Messianic reconciliation Haggai preaches, 
 "In this place will I give peace, saith Jehovah of 
 hosts." And Zechariah points the finger of prophecy 
 forward, beyond the material temple of Zerubbabel, 
 to the glorious outline of a spiritual Temple, which 
 the priestly King of David's line will build. 
 
 IV. Authorship— Date.— Zechariah is the author of 
 the entire Book that bears his name; it is generally 
 conceded that this Zecliariah is the author of Chs. 
 1-8. In more modern times, however, the authorship 
 and date of Chs. 9-14 have been violently assailed. 
 Concerning the origin of these chapters three princi- 
 pal hypotheses obtain, viz.: 
 
 1. The traditional view. According to this view 
 the Book of Zechariah is a unit, and was wiitten by 
 Zechariah, the contemporary of Zerubbabel. 
 
 2. This view ascribes Chs. 9-14 to a pre-exilic 
 origin. That is, Chs. 9-11 were written shortly be- 
 fore the downfall of Samaria ?22 B. C, and Chs. 12- 
 14 before the destruction of Jerusalem 586 B. C. 
 
 3. The Post-Zecharian hypothesis. This ascribes 
 Chs. 9-14 to a late Persian or an early Greek or Mac- 
 cabean date. 
 
 Some of the principal objections to the arguments 
 adduced in support of the second hypothesis are as 
 follows : 
 
220 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 1. The exile in both parts of the Book of Zechariah 
 is represented as a fact, an event of the past, and the 
 restoration from the exile both of Ephraira and Jndah, 
 though incomplete, has already begnn. 
 
 2. The alleged authors of Zechariah Chs. 9-14 dis- 
 sociate themselves from any definitely named person, 
 or any specific event, known to be pre-exilic. 
 
 3. If Chs. 9-14 were of pre-exilic origin then cer- 
 tain passages in these chapters would entirely fail to 
 be understood by a people standing face to face with 
 the calamities of 722 and 586 B. C. Thus there is no 
 reference to an approaching army or to alljdng with 
 foreigners, while victory and prosperity are promised 
 rather than defeat and calamity announced. 
 
 4. The historical allusions in Chs. 9-14 point rather 
 to post-exilic than pre-exilic times. 
 
 5. The names given to the Theocracy in Chs. 9-14 
 do not imi)ly a pre-exilic date for the entire section, 
 for Israel and Judah were both represented in the 
 post-exilic congregation, and as 7iames, were both 
 applicable to the post-exilic Theocracy. 
 
 6. The national sins according to Chs. 9-14 are 
 spoken of as having been committed in the past, be- 
 fore the exile, and which now Israel was exhorted not 
 to repeat. The enemies of Israel mentioned in Chs. 
 9-14 do not fix the date of these prophecies as being 
 pre-exilic. 
 
 7. The point to which the Messianic development 
 has reached in Chs. 9-14 indicates a post-exilic rather 
 than a pre-exilic date. Thus in regard to the Messianic 
 person, e. g. Ch. 9:9, 10; 11:12, 13; 12:10 sq. ; 13:7. 
 Again in regard to the Messianic times or Zechariah's 
 Eschatology. The description of the incorporation of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 2'21 
 
 the heathen world into the Kingdom of God in Chs. 
 9-14 is one of the most remarkable in the Old Testa- 
 ment, and seems to presuppose all that has gone be- 
 fore. 
 
 8. The prophet Zechariah in Chs. 0-14 shows a 
 familiarity with Ezekiel and Jeremiah as well as the 
 so-called Deutero-Isaiah. 
 
 Some of the principal objections to the arguments 
 adduced in support of the Post-Zecharian hypothesis 
 are as follows : 
 
 1. The argument from language and style favors 
 the Zecharian rather than the post-Zecharian author- 
 ship. Thus there is a remarkable freedom from Ara- 
 maic expressions. The usage of the full instead of 
 the shorter form of the name David cannot be used as 
 an argument inasmuch as the shorter form occurs 
 also in Ecclesiastes 1:1, probably the latest Book 
 in the Old Testament. The same is true also in re- 
 gard to the usage of the abbreviated instead of the 
 fuller form of the first person pronoun, when we com- 
 pare the similar usage in Lamentations, Ecclesiastes, 
 Esther, Ezra, Nehemiah, 1 and 2 Chronicles and 
 Daniel. The employment of the Infinitive absolute 
 to set forth the finite verb is even more striking in 
 Haggai and Zechariah Chs. 1-8 than in Zechariah 
 Chs. 9-14. 
 
 2. Against the argument from historical data ad- 
 duced in favor of a Greaco-Maccabean date, it is to be 
 noted, 
 
 That the temjjle was still in process of construc- 
 tion. This is evident from the Messianic and Eschato- 
 logical character of these prophecies; from the fact 
 that the prophet bases his exhortations for the present 
 
222 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 on the history of the past; from the fact that the pro- 
 phet makes Israel's chief interests center in Jerusa- 
 lem; and from the fact that certain allusions are best 
 explained in these times. 
 
 In proof of the Zecharian authorship of Chs. 9-14, 
 and in further disproof of hypotheses number 2 and 3 
 it is to be noted: 
 
 1. The fundamental ideas of both parts of the Book 
 are the same. 
 
 2. There are peculiarities of thought that are com- 
 mon to both parts of the Book. 
 
 3. Certain peculiarities of diction and style argue 
 in favor of the unity of the Book and the Zecharian 
 authorship. 
 
 4. Chapters 1-8 show a familiarit}^ with the same 
 prophetical Books as Chs. 9-14. 
 
 5. Chapters 9-14 presuppose the exile not only of 
 Ephraim[but also of Judah. Thus Ch. 9:9, 11, 12, 
 where Judah is represented as having been partly re- 
 stored to its land, and is to expect more complete 
 restoration. In Chs. 1-8 the representation is that of 
 Judah being overrun by a foreign enemy and the 
 temple desecrated. In 9 : 9 Judah is represented as 
 being without a king and is therefore bidden to rejoice 
 at the approaching advent of the Messianic King. 
 
 6. Other admittedly exilian and post-exilian pro- 
 phets and writings seem also to imply the still con- 
 tinued existence of the two kingdoms as much as 
 Zechariah himself. Thus e. g. note Jeremiah 31 : 18- 
 20, 27, 31. And yet in spite of this, Ephraim had 
 gone into captivity a hundred years before this. 
 
 7. If Chs. 9-14 belong to pre-exilic times, how 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 223 
 
 comes it that there is no mention made in them of the 
 Chaldeans '? 
 
 8. It is trne that in the last part of the Book are 
 fonnd predictions relative to the captivity of Jerusa- 
 lem; but the entire description makes it totally un- 
 suitable to refer this to the destruction and captivity 
 of Jerusalem by the Chaldeans. It evidently refers 
 to times long subsequent to that event, and is closely 
 connected with the advent of the Messiah. 
 
 V. Historical.— See under III Ministry. 
 
 VI. Divisions and Contents.— The Book of Zechar- 
 iah is divided into two parts; viz. Parti, Chs. 1-8, 
 and Part 2, Chs. 9-14. Part 1, Chs. 1-8, includes 
 
 1. Ch. 1:6. Introduction ; a warning voice from 
 the past. 
 
 2. Chs. 1:7-6:8. A series of visions designed for 
 encouragement as to the present, and instruction as to 
 the future; including — a. 1 : 7-17. Vision of the divine 
 chariots and horses in the valle}^ of myrtles represent- 
 ing a time of peace and opportunity for rebuilding the 
 city and temple, h. 1:18-21. Four horns symboliz- 
 ing the nations opposed to Israel, have their strength 
 broken by four smiths, c. Ch. 2. The man with the 
 measuring line. The significance is that the coming 
 Jerusalem will be of too wide an extent to be confined 
 by walls, will have an unlimited population, will have 
 Jehovah for its defence, and many nations will join 
 themselves to Israel, d. Ch. 3. Joshua, the High 
 Priest appears before the altar burdened with the sins 
 of the people. Satan accuses him, but he is acquitted, 
 and given rule over the Temple, with the right of 
 priestly access to Jehovah. He receives the promise of 
 the advent of Messiah, and restored blessing, e. Ch. 
 
224 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 4. The vision of the golden candlestick and the two 
 olive trees, symbolizing that all obstacles should be re- 
 moved, and the restored commnnit}-, the chosen people 
 of God, should ever receive sufficient supplies of divine 
 grace. /. 5 : 1-4. The vision of the flying roll sym- 
 bolizing that the swift curse of God shall exterminate 
 sinners, and the land should be purified, g. 5:5-11. 
 Israel's guilt, personified as a woman, is cast into an 
 ephah-measure, heavily covered, transported to Baby- 
 lonia, where it is to remain, as in fact it did, idolatry 
 having ceased in Israel with the return from the exile. 
 h. 6 : 1-8. The vision of the fonr chariots seems to re- 
 fer to the time of the end, and the execution of God's 
 judgments in the earth. 
 
 3. Ch. 6:9-15. Symbolical action. The prophet is 
 commanded to crown the High Priest, Joshua. By this 
 act the two offices of priest and king were united in 
 his person, and he became the type of One greater 
 than himself who was still to come, the royal priest, 
 the Branch of the house of David, the Messiah. 
 
 4. Chs. 7, 8. Prophecies didactic and predictive; 
 didactic relating to present obedience, justice, mercy, 
 truth ; and predictive relating to near and remote bless- 
 ings. 
 
 Part 2. Chs. 9-14, includes 
 
 1. Ch. 9:1-8. Surrounding nations destroyed; 
 Jehovah protects his people; enemies shall no more 
 invade their land. 
 
 2. Chs. 9:9-10:12. The humble, suffering, peace- 
 ful, delivering, strengthening, victorious advent of the 
 Messianic King, 
 
 3. Ch. 11. An allegory, describing the rejection of 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. '^^5 
 
 the divinely appointed Good Shepherd by His ungrate- 
 ful flock, and the fatal consequences to the flock. 
 
 4. Chs. 12-14. Contain prophecies respecting 
 Judah and Jerusalem and the Messiah's Kingdom. 
 They treat of Israel's restoration, redemption and re- 
 establishment as God's centre for earthly and univer- 
 sal blessing. Judgment, repentance, forgiveness and 
 purifying are all secured to Israel through the gracious 
 work of the Messiah. The last chapter introduces the 
 universal peace and blessing and glory by the personal 
 return of the Messiah,. Jesus Christ. 
 
 VU. Theolog-y— Messianic. — Zechariah's teaching 
 emphasizes especially 
 
 1. An obedient, spiritual service of Jehovah on the 
 part of a holy people. 
 
 2. The redemption of Israel and the nations through 
 the workings of the spirit and grace of Jehovah. 
 
 3. The final and universal Messianic sovereignty of 
 Jehov^ah over the whole earth. 
 
 Messianic prophecy in Zechariah is especially re- 
 markable for its fulness. It treats of 
 
 1. Chs. 2, 8. The Glory of the New Jerusalem. 
 
 2. Chs. 3:8-4:14 and 6:9-15. The Coronation of 
 the Priest-King. 
 
 3. Chs. 9 : 9 ; 10. The King of Peace. 
 
 4. Ch. 11 : 7-14. The Rejected Shepherd. 
 
 5. Ch. 12: 1-9. The Unique Day. 
 
 6. Chs. 12 : 10-13 : 9. The Smitten Shepherd. 
 
 7. Ch. 14. The final Conflict, Triumph and Em- 
 pire. 
 
 [14J 
 
226 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 MALACHI. 
 
 I. Name.— Malachi = M}^ Messenger. Probably a 
 contracted form of Malachijah = Messenger of Jeho- 
 vah. So Abi (2 Ki. 18:2) is contracted from Abijah 
 (2 Chr. 29:1). 
 
 II. Biography and Ministry.— Respecting the per- 
 son and life of Malachi, the last of the Old Testament 
 prophets, nothing is known outside the Book that 
 bears his name. The date oi Malachi's ministry prob- 
 ably falls in the year B. C. 435-410. Nehemiah, cup 
 bearer to Artaxerxes at Susa, having heard that the 
 gates of Jerusalem had been burnt, and breaches made 
 in its walls (Neh. 1:2, 3), obtained, a few months 
 later, the desire of his heart, viz. the permission of 
 Artaxerxes to go to Jerusalem and restore the impaired 
 city. Arrived at Jerusalem he not only repaired the 
 walls and gates of the city, but complaint having been 
 made to him of serious social evils and religious delin- 
 quencies, he effected various radical reforms. Then 
 Nehemiah was recalled to the Persian Court. When 
 once more he returned to Jerusalem, i. e. upon his 
 second visit (see Chronology under Ezra), he found 
 that many of the reforms he had effected upon his first 
 visit had been undone. Malachi probably exercised 
 his prophetic ministry during the interval between 
 Nehemiah's first and second visits to Jerusalem, and 
 possibly for a time while Nehemiah was making his 
 second visit. This date agrees better with the 
 terms of 1 : 8 where the allusioji to the governor points 
 to the i)resence of a foreign governor rather than Neh- 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 227 
 
 emiah who refused to avail himself of his official allow- 
 ances. Neh. 5 : 14 sq. Besides, the evils that Nehe- 
 miah found on his second visit are for the most part 
 precisely the same as those denounced by Malachi. 
 Nehemiah found selfishness and irreverence on the 
 part of the high priest; a general neglect of the temple 
 service; a failure to pay the tithes; a violation of 
 the Sabbath ; and mixed marriages. And so we find 
 Malachi denouncing the negligence of the priests and 
 people in the matter of the temple service; the rob- 
 bery of God by the withholding of tithes and offerings ; 
 the divorce of Israelite wives and contracting mar- 
 riages with foreign women. Nehemiah does not speak 
 of divorce, and Malachi does not speak of Saobath 
 breaking, but otherwise the correspondence is so close 
 as to lead to the conclusion that they belong to the 
 same date. 
 
 III. Composition.— Malachi is generally conceded 
 to be the author of the Book bearing his name. 
 Standing midway between the old age and the new 
 age, Malachi's style at once bears a strong resemblance 
 to the manner of the older prophets, while it also 
 bears marks of the transitional state. He has peculi- 
 arities of expression. His diction shows the decline 
 of poetic prophecy. He is less rhetorical while being 
 none the less argumentative. His chief literary char- 
 acteristic is a dialectic treatment by means of question 
 and answer. He states briefly the truth that is neces- 
 sary to be enforced ; then he states the objection that 
 this truth is lii^ely to provoke; and finally he refutes 
 the objection, substantiates his original proposition, 
 and pronounces in connection therewith warning or 
 promise. 
 
228 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 IV. Historical.— See under II Biography and Min- 
 istry. 
 
 V. Divisions and Contents.— Ch. 1 : 1-5. Malachi 
 addresses Israel. As in the case of his prophetic pre- 
 decessors, the basis of his appeal to Israel is Jehovah's 
 relation to the nation, . Jehovah had loved them ; had 
 chosen Jacob and rejected Esau. The proof of this 
 lay in the contrasted experiences and destinies of 
 Israel and Edom. Israel had been restored to his own 
 land, bnt Edom's heritage lay desolate beyond restora- 
 tion. 
 
 2. Chs. 1:6-2:9. Israel is utterly indifeerent of 
 Jehovah's love for them, and utterly neglectful of 
 Jehovah's due from them. Hence Malachi's prophecy 
 consists largely of a reproof of the sins of his contem- 
 poraries. The first reproof is addressed to the priests. 
 They offered or permitted the people to offer blemished 
 or unclean animals for sacrifice, and so the service of 
 Jehovah had been brought into contempt. Still Jeho- 
 vah's name was held in honor throughout the world, 
 and acceptable worship was being offered him among 
 the Gentiles. But these priests who had corrupted 
 themselves and the offerings were threatened with 
 curse and punishment. Their course had been just 
 the opposite of the Levite as the keeper of divine 
 knowledge and the interpreter of the Law. 
 
 3. Ch, 2:10-16. The prophet's next reproof is ad- 
 dressed to the people. He denounces them on account 
 of the heartlessness and heinousness of their conduct 
 in divorcing their Israelite wives, and contracting for- 
 eign marriages. 
 
 4. Chs. 2:17-3:6. There were sceptics among the 
 people who denied the divine government and justice, 
 
INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 2'29 
 
 and who doubted whether God would ever come to 
 judge betw^een the evil and the good. To these scep- 
 tics the prophetic message is addressed that the time 
 speedily approaches when Jehovah, the Judge whom 
 they thoughtlessly seek shall suddenly come to his 
 temple in the person of the Angel of the Covenant. 
 He will separate between the righteous and unrighteous, 
 and purify the ungodly nation. 
 
 5. Ch. 3 : 7-21 (3 : 7-4 : 3). They had robbed God by 
 withholding tithes and offerings, and so had been 
 visited of God with a judgment upon their lands and 
 products. But a blessing was promised in the future 
 if they would faithfully discharge these duties in a 
 God-fearing service. They complained that it was 
 vain to serve God. But the time would come when 
 God would discriminate between those who served him 
 and those who served him not. Destruction would be 
 the portion of the one, blessing and triumph the 
 portion of the other. 
 
 6. Ch. 3:22-24 (4:4-6). The prophecy concludes 
 with an appeal to obey the requirements of the Mosaic 
 Law, and with a promise of the advent of Elijah the 
 prophet to move the people to repentance against the 
 day of Jehovah, and so avert the curse which other- 
 wise might smite the earth. 
 
 VI. Theology and Messianic— The theological doc- 
 trines emphasized by Malachi are 
 
 1. Jehovah's love for his people. 
 
 2. Jehovah's requirement of supreme obedience. 
 
 3. Jehovah cometfc. 
 
 The Messianic element in Malachi is contained in its 
 closing section, viz. 2:17-3:24 (2:17-4:6). Both 
 treat of the coming of the messenger, the second 
 
'^30 INTRODUCTION OUTLINES. 
 
 Elijah, to prepare the way for the coming of the Lord, 
 himself the Angel of the Covenant. The messenger 
 who should come and prepare the way for the advent 
 of the Lord in 3:1, is one and the same with Elijah 
 the prophet in 3: 23 (4: 5), the mediator between the 
 old and the new, the herald of the day of judgment, 
 and this messenger and second Elijah, was, according 
 to our Lord's teachings, John the Baptist. In teach- 
 ing us that Jchn is the messenger of 3:1% and the 
 second Elijah, Christ teaches us also that he himself 
 is the Lord, Jehovah, and the Angel of the Covenant. 
 The messenger of 3:1" is to be distinguished from the 
 messenger the Angel of the Covenant of 3: 1''. As the 
 Angel of Jehovah was strictly Jehovah himself to Israel 
 of old, so the Angel of the Covenant is the Lord, 
 Jehovah, Messiah who cometh for judgment and for 
 me rev. 
 
LITERATURE AND AUTHORITIES. 231 
 
 LITERATURE 
 
 AND 
 
 AUTHORITIES CONSULTED. 
 
 (PARTIAL LIST.) 
 
 Introduction, 
 
 Davidson's Introduction to the Old Testament. 
 
 Keil's Introduction to the Old Testament. 
 
 Home's Introduction to the Holy Scriptures. 
 
 Bleek's Introduction to the Old Testament. 
 
 Harman's Introduction to the Holy Scriptures. 
 
 Driver's Introduction to the Literature of the Old Testament. 
 
 The Commentaries, etc., etc. 
 
 Philology. 
 
 See Introduction above. 
 Schaff's Theological Propaedeutic. 
 Weidner's Exegetical Theology. 
 Bissell's Biblical Antiquities. 
 Clarke's Shemitic Alphabets. 
 By-Paths of Bible Knowledge (Series). 
 Briggs' Biblical Study. 
 Bible Cyclopaedias, etc. 
 
 Criticism. 
 
 Green's Moses and the Prophets. 
 
 Green's Higher Criticism of the Pentateuch. 
 
 Green's Unity of Genesis. 
 
 Green's Hebrew Feasts. 
 
232 LITERATURE AND AUTHORITIES. 
 
 Bissell's The Pentateuch, its Origin and Structure. 
 Bissell's Genesis in Colors. 
 Davidson's and Driver's Introductions. 
 Briggs' Higher Criticism of the Hexateuch. 
 Anti-Higher Criticism by different writers. 
 Sayce's Higher Criticism and the Monuments. 
 Zenos' Elements of Higher Criticism, etc. 
 
 Commentaries. 
 
 (On the whole or greater portions of the Old Testament.) 
 Keil and Delitzsch. 
 Lange. 
 
 Speaker's Commentary. 
 Pulpit Commentary. 
 Expositor's Bible. 
 OreUi. 
 
 Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges. 
 Ellicott. 
 Hengstenberg. 
 Pusey. 
 
 (On separate Old Testament Books.) 
 Delitzsch Commentar liber die Genesis. 
 Jacobus on Genesis. 
 C. H. H. Wright on Genesis. 
 J. G. Murphy on Genesis, Exodus and Leviticus. 
 Bush on Exodus. 
 Hengstenberg on Exodus. 
 Ginsburg on Leviticus. 
 Kalisch on the Prophecies of Balaam. 
 On Numbers and Deuteronomy, see 
 Keil, Lange and Schaff. 
 Crosby on Joshua. 
 Bush on Judges. 
 Cassell on Judges and Ruth. 
 Morison on Ruth. 
 Wright's Ruth in Hebrew. 
 Driver's Hebrew Text of Samuel. 
 Edersheim's The Temple. 
 Edersheim's Israel under Samuel, Saul and David. 
 
LITERATURE AND AUTHORITIES. 233 
 
 Stanley's Sinai and Palestine. 
 
 Stanley's Lectures on the History of the Jewish Church. 
 
 Krummacher's Elijah and Elisha. 
 
 Ryle on Ezra. 
 
 Hunter's After The Exile. 
 
 Haley on Esther. 
 
 Lewis on Job. 
 
 Davidson on Job. 
 
 Cox on Job. 
 
 Dillmann on Job. 
 
 Perowne on The Psalms. 
 
 DeWitt on The Psalms. 
 
 Hengstenberg on The Psalms. 
 
 Ewald on The Psalms. 
 
 Stuart on The Proverbs. 
 
 Arnot on The Proverbs. 
 
 Cheyne on The Proverbs. 
 
 Hengstenberg on Ecclesiastes. 
 
 Stuart on Ecclesiastes. 
 
 Ginsburg on Ecclesiastes. 
 
 Cheyne on Ecclesiastes. 
 
 Wright on The Book of Koheleth. 
 
 Stuart on The Song of Songs. 
 
 Ewald on The Song of Songs. 
 
 Ginsburg on The Song of Songs. 
 
 Delitzsch on The Canticles. 
 
 Alexander on Isaiah. 
 
 Ewald on Isaiah. 
 
 Cheyne on Isaiah. 
 
 Smith, Orelli and other general Commentaries on Jeremiah 
 and The Lamentations. 
 
 Cowles on Ezekiel and Daniel. 
 
 Fairbairn on Ezekiel. 
 
 Hengstenberg on Ezekiel. 
 
 Hitzig on Ezekiel. 
 
 Stuart on Daniel. 
 
 Pusey on Daniel. 
 
 Wuensche's Hosea. 
 
 Drake on Jonah and Hosea. 
 
234 LITERATURE AND AUTHORITIES. 
 
 Credner on Joel. 
 
 See general Commentaries on Amos. 
 
 Caspar! on Obadiah. 
 
 Randolph's Obadiah and Habakkuk. 
 
 Fairbairn's Jonah. 
 
 Martin's Jonah. 
 
 W. Wright's Jonah. 
 
 Caspari and general Commentaries on Micah. 
 
 See the general Commentaries on Nahum, Habakkuk and 
 Zephaniah. 
 
 Moore, Wright, Kohler and general Commentaries on Hag- 
 gai, Zechariah and Malachi. 
 
 (These separate Commentaries are in addition to the general 
 and standard Commentaries mentioned above. ) 
 
 A few among various miscellaneous works of especial value 
 to the Old Testament student are as follows: 
 
 Cremer's Biblico-Theological Lexicon. 
 
 Oehler's Old Testament Theology. 
 
 Elliott's Old Testament Prophecy. 
 
 Lewis' Six Days of Creation. 
 
 Geikie's Hours of the Bible. 
 
 Curtiss' The Levitical Priests. 
 
 Godet's Biblical Studies. 
 
 Fairbairn's Typology. 
 
 Jukes's Types of Genesis. 
 
 Seiss's Holy Types. 
 
 Girdlestone's Hebrew Synonyms. 
 
 Trumbull's Blood Covenant. 
 
 The Polychrome Bible. 
 
 The Warburtonian Lectures (Series). 
 
 Tomkin's Times of Abraham. 
 
 Works of the Palestine Exploration Survey and of the Egyp- 
 tian Exploration Fund, etc., etc. 
 
INDEX. 235 
 
 NDEX. 
 
 PAGES. 
 
 Preface 3 
 
 Introductory Statement njKDn Old Testament Philology 5-22 
 Section I. The Original Languages of the Old Tes- 
 tament 5 
 
 Section 11. The Shemitic Languages 5 
 
 Section III. Alphahet and Alphabetical Writing, . 7 
 
 Section IV. The Hebrew Language 9 
 
 Section V. Hebrew Language and Literature in 
 
 the Mosaic Period. 10 
 
 Section VI. Hebrew Language and Literature in 
 
 the Davidic and Solomonic Period 12 
 
 Section VII. Hebrew Language and Literature in 
 
 the Exilian and Post-Exilian Period 14 
 
 Section VIII. Moabitish, Old and Late Phoenician. 16 
 
 Section IX. The Aramaic or North Shemitic 18 
 
 Section X. The Arabic or South Shemetic 21 
 
 Genesis 23-37 
 
 Genealogical Tables to Genesis 38 
 
 Exodus 39-42 
 
 Table of Sacred Seasons, Feasts, Sacrifices 43-45 
 
 Leviticus 45-49 
 
 Numbers 49-53 
 
 Deuteronomy 53-56 
 
 Joshua 56-63 
 
 Judges 63-67 
 
 Ruth 68-69 
 
 First and Second Samuel 69-75 
 
 Table of The Kings 76-77 
 
 First and Second Kings 78-83 
 
23(J INDEX. 
 
 First and Second Chronicles 83-87 
 
 Ezra 88-91 
 
 Nehemiah 91-94 
 
 Esther 94-96 
 
 Hebrew Poetry 97-99 
 
 Job 99-110 
 
 The Psalms 110-118 
 
 The Proverbs 118-131 
 
 Ecclesiastes 121-128 
 
 The Song of Songs 128-138 
 
 Prophet-Prophecy 138-141 
 
 Table of the Prophets , 142 
 
 Isaiah 143-157 
 
 Jeremiah 158-164 
 
 The Lamentations 165-167 
 
 Ezekiel 167-172 
 
 Daniel 172-177 
 
 Hosea 177-183 
 
 Joel 183-187 
 
 Amos 187-191 
 
 Obadiah 191-194 
 
 Jonah 194-199 
 
 Micah 199-205 
 
 Nahum 205-208 
 
 Habakkuk 208-211 
 
 Zephaniah 211-213 
 
 Haggai 214-217 
 
 Zechariah 217-225 
 
 Malachi 226-230 
 
 Literature 231-234 
 
 Index 235-236 
 
WORKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 
 
 An Arabic Manual. The Elements of Arabic Grammar. 
 Published by Charles Scribner's Sons. Second 
 edition. 
 
 The American Revised Version of the Book of Psalms. 
 Edited. Published by Fords, Howard and Hul- 
 bert. 
 
 Outlines of the Archaeology of the Old Testament. 
 
 Outlines of Special Introduction to the Books of the 
 Old Testament. Second Edition. 
 
 IN PREPARATION. 
 
 An E]xposition of The Song of Songs. 
 Studies in Messianic Prophecy. 
 


 
 ^*^''^iv%iip^Pi., 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K^^K 
 
 :^$:Xn 
 
 
 
 
 1^! 
 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 m^-. 
 ^'.